Home

ZyXEL ES-3148 Series User's Manual

1. 85 8 1 Introduction to IEEE 802 10 Tagged VLANS euius ated ak pinta n d abin Lipa Rada LA Rud 85 8 1 1 Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames eese ee eee tenute ee 85 6 2 Agmalie VLAN RegS TION siisii Heo LASER Fra T RR a E EMI OLL SERO A3 RAIN 86 Cu ptr ll E T 86 cR C EI E EN E E E E E E N E T E E iets 86 D Pol VLAN TONKINO euii a a RD EA UR HERE SURE Pau e nda 87 GR alae tie Imp Mus ees nausea ieee eaten 87 To StS VEAN A 87 mo ARIES VLAN SIINI aiora anea AEE AA DEA AAO AA EA OAS Era ci RR UAR E PUER YI QD 88 2 5 2 Stati VLAN Detail RR 88 25s Congue a os VLAN osno 89 0 5 4 Conngure VLAN Fort Sells uscuueccereb ee aR 90 edo Subnet Based VLAN M 92 Gf Configuring Subnet Based VLAN esses nessa resi betta bna ieena bua Ubri A RUE R GM A bua dienes 93 5 8 Protocol Based VUANS Suisses nna ewan aoa austen 94 BS Coniiguring Protocol Based VLAN 2 inrer a Eph Sa ER RP Ln ER d o Ft d aaa 95 8 10 Create an IP based VLAN Example e cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeceeeeeeeeesaeenssenaeeeeeeeees 97 511 Porbbased VLAN SOIN qucseneenetdscteteo beliveseo dein den edd ete e ote EU EQHA OE SET IGIEE SUEDE CENE ERUP ALIE 98 8 11 1 Configure a Portbasad VLAN 1 2 a rrt er Pro nanan AN PR AIR UH AS x 98 Chapter 9 Stale MAC Forward Sepp uiss seuiu ERE NR Seu NRE a RUM nSUR SS REA SR ER rA nM QN USQu KU S
2. Ifyou have a static IP address enter static in the BOOTPROTO field Type IPADDR followed by the IP address in dotted decimal notation and type NETMASK followed by the subnet mask The following example shows an example where the static IP address is 192 168 1 10 and the subnet mask 1s 255 255 255 0 Figure 193 Red Hat 9 0 Static IP Address Setting in ifconfig ethO DEVICE ethO0 ONBOOT yes BOOTPROTO static IPADDR 192 168 1 10 NETMASK 255 255 255 0 USERCTL no PEERDNS yes TYPE Ethernet 2 Ifyou know your DNS server IP address es enter the DNS server information in the resolv conf file in the etc directory The following figure shows an example where two DNS server IP addresses are specified Figure 194 Red Hat 9 0 DNS Settings in resolv conf nameserver 172 23 5 1 nameserver 172 23 5 2 3 After you edit and save the configuration files you must restart the network card Enter network restart inthe etc rc d init d directory The following figure shows an example Figure 195 Red Hat 9 0 Restart Ethernet Card root localhost init d network restart Shutting down interface eth0 OK Shutting down loopback interface OK Setting network parameters OK Bringing up loopback interface OK Bringing up interface eth0 OK ES 3148 User s Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Verifying Settings
3. 9 284 Chapter 38 Product SOSCITICAU ON Sicijcisissvaeasvecisaiiciaspsiscanissvenidvanisaanadarkeavaucesdvasadntalidilacssandancicinchiascndiontas 287 38 1 General Switch Sp cifications 1 ere rr erbe Lp den eb ka divas e p dad Lex x Ya xe ed ba anni clickers 287 30 2 Cable Pin c nur 290 Part V Appendices and Index eeeeeeeeseeeeeeee 293 Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address sssssssseem 295 Appendix B Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions sssss 317 ES 3148 User s Guide Table of Contents Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting sssssssss HH 325 Appendix D Common SeniCE EE TR 335 Appendix E Importing Certificates ET T 339 i rep F Legal information vesiis S 345 Appendix G Customer s RE T UU 349 i m ee ner ren E 355 ES 3148 User s Guide List of Figures List of Figures Figure T Backbene ADDIIESUD scares ssi capes n pa tages A rc oec op AE Bb aada eri Das eas 33 Figure 2 Bridging Applicaton ewm 34 Figure 3 High performance Switched ADDIIGSllOFl iiie snciscencecansscennaanine sestscaicesewaareieceueiceeenenense 34 Figure 4 Tag based VLAN BBUCSBONM q iipcttt day p DL IX RERO niini A AN E ES 35 Figure 5 Shared Server Using VLAN Example 25e isetret rer p vier eri rre pepe HEN ERE P TR CHEF
4. 215 Table 81 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure gt Port 217 ES 3148 User s Guide List of Tables Table 82 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure gt VLAN 218 Table 83 Advanced Application gt Loop Guard siiccicccissnesiccstseraaceeanassneseeaisassccneescarcdnaacannandanacanaadcesnneans 221 Table 84 IP Application gt Static OMNE auus vesci ie bp seniii e iee vu EL eA Eee HEX E oniar Nada 223 Table 65 IP Applicaton DMS ery 14 ioc pa ena ea RODA tr t cede o oe Oe xt bc e e uu a a 228 Table 86 IP Application gt DiffServ gt 2 rate 3 Color Marker cccccccceeeccececceceeeeeeeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeeaseseeees 229 Table 57 Default DECP IEEE 8021p Mapping cciscscccossseces icciisesusccccrscandeeteneduneeduoadseareetsiadeliscctaxeneecct 230 Table 88 IP Application gt DiffServ gt DSCP Setting iccnicwie sinssceussasenseonias ERR FEY E Spb Fa E danpaeninrdanwontessinnys 291 Table 89 IP Application DACP Statis sennersnnssenanenn nn 234 Table 90 Relay Agent NOGA esa p dde iy RA d d o eo dd dli ened 235 Table 91 IP Application DACP gt Global 1i ana here a epa aie n a RYE YEA BOX Rabat Lega acta adt 245 Table 82 IP Application DACP S VEN c sassiicisrrcautesbiascuriensrssauctespracuiiccterdudensseniaeeuictesrabieiixentaauurneeae 237 Table 93 Management MalltellaltGB session ptt ar rrrr EFE oa YE DOG BER
5. 161 21 2 Weighed Far QUSE cca Pen ere REESE RED EDO RB Peete rr er Pret rrr reer rrr ree ttre 161 20 1 3 Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR sdcccsseiseersaneteceteneiadeeeaeeenceaaenceannes 162 20 2 CONTIQUNING QUBUING M 162 Chapter 21 pE eat e uad E A E E T T E T EN 165 21 1 VLAN Stacking i i M TT 165 21 1 1 VLAN Stacking Example cicccsssccsderccsscasaecrecscncadustasncsduy vwosneduer an a Aiii 165 212 VLAN SiBcanmg For Roles 2s da Lid dan t iden needed audent Gd d ge da 166 ub xb MSAN TO SUNSET 167 2L 1 deir 167 21 4 Conliguring VLAN Stacking M TY Rm 168 Chapter 22 Malica pm 171 22 1 TuIIEes nu A 171 ES 3148 User s Guide 15 Table of Contents 220 LIF IT 4n T m 171 vor EM EUST ECT o E 171 22a eic 171 22 131 IMP Shooping and VLANS Lucus edereris see aoreet pem ia dts c d ed otl rod 172 2r 2 tier EE 172 22 3 Vulticasi SeN e 172 22 5 IOMP Snooping VLAN scevussenaneatinssiincatises kre aeinn RE pa o EAEN EE per EE reU Ead boa tede 174 225 ONP Pillering PONE M o o ues DOSSIERS 176 Erg gus I Fev e 177 2201 Types DI MVR PONG cata ch ew es code eti pd a N dr D 177 2202 MYR MOES 178 220 SHOW MYR WORS Lua ier HE E
6. sssessssssssseeeeernnene 163 Table S2 VLAN Tag leur 167 Table 53 Single and Double Tagged 802 11Q Frame Format ssssse e 167 Tabie 54 802 1G Frame orarin nEn NORE 167 Table 55 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking iuissscccssrleser diem pe E ER Rn ELE ES Rp FER oL HE He P LIS opt 168 IE SS SIE E PER 172 Table 57 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting sssssssssseeee 173 Table 58 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Snooping VLAN 175 Table 59 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile 176 Table 60 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR sss 179 Table 61 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR Group Configuration 181 Table 62 RADIUS ve DACING ES siiksscccccuasahenciosdaantacagananloeaaapannosadannnhoeaedanaannleraninatoisauaaloecanmaninmenn anaes 186 Table 63 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt RADIUS Server Setup sss 187 Table 64 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt TACACS Server Setup seeessssss 189 Table 65 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt Auth and Acct Setup sss 191 Table Be Supone VBAS Mmmm 193 Table 67 Supported Tunnel Protocol Attribute scais
7. ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard 24 7 ARP Inspection Configure Use this screen to enable ARP inspection on the Switch You can also configure the length of time the Switch stores records of discarded ARP packets and global settings for the ARP inspection log To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure Figure 109 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure OF Inspection Configure J Port VLAN ARP Inspection Active Filter Aging Time Filter aging time 300 seconds Log Profile Log buffer size 32 entries Syslog rate 5 entries Log interval 1 seconds Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 80 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to enable ARP inspection on the Switch You still have to enable ARP inspection on specific VLAN and specify trusted ports Filter Aging Time Filter aging time This setting has no effect on existing MAC address filters Enter how long 1 2147483647 seconds the MAC address filter remains in the Switch after the Switch identifies an unauthorized ARP packet The Switch automatically deletes the MAC address filter afterwards Enter O if you want the MAC address filter to be permanent Log Profile Log buffer size Enter the maximum
8. Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Ingress Rate Active Select this check box to activate commit rate limits on this port Commit Specify the guaranteed bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second Kbps for the Rate incoming traffic flow on a port The commit rate should be less than the peak rate The sum of commit rates cannot be greater than or equal to the uplink bandwidth Active Select this check box to activate peak rate limits on this port Peak Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second Kbps for the incoming Rate traffic flow on a port Active Select this check box to activate egress rate limits on this port Egress Rate Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second Kbps for the out going traffic flow on a port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES 3148 User s Guide Broadcast Storm Control
9. ES 3148 User s Guide Port Authentication This chapter describes the IEEE 802 1x and MAC authentication methods 16 1 Port Authentication Overview BS 16 1 1 Port authentication is a way to validate access to ports on the Switch to clients based on an external server authentication server The Switch supports the following methods for port authentication IEEE 802 1x An authentication server validates access to a port based on a username and password provided by the user MAC An authentication server validates access to a port based on the MAC address and password of the client Both types of authentication use the RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RFC 2138 2139 protocol to validate users See Section 23 1 2 on page 186 for more information on configuring your RADIUS server settings If you enable IEEE 802 1x authentication and MAC authentication on the same port the Switch performs IEEE 802 1x authentication first If a user fails to authenticate via the IEEE 802 1x method then access to the port is denied IEEE 802 1x Authentication The following figure illustrates how a client connecting to a IEEE 802 1x authentication enabled port goes through a validation process The Switch prompts the client for login information in the form of a user name and password When the client provides the login credentials the Switch sends an authentication request to a RADIUS server The RADIUS se
10. Status Manager Manager 00 13 49 00 00 02 Figure 156 Management gt Cluster Management Configuration The Number Of Member 1 Index MacAddr Name 1 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 Status Online 270 ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 33 Cluster Management The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 113 Management gt Cluster Management LABEL DESCRIPTION Status This field displays the role of this Switch within the cluster Manager Member you see this if you access this screen in the cluster member switch directly and not via the cluster manager None neither a manager nor a member of a cluster Manager This field displays the cluster manager switch s hardware MAC address The Number of This field displays the number of switches that make up this cluster The following Member fields describe the cluster member switches Index You can manage cluster member switches via the cluster manager switch Each number in the Index column is a hyperlink leading to the cluster member switch s web configurator see Figure 157 on page 271 MacAddr This is the cluster member switch s hardware MAC address Name This is the cluster member switch s System Name Model This field displays the model name Status This field displays Online the cluster member switch is accessible Error for example the cluster member switch password was changed or the switch was set as the m
11. VID Enabled Option82 Information ui No O r1 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 76 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping gt Configure gt VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Show VLAN Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to manage in the section below Start VID Enter the lowest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below End VID Enter the highest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below Apply Click this to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above If you configure the VLAN the settings are applied to all VLANs Enabled Select Yes to enable DHCP snooping on the VLAN You still have to enable DHCP snooping on the Switch and specify trusted ports Note The Switch will drop all DHCP requests if you enable DHCP snooping and there are no trusted ports Option82 Select this to have the Switch add the slot number port number and VLAN ID to DHCP requests that it broadcasts to the DHCP VLAN if specified or VLAN You can specify the DHCP VLAN in the DHCP Snooping Configure screen See Section 24 5 on page 208 Information Select this to have the Switch add the system name to DHCP requests that it broadcasts to the DHCP VLAN if specified or VLAN You can configure the system name in the General Setup screen See Chapt
12. ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 23 Authentication amp Accounting Table 64 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt TACACS Server Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external TACACS server and the Switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external TACACS server and the Switch Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing TACACS server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Accounting Use this section to configure your TACACS accounting settings Server Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an accounting request response from the TACACS server Index This is a read only number representing a TACACS accounting server entry IP Address Enter the IP address of an external TACACS accounting server in dotted decimal notation TCP Port The default port of a TACACS accounting server is 49 You need not change this value unless your network administrato
13. 8 10 Create an IP based VLAN Example This example shows you how to create an IP VLAN which includes ports 1 4 and 8 Follow these steps 1 a kf WS N 6 Activate this protocol based VLAN Type the port number you want to include in this protocol based VLAN Type 1 Give this protocol based VLAN a descriptive name Type IP VLAN Select the protocol Leave the default value IP Type the VLAN ID of an existing VLAN In our example we already created a static VLAN with an ID of 5 Type 5 Leave the priority set to 0 and click Add Figure 40 Protocol Based VLAN Configuration Example dex Vlan Port Setting Ethernet type VID Priority Active Port Name Ethernet type VID Priority Delete Delete Cancel To add more ports to this protocol based VLAN 1 Click the index number of the protocol based VLAN entry Click 1 2 Change the value in the Port field to the next port you want to add 3 Click Add ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN 8 11 Port based VLAN Setup Port based VLANs are VLANs where the packet forwarding decision is based on the destination MAC address and its associated port Port based VLANs require allowed outgoing ports to be defined for each port Therefore if you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other for example between conference rooms in a hotel you must define the egress an egress port is an outgoing port that is a port through which a d
14. G Switch to Category View Edit View Favorites Tools Help See Also 5 Game A Windows Update Controllers 3 Right click Local Area Connection and then click Properties ES 3148 User s Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 170 Windows XP Control Panel Network Connections Properties s Network Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help ck v Ss 2 ya Search Folders E 5 e Network Connections LAN or High Speed Internet Network Tasks ocal 4rea Connection E Create anew d connection Standard PCI Fast Ethernet Adapte 9 Set up a home or small Disable office network Stat atus Disable this network device Repair W Repair this connection Bridge Connections mij Rename this connection view status of this connection Change settings of this connection Create Shortcut 4 Select Internet Protocol TCP IP under the General tab in Win XP and then click Properties Figure 171 Windows XP Local Area Connection Properties 4 Local Area Connection Properties General Authentication Advanced Connect using B Accton EN1207D TX PCI Fast Ethernet Adapter This connection uses the following items ied Client for Microsoft Networks ivi vi Internet Protocol TCP IP Description Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communic
15. Interface Vv local use 0 v Switch Vv localuse 0 v AAA Vv local use 0 v IP Vv local use 0 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 110 Management gt Syslog LABEL DESCRIPTION Syslog Select Active to turn on syslog system logging and then configure the syslog setting Logging Type This column displays the names of the categories of logs that the device can generate Active Select this option to set the device to generate logs for the corresponding category Facility The log facility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for more details Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 32 3 Syslog Server Setup Click Management gt Syslog gt Syslog Server Setup to open the following screen Use this screen to configure a list of external syslog servers ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 32 Syslog Figure 154 Management gt Syslog gt Server Setup e OSCE aa Syslog Setup Active O Server Address 0 0 0 0 Log Level Level 0 Add Cancel Clear Ind
16. OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION stp STPNewRoot 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 1 This trap is sent when the STP root switch changes MRSTPNewRoot 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 17 36 2 1 This trap is sent when the MRSTP root switch changes MSTPNewRoot 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 17 107 7 This trap is sent when the MSTP 0 1 root switch changes STPTopologyChange 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 2 This trap is sent when the STP topology changes MRSTPTopologyChange 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 17 36 2 2 This trap is sent when the MRSTP topology changes MSTPTopologyChange 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 17 107 7 This trap is sent when the MSTP 0 2 root switch changes mactable MacTableFullEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 17 32 2 1 This trap is sent when more than 99 of the MAC table is used MacTableFullEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 17 32 2 2 This trap is sent when less than 95 of the MAC table is used rmon RmonRisingAlarm 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 0 1 This trap is sent when a variable goes over the RMON rising threshold RmonFallingAlarm 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 0 2 This trap is sent when the variable falls below the RMON falling threshold 30 3 4 Configuring SNMP From the Access Control screen display the SNMP screen go back to the Access Control screen You can click Access Control to ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 30 Access Control Figure 140 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP iD Access Control Trap Group General Setting Version v2c m Get Communi
17. Tx KB s This field shows the number kilobytes per second transmitted on this port Rx KB s This field shows the number of kilobytes per second received on this port ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics Table 8 Status gt Port Details continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Up Time This field shows the total amount of time the connection has been up Tx Packet The following fields display detailed information about packets transmitted TX This field shows the number of good packets unicast multicast and broadcast Packets transmitted Multicast This field shows the number of good multicast packets transmitted Broadcast This field shows the number of good broadcast packets transmitted Pause This field shows the number of 802 3x Pause packets transmitted Tagged This field shows the number of packets with VLAN tags transmitted Rx Packet The following fields display detailed information about packets received RX This field shows the number of good packets unicast multicast and broadcast Packets received Multicast This field shows the number of good multicast packets received Broadcast This field shows the number of good broadcast packets received Pause This field shows the number of 802 3x Pause packets received Control This field shows the number of control packets received including those with CRC error but
18. WAN LAN ETHERNET CABLE PIN LAYOUT 1 IRD masmmmmmmmmmm 1 OTD 1 IRD 2 IRD 2 OTD 2 IRD OTD 3 IRD 3 OTD T 6 OTD 6 IRD 6 OTD IRD IRD OTD 6 OTD ES 3148 User s Guide PART V Appendices and Index The appendices provide general information Some details may not apply to your Switch Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 295 Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 317 IP Addresses and Subnetting 325 Common Services 335 Importing Certificates 339 Legal Information 345 Customer Support 349 Index 355 Setting up Your Computer s IP Address All computers must have a 10M or 100M Ethernet adapter card and TCP IP installed Windows 95 98 Me NT 2000 XP Vista Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems and all versions of UNIX LINUX include the software components you need to install and use TCP IP on your computer Windows 3 1 requires the purchase of a third party TCP IP application package TCP IP should already be installed on computers using Windows NT 2000 XP Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems After the appropriate TCP IP components are installed configure the TCP IP settings in order to communicate with your network If you manually assign IP information instead of using dynamic assignment make sure that your computers have IP addresses that place them in the same subnet as the Switch s LAN port Window
19. Chapter 34 MAC Table 34 2 Viewing the MAC Table Click Management gt MAC Table in the navigation panel to display the following screen 276 Figure 161 Management gt MAC Table Sort by Index 1 z 3 4 5 Mac Table MAC VID Port MAC Address VID Port Type 00 85 30 01 01 00 1 8 dynamic 00 85 30 01 01 04 1 8 dynamic 00 a0 c5 00 00 01 1 2 dynamic 00 a0 c5 fe ea 71 1 CPU static 00 a0 c5 fe ea 71 2 CPU static The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 116 Management gt MAC Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Sort by Click one of the following buttons to display and arrange the data according to that button type The information is then displayed in the summary table below MAC Click this button to display and arrange the data according to MAC address VID Click this button to display and arrange the data according to VLAN group Port Click this button to display and arrange the data according to port number Index This is the incoming frame index number MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device from which this incoming frame came VID This is the VLAN group to which this frame belongs Port This is the port from which the above MAC address was learned Type This shows whether the MAC address is dynamic learned by the Switch or static manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen ES 3148 User s Guide ARP Table This c
20. DSCP 6 bits Unused 2 bits The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior the PHB Per Hop Behavior that each packet gets across the DiffServ network Based on the marking rule different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies ES 3148 User s Guide 155 Chapter 19 Policy Rule 19 2 Configuring Policy Rules You must first configure a classifier in the Classifier screen Refer to Section 18 2 on page 149 for more information Click Advanced Applications gt Policy Rule in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 75 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule amp Policy Active rH Name Classifier s General Metering VLAN ID Bandwidth Kbps Out of Profile Egress Port 1 DSCP Parameters Outgoing packet format for Egress port amp Tag C Untag Priority jo gt DSCP TOS fo gt Forwarding No change C Discard the packet C Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping Priority No change Setthe packet s 802 1 priority Send the packet to priority queue C Replace the 802 1 priority field with the IP TOS value Diffserv No change Setthe packet s TOS field C Replace the IP TOS field with the 802 1 priority value Action C Setthe Diffserv Codepoint field in the frame Outgoing Send the packetto the mirror port Send the packet
21. Perr To configure the MVR settings on the Switch create a multicast group in the MVR screen and set the receiver and source ports Figure 90 MVR Configuration Example OD Active Iv Name Multicast VLAN ID 802 1p Priority o J Mode Port Source Port Om Ov Pw t a 9 KEE Premium 200 Multicast Setting Group Configuration None Tagging e e To set the Switch to forward the multicast group traffic to the subscribers configure multicast group settings in the Group Configuration screen The following figure shows an example where two multicast groups News and Movie are configured for the multicast VLAN 200 ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 22 Multicast Figure 91 MVR Group Configuration Example c Ear Multicast VLAN ID 200 onfiguration lt 5 Name End Address Movie Ries 230 1 2 60 MVLAN Name Start Address End Address Delete All Delete Group 200 m News 224 1 4 10 224 1 4 50 Li Delete Cancel Figure 92 MVR Group Configuration Example NEGCmaecmurumcrn MVR Multicast VLAN ID 200 Name Start Address End Address poo 0 0 0 0 MVLAN Name Start Addre End Address Delete All Delete Group Movie 230 1 2 50 230 1 2 60 Dn News 2241 4 10 224 1 4 50 Delete Cancel ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 22 Multicast ES 3148 User s Guide Authentication amp Accounting
22. temperature goes above or below the normal operating range TemperatureEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 17 32 2 2 This trap is sent when the temperature returns to the normal operating range ES 3148 User s Guide 247 Chapter 30 Access Control Table 98 SNMP System Traps continued OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION voltage VoltageEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 17 32 2 1 This trap is sent when the voltage goes above or below the normal operating range VoltageEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 17 32 2 2 This trap is sent when the voltage returns to the normal operating range reset UncontrolledResetEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 17 32 2 1 This trap is sent when the Switch automatically resets ControlledResetEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 17 32 2 1 This trap is sent when the Switch resets by an administrator through a management interface RebootEvent 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 0 1 This trap is sent when the Switch reboots by an administrator through a management interface timesync RTCNotUpdatedEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 17 32 2 1 This trap is sent when the Switch fails to get the time and date from a time server RTCNotUpdatedEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 17 32 2 2 This trap is sent when the Switch gets the time and date from a time server intrusionloc k IntrusionLockEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890
23. 1234 and the IP address to 192 168 1 1 To upload the configuration file do the following 1 Connect to the console port using a computer with terminal emulation software See Section 3 2 1 on page 46 for details 2 Disconnect and reconnect the Switch s power to begin a session When you reconnect the Switch s power you will see the initial screen ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 3 When you see the message Press any key to enter Debug Mode within 3 seconds press any key to enter debug mode 4 Type atic after the Enter Debug Mode message 5 Wait for the Starting XMODEM upload message before activating XMODEM upload on your terminal 6 After a configuration file upload type atgo to restart the Switch Figure 18 Resetting the Switch Via the Console Port Bootbase Version V0 6 03 06 2006 09 21 13 RAM Size 32 Mbytes DRAM POST Testing 32768K OK DRAM Test SUCCESS FLASH Intel 32M ZyNOS Version 3 70 AID 0 bO 4 28 2006 17 27 36 Press any key to enter debug mode within 3 seconds Enter Debug Mode Switch atlc Starting XMODEM upload CRC mode CCCOCCCCCCCCCCCC Total 262144 bytes received Erasing OK Switch gt atgo The Switch is now reinitialized with a default configuration file including the default password of 1234 4 7 Logging Out of the Web Configurator Click Logout in a screen to exit the web
24. 30 2 The Access Control Main Screen Click Management gt Access Control in the navigation panel to display the main screen as shown Figure 138 Management gt Access Control ORS ontro SNMP Logins Service Access Control Remote Management Click Here Click Here Click Here Click Here ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 30 Access Control 30 3 About SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is an application layer protocol used to manage and monitor TCP IP based devices SNMP is used to exchange management information between the network management system NMS and a network element NE A manager station can manage and monitor the Switch through the network via SNMP version one SNMPv1 SNMP version 2c or SNMP version 3 The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation SNMP is only available if TCP IP is configured Figure 139 SNMP Management Model Manager Al Agent Agent Agent Managed Device Managed Device Managed Device An SNMP managed network consists of two main components agents and a manager An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed Switch the Switch An agent translates the local management information from the managed Switch into a form compatible with SNMP The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management functions It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices
25. Bridge Protocol Data Units transmitted from the root bridge If a bridge does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval Max Age the bridge assumes that the link to the root bridge is down This bridge then initiates negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to re establish a valid network topology ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol 11 1 3 STP Port States STP assigns five port states to eliminate packet looping A bridge port is not allowed to go directly from blocking state to forwarding state so as to eliminate transient loops Table 25 STP Port States PORT STATE DESCRIPTION Disabled STP is disabled default Blocking Only configuration and management BPDUs are received and processed Listening All BPDUs are received and processed Note The listening state does not exist in RSTP Learning All BPDUs are received and processed Information frames are submitted to the learning process but not forwarded Forwarding All BPDUs are received and processed All information frames are received and forwarded 11 1 4 Multiple RSTP MRSTP Multiple RSTP is ZyXEL s proprietary feature that is compatible with RSTP and STP With MRSTP you can have more than one spanning tree on your Switch and assign port s to each tree Each spanning tree operates independently with its own bridge information In the following example there are two RSTP instances
26. Click Advanced Application gt Port Authentication in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 68 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication Port Authentication 802 1x MAC Authentication Click here Click here 16 2 1 Activate IEEE 802 1x Security Use this screen to activate IEEE 802 1x security In the Port Authentication screen click 802 1x to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 69 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1x DELAD Active Port Active 4 0 1 0 14 0 iN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 r Port Authentication Reauthentication 2 OF OF OE OCF OF OF OF O Shas ES hss EIENEN EAEN EIIE o 4 Reauthentication Timer seconds 600 seconds 88 600 seconds co 600 seconds seconds seconds 600 seconds ce SIS seconds co 600 seconds d woo EE NE NE ES OT P Po WOW OWS Apply Cancel ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 16 Port Authentication The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 41 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1x LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to permit 802 1x authentication on the Switch Note You must first enable 802 1x authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port Port This field displays a port number i Settings in this r
27. IIe AAA aG MPMM Pee PP e MMMMM m vre IPP ee ee PIMP v ee PIM le avFwrFEEEEEFvrsEEEEEFvrsEEEEErr vEEPEEErr vEEEEEr BVM RPP IMP vtri tI YIII ve e e AMAMMA y BYR VR PRIMM MIME Phe PIMP eee trt v vim vtm RERNEEIVII vtri vtm vii ee lI mx BVP VR PRIM PPM vitii Pee Pe PIMP ee e PI vtr Im Pml v FIEFEEFrrrrrEFFEFFrrrrrFEFFFEFrErrrrEFFEFEIrrrrrFIFEFEFEI rrrr x UMPIRE Pee PP PPP Pee PP IPP ttti rtt O m eVPIMM PREV RP e MMMMM r r Pe IMI ee IPI rtt Wiviviiviivi e v v r v Iiiiiviiviiv e v amp v v IMM Pee ee IM rrt FIEIEIEIE e r e p EPRRRE A E EE E z e e e p EIE EIE EE ll never rrt ee ee PIPPI ee ee PIPPI Pee ee PIPPI Ea 2vvvr EP vr gt ORR r r gt ORR v vEEEEEvEEEEET BMV RR VBI MPV PO MMe VP IMP ee ee IMI eee lll v 2 F P E 7 PIPRIRIENS EEEREN IIIS EREKE PIII aVR RR RRM MPV PO PIM ee PO PIMP ree IMI ee el v as lt PIPIPIPIP gt v v amp v EEIEIEIE rF v PIII v v oO EEIEIEIEI v Po IRI 9 v v I Outgoing z MMMMM v Iv iv iv PRIMM PP iv Iv I Iv I PTT Ve I Iv Ve Iv Iv Iv Ie FD III Iv Iv Ie Iv Ie MA n s MAMMAM v vivi vvv vivi vmi ttv s vivi v vtri vr rri vtri rrr WII PV e e e PM PIM PMV Pe Pe MIM e e PO vrl vv nv Pee Pe PIP rtm Pe ee ee PIPPI vtttvm ims znvvFrEIiviirttitiiviitEttiviiviiviriiviil viti vs seeERESEEIIIIrrtttriitEtitrIiiirrtiImm i ttti VRP RPM Itti vtile ee lll e s aMVR RM MMII PO IMM ve IIe Pe IMI Ve ee e MMMMM p v s s MMMM
28. MAC Table This chapter introduces the MAC Table screen 34 1 MAC Table Overview The MAC Table screen a MAC table is also known as a filtering database shows how frames are forwarded or filtered across the Switch s ports It shows what device MAC address belonging to what VLAN group if any is forwarded to which port s and whether the MAC address is dynamic learned by the Switch or static manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen The Switch uses the MAC table to determine how to forward frames See the following figure 1 The Switch examines a received frame and learns the port on which this source MAC address came 2 The Switch checks to see if the frame s destination MAC address matches a source MAC address already learned in the MAC table If the Switch has already learned the port for this MAC address then it forwards the frame to that port If the Switch has not already learned the port for this MAC address then the frame is flooded to all ports Too much port flooding leads to network congestion If the Switch has already learned the port for this MAC address but the destination port is the same as the port it came in on then it filters the frame e e Figure 160 MAC Table Flowchart Is destination MAC address in the MAC Table Forward to all ports Is the outgoing port different from the incoming port Filter this Forward to frame outgoing port ES 3148 User s Guide 275
29. Refer to RFC 2866 and RFC 2869 for RADIUS attributes used for accounting This appendix lists the attributes used by authentication and accounting functions on the Switch In cases where the attribute has a specific format associated with it the format is specified ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 23 Authentication amp Accounting 23 3 1 Attributes Used for Authentication The following sections list the attributes sent from the Switch to the RADIUS server when performing authentication 23 3 1 1 Attributes Used for Authenticating Privilege Access User Name the format of the User Name attribute is enabZ where is the privilege level 1 14 User Password NAS Identifier NAS IP Address 23 3 1 2 Attributes Used to Login Users User Name User Password NAS Identifier NAS IP Address 23 3 1 3 Attributes Used by the IEEE 802 1x Authentication User Name NAS Identifier NAS IP Address NAS Port NAS Port Type This value is set to Ethernet 15 on the Switch Calling Station Id Frame MTU EAP Message State Message Authenticator 23 3 2 Attributes Used for Accounting The following sections list the attributes sent from the Switch to the RADIUS server when performing authentication 23 3 2 1 Attributes Used for Accounting System Events NAS IP Address NAS Identifier Acct Status Type Acct Session ID The format of Acct Session Id is date time 8 digit sequential number for example 200704191721030000000
30. Select either 1 second or 30 seconds Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 15 6 Static Trunking Example This example shows you how to create a static port trunk group for ports 2 5 1 Make your physical connections make sure that the ports that you want to belong to the trunk group are connected to the same destination The following figure shows ports 2 5 on switch A connected to switch B Figure 64 Trunking Example Physical Connections 2 Configure static trunking Click Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting In this screen activate trunking group T1 and select the ports that should belong to this group as shown in the figure below Click Apply when you are done ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 15 Link Aggregation Figure 65 Trunking Example Configuration Screen Link gar egation Setting Status LACP 8 NOM he NO Nu BO etn itt Se e AIAI SI INI NIAI AAA Appi Cance Your trunk group 1 T1 configuration is now complete you do not need to go to any additional screens ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 15 Link Aggregation
31. This chapter describes how to configure authentication and accounting settings on the Switch 23 1 Authentication Authorization and Accounting Authentication is the process of determining who a user is and validating access to the Switch The Switch can authenticate users who try to log in based on user accounts configured on the Switch itself The Switch can also use an external authentication server to authenticate a large number of users Authorization is the process of determining what a user is allowed to do Different user accounts may have higher or lower privilege levels associated with them For example user A may have the right to create new login accounts on the Switch but user B cannot The Switch can authorize users based on user accounts configured on the Switch itself or it can use an external server to authorize a large number of users Accounting is the process of recording what a user is doing The Switch can use an external server to track when users log in log out execute commands and so on Accounting can also record system related actions such as boot up and shut down times of the Switch The external servers that perform authentication authorization and accounting functions are known as AAA servers The Switch supports RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service see Section 23 1 2 on page 186 and TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus see Section 23 1 2 on page 186 as external authent
32. s Guide Chapter 22 Multicast 22 6 2 MVR Modes You can set your Switch to operate in either dynamic or compatible mode In dynamic mode the Switch sends IGMP leave and join reports to the other multicast devices such as multicast routers or servers in the multicast VLAN This allows the multicast devices to update the multicast forwarding table to forward or not forward multicast traffic to the receiver ports In compatible mode the Switch does not send any IGMP reports In this case you must manually configure the forwarding settings on the multicast devices in the multicast VLAN 22 6 3 How MVR Works The following figure shows a multicast television example where a subscriber device such as a computer in VLAN 1 receives multicast traffic from the streaming media server S via the Switch Multiple subscriber devices can connect through a port configured as the receiver on the Switch When the subscriber selects a television channel computer A sends an IGMP report to the Switch to join the appropriate multicast group If the IGMP report matches one of the configured MVR multicast group addresses on the Switch an entry is created in the forwarding table on the Switch This maps the subscriber VLAN to the list of forwarding destinations for the specified multicast traffic When the subscriber changes the channel or turns off the computer an IGMP leave message is sent to the Switch to leave the multicast group The Switch
33. 28 1 2 DHCP Configuration Options The DHCP configuration on the Switch is divided into Global and VLAN screens The screen you should use for configuration depends on the DHCP services you want to offer the DHCP clients on your network Choose the configuration screen based on the following criteria Global The Switch forwards all DHCP requests to the same DHCP server e VLAN The Switch is configured on a VLAN by VLAN basis The Switch can relay DHCP requests from different VLAN to different DHCP servers 28 2 DHCP Status Click IP Application gt DHCP in the navigation panel The DHCP Status screen displays ES 3148 User s Guide 233 Chapter 28 DHCP Figure 125 IP Application gt DHCP Status aut Global VLAN Relay Status Relay Mode None The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 89 IP Application gt DHCP Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Relay Status This section displays configuration settings related to the Switch s DHCP relay mode Relay Mode This field displays None if the Switch is not configured as a DHCP relay agent Global if the Switch is configured as a DHCP relay agent only VLAN followed by a VLAN ID if it is configured as a relay agent for specific VLAN s 28 3 DHCP Relay Configure DHCP relay on the Switch if the DHCP clients and the DHCP server are not in the same broadcast domain During the initial IP address leasing the Swi
34. 4 Vs t Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 55 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to enable VLAN stacking on the Switch SP TPID SP TPID is a standard Ethernet type code identifying the frame and indicates whether the frame carries IEEE 802 1Q tag information Choose 0x8100 or 0x9100 from the drop down list box or select Others and then enter a four digit hexadecimal number from 0x0000 to OxFFFF Ox denotes a hexadecimal number It does not have to be typed in the Others text field Port The port number identifies the port you are configuring d Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking Table 55 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Role Select Normal to have the Switch ignore frames received or transmitted on this port with VLAN stacking tags Anything you configure in SPVID and Priority are ignored Select Access Port to have the Switch add the SP TPID tag to all incoming frames received on this port Select Access Port for ingress ports at the edge
35. 9600 bps No parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit No flow control Connect the male 9 pin end of the console cable to the console port of the Switch Connect the female end to a serial port COMI COM2 or other COM port of your computer 3 2 2 External Backup Power Supply Connector The Switch supports external backup power supply BPS ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview The backup power supply constantly monitors the status of the internal power supply The backup power supply automatically provides power to the Switch in the event of a power failure Once the Switch receives power from the backup power supply it will not automatically switch back to using the internal power supply even when the power is resumed 3 2 3 Power Connector Make sure you are using the correct power source as shown on the panel To connect the power to the Switch insert the female end of power cord to the power receptacle on the rear panel Connect the other end of the supplied power cord to the power source Make sure that no objects obstruct the airflow of the fans 3 3 LEDs The following table describes the LEDs on the Switch Table 3 LEDs LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION BPS Green Blinking The system is receiving power from the backup power supply On The backup power supply is connected and active Off The backup power supply is not ready or not a
36. Chapter 24 IP Source Guard 24 1 2 1 ARP Inspection and MAC Address Filters When the Switch identifies an unauthorized ARP packet it automatically creates a MAC address filter to block traffic from the source MAC address and source VLAN ID of the unauthorized ARP packet You can configure how long the MAC address filter remains in the Switch These MAC address filters are different than regular MAC address filters Chapter 10 on page 105 They are stored only in volatile memory They do not use the same space in memory that regular MAC address filters use They appear only in the ARP Inspection screens and commands not in the MAC Address Filter screens and commands 24 1 2 2 Trusted vs Untrusted Ports Every port is either a trusted port or an untrusted port for ARP inspection This setting is independent of the trusted untrusted setting for DHCP snooping The Switch does not discard ARP packets on trusted ports for any reason The Switch discards ARP packets on untrusted ports 1f the sender s information in the ARP packet does not match any of the current bindings 24 1 2 3 Syslog The Switch can send syslog messages to the specified syslog server Chapter 32 on page 265 when it forwards or discards ARP packets The Switch can consolidate log messages and send log messages in batches to make this mechanism more efficient 24 1 2 4 Configuring ARP Inspection Follow these steps to configure ARP inspection on the Swit
37. Mirroring Oi Active B Monitor Port fi Port Mirrored Direction m DULL ngress Ingress Ingress Ingress Ingress Ingress Ingress Ingress e NM OO fi win a HaHaHa HuHu Hua Ingress 7 Cancel ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 14 Mirroring The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 35 Advanced Application gt Mirroring LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to activate port mirroring on the Switch Clear this check box to disable the feature Monitor The monitor port is the port you copy the traffic to in order to examine it in more detail Port without interfering with the traffic flow on the original port s Enter the port number of the monitor port Port This field displays the port number x Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Mirrored Select this option to mirror the traffic on a port Direction Specify the direction of the traffic to mirror by selecting from the drop down list box Choices are Egress outgoing Ingress incoming and Both Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these cha
38. Multicast Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION IGMP Snooping Use these settings to configure IGMP Snooping Active Select Active to enable IGMP Snooping to forward group multicast traffic only to ports that are members of that group Host Timeout Specify the time from 1 to 16 711 450 in seconds that elapses before the Switch removes an IGMP group membership entry if it does not receive report messages from the port Leave Timeout Enter an IGMP leave timeout value from 1 to 16 711 450 in seconds This defines how many seconds the Switch waits for an IGMP report before removing an IGMP snooping membership entry when an IGMP leave message is received from a host 802 1p Priority Select a priority level 0 7 to which the Switch changes the priority in outgoing IGMP control packets Otherwise select No Change to not replace the priority IGMP Filtering Select Active to enable IGMP filtering to control which IGMP groups a subscriber on a port can join Note If you enable IGMP filtering you must create and assign IGMP filtering profiles for the ports that you want to allow to join multicast groups Unknown Multicast Frame Specify the action to perform when the Switch receives an unknown multicast frame Select Drop to discard the frame s Select Flooding to send the frame s ES 3148 User s Guide to all ports Chapter 22 Multicast Table 57 Advanced Application gt Multicast
39. Network and Internet p Network and Sharing Center v 4 Search p File Edit View Tools Help me Network and Sharing Center View computers and devices View full map Connect to a network Set up a connection or network A 3 er Manage network connections 3 TWPC99111 Internet Diagnose and repair This computer a gt Not connected ES 3148 User s Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 5 Right click Local Area Connection and then click Properties BS During this procedure click Continue whenever Windows displays a screen saying that it needs your permission to continue Figure 179 Windows Vista Network and Sharing Center z 5 OW g Network and Internet p Network Connections File Edit View Tools Advanced Help L7 Organize v B Views v Disable this network device Name Status Device Mame Connectivity Network LAN or High SeeecIntarnat 11 Tocai Collapse group Left Arrow A Conne x Gt y in Expand all groups WU Inte Collapse all groups Disable Diagnose Bridge Connections Create Shortcut 6 Select Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 and click Properties Figure 180 Windows Vista Local Area Connection Properties T Local Area Connection Properties Networking Connect using Pu Intel R PRO 1000 MT Desktop Connection This connection uses the following items lt JR DM Client for Microsoft Net
40. Port Active 0 1 O 2 O 3 O 4 O 5 O 6 O 7 O 8 O n aia i LU Sg fl gl ng al T esl E aN Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 42 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt MAC Authentication LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to permit MAC authentication on the Switch Note You must first enable MAC authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port Name Prefix Type the prefix that is appended to all MAC addresses sent to the RADIUS server for authentication You can enter up to 32 printable ASCII characters If you leave this field blank then only the MAC address of the client is forwarded to the RADIUS server Password Type the password the Switch sends along with the MAC address of a client for authentication with the RADIUS server You can enter up to 32 printable ASCII characters Timeout Specify the amount of time before the Switch allows a client MAC address that fails authentication to try and authenticate again Maximum time is 3000 seconds When a client fails MAC authentication its MAC address is learned by the MAC address table with a status of denied The timeout period you specify here is the time the MAC address entry stays in the MAC address table until it is cleared If you specify 0 for the timeout value then this entry will not be deleted from the MAC address table Note If the Agin
41. You cannot enable both TRTCM and Bandwidth Control at the same time Figure 123 IP Application gt DiffServ gt 2 rate 3 Color Marker 2 Rate 3 Color Marker Diffserv Active E color blind ct C color aware DSCP Port Active Commit Rate Peak Rate green yellow red i Dp Kbps Kbps 1 O 0 Kbps Kbps 26 28 30 2 O p Kbps Kbps 26 28 30 3 rm fo Kbps 0 Kbps 26 28 30 4 O 0 Kbps Kbps 26 28 30 5 r fe Kbps 0 Kbps 26 28 30 6 r fe Kbps 0 Kbps 26 28 30 7 O p Kbps 0 Kbps 26 28 30 8 r jo kbps D Kops _ 26 28 30 OE SE EO a OE RS P wf ag a ll a ar Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 86 IP Application gt DiffServ gt 2 rate 3 Color Marker LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to activate TRTCM Two Rate Three Color Marker on the Switch The Switch evaluates and marks the packets based on the TRTCM settings Note You must also activate DiffServ on the Switch and the individual ports for the Switch to drop red high loss priority colored packets Mode Select color blind to have the Switch treat all incoming packets as uncolored All incoming packets are evaluated against the CIR and PIR Select color aware to treat the packets as marked by some preceding entity Incoming packets are evaluated based on their existing color Incoming packets that are not marked proceed through the Switch Port This field displays the index number
42. and bandwidth control 229 and DiffServ 229 color aware mode 227 color blind mode 227 setup 228 trunk group 131 trunking 131 288 example 136 trusted ports ARP inspection 202 DHCP snooping 200 Tunnel Protocol Attribute and RADIUS 194 Two Rate Three Color Marker TRTCM 226 Two Rate Three Color Marker see TRTCM 226 Type of Service ToS 225 U untrusted ports ARP inspection 202 DHCP snooping 200 user profiles 185 V Vendor Specific Attribute See VSA 193 ventilation 40 ventilation holes hardware 40 VID 85 88 89 167 number of possible VIDs 85 priority frame 85 VID VLAN Identifier 85 VLAN 77 85 288 acceptable frame type 91 automatic registration 86 ID 85 ingress filtering 91 introduction 77 number of VLANs 88 port isolation 91 port number 89 port settings 90 port based VLAN 98 port based all connected 101 port based isolation 101 port based wizard 101 static VLAN 89 status 88 89 tagged 85 trunking 87 91 type 78 87 VLAN Virtual Local Area Network 77 VLAN stacking 165 167 configuration 168 example 165 frame format 167 port roles 166 169 priority 167 VLAN protocol based See protocol based VLAN 94 VLAN subnet based See subnet based VLANs 92 VSA 193 W warning lights 47 warranty 346 note 347 web configurator 36 51 getting help 61 home 52 login 51 logout 60 navigation panel 53 screen summary 54 weight queuing 162 Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR 162 WFQ
43. receive these packets Select In Band to have the Switch send the packets to all ports except the out of band management port to which connected device s do not receive these packets In band Management IP Address DHCP Client Select this option if you have a DHCP server that can assign the Switch an IP address subnet mask a default gateway IP address and a domain name server IP address automatically 80 ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 7 Basic Setting Table 12 Basic Setting gt IP Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Static IP Select this option if you don t have a DHCP server or if you wish to assign static IP Address address information to the Switch You need to fill in the following fields when you select this option IP Address Enter the IP address of your Switch in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 IP Subnet Enter the IP subnet mask of your Switch in dotted decimal notation for example Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation for Gateway example 192 168 1 254 VID Enter the VLAN identification number associated with the Switch IP address VID is the VLAN ID of the CPU and is used for management only The default is 1 All ports by default are fixed members of this management VLAN in order to manage the device from any port If a port is not a member of this VLAN then users on that port ca
44. reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise You must also enable Network Address Translation NAT on the Switch Once you have decided on the network number pick an IP address for your Switch that 1s easy to remember for instance 192 168 1 1 but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your Switch will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered You don t need to change the subnet mask computed by the Switch unless you are instructed to do otherwise Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address If your networks are isolated from the Internet running only between two branch offices for example you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems However the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks e 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 e 172 16 0 0 172 31 255 255 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private network If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks On the other hand if you ar
45. s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults Index This field displays the index number of the route Click a number to edit the static route entry Active This field displays Yes when the static route is activated and NO when it is deactivated Name This field displays the descriptive name for this route This is for identification purpose only Destination This field displays the IP network address of the final destination Address Subnet Mask This field displays the subnet mask for this destination Gateway This field displays the IP address of the gateway The gateway is an immediate Address neighbor of your Switch that will forward the packet to the destination Metric This field displays the cost of transmission for routing purposes Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes ES 3148 User s Guide Differentiated Services This chapter shows you how to configure Differentiated Services DiffServ on the Switch 27 1 DiffServ Overview Quality of Service QoS is used to prioritize source to destination traffic f
46. to syslog servers that collect the event messages A syslog enabled device can generate a syslog message and send it to a syslog server Syslog is defined in RFC 3164 The RFC defines the packet format content and system log related information of syslog messages Each syslog message has a facility and severity level The syslog facility identifies a file in the syslog server Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for details The following table describes the syslog severity levels Table 109 Syslog Severity Levels CODE SEVERITY Emergency The system is unusable Alert Action must be taken immediately Critical The system condition is critical Error There is an error condition on the system Warning There is a warning condition on the system Notice There is a normal but significant condition on the system Informational The syslog contains an informational message siol oO BR Ww N o Debug The message is intended for debug level purposes 32 2 Syslog Setup Click Management gt Syslog in the navigation panel to display this screen The syslog feature sends logs to an external syslog server Use this screen to configure the device s system logging settings ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 32 Syslog Figure 153 Management gt Syslog Syslog Setup Syslog Server Setup Syslog Active Logging type Active Facility System Vv localuse 0
47. 00 00 19 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 20 Down STOP Disabled o 0 o 0 0 00 00000 Tj Any Clear Counter C Port A Click the menu items to open submenu links and then click on a submenu link to open the screen in the main window B C D E These are quick links which allow you to perform certain tasks no matter which screen you are currently working in ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator B Click this link to save your configuration into the Switch s nonvolatile memory Nonvolatile memory is saved in the configuration file from which the Switch booted from and it stays the same even if the Switch s power is turned off See Section 29 3 on page 240 for information on saving your settings to a specific configuration file C Click this link to go to the status page of the Switch D Click this link to logout of the web configurator E Click this link to display web help pages The help pages provide descriptions for all of the configuration screens In the navigation panel click a main link to reveal a list of submenu links Table 4 Navigation Panel Sub links Overview ADVANCED APPLICATION BASIC SETTING IP APPLICATION MANAGEMENT Management System Info VLAN Static Routing Maintenance General Setup Static MAC Forwarding DiffServ Access Control Switch Setup Filtering DHCP Diagnostic IP Setup Spanning Tree Protocol Syslog Port Setup Band
48. 1 1 through proxy connections amp Java Sun C v Use Java 2 v1 4 1 07 for applet requires restart 3 Microsoft v O Java console enabled requires restart O Java logging enabled JIT compiler for virtual machine enabled requires restart Multimedia O Always show Internet Explorer 5 0 or later Radio toolbar O Don t display online media content in the media bar Enable Automatic Image Resizing xf gt Restore Defaults Mozilla Firefox Mozilla Firefox 2 0 screens are used here Screens for other versions may vary You can enable Java Javascripts and pop ups in one screen Click Tools then click Options in the screen that appears ES 3148 User s Guide Appendix B Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions Figure 205 Mozilla Firefox Tools gt Options eee Help Web Search Ctrl K Downloads Ctrl J Add ons Web Developer Error Console Adblock Plus Ctri Shift A Page Info FireFTP Clear Private Data Ctrl Shift Del Tab Mix Plus Options 3 Session Manager J options Click Content to show the screen below Select the check boxes as shown in the following Screen Figure 206 Mozilla Firefox Content Security Bd amp Xx Main Tabs wu S Feeds Privacy Security Advanced w Block pop up windows IV Load images automatically v Enable JavaScript IV Enable Java Exceptions Exceptions
49. 1 ov Peer v 2 v 10 100M Auto v 1 ov Peer v 3 v 10 100M Auto v g ov Peer v 4 7 10 100M Auto v g ov Peer v 5 v 10 100M Auto v go ov Peer v 6 v 10 100M Auto v L1 ov Peer v 7 v 10 100M Auto Y go Ov Peer v 8 v 10 100M Auto v g ov Peer v Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 13 Basic Setting gt Port Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This is the port index number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to enable a port The factory default for all ports is enabled A port must be enabled for data transmission to occur Name Enter a descriptive name that identifies this port You can enter up to 64 alpha numerical characters Note Due to space limitation the port name may be truncated in some web configurator screens Type This field displays 10 100M for an Ethernet Fast Ethernet connection and 10 100 1000M for Gigabit connections ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 7 Basic Setting Table 13 Basic Setting gt Port Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Speed Duplex Select the speed and the duplex mode of the Ethe
50. 168 1 1 29 3 Save Configuration Click Config 1 to save the current configuration settings permanently to Configuration 1 on the Switch Click Config 2 to save the current configuration settings to Configuration 2 on the Switch Alternatively click Save on the top right hand corner in any screen to save the configuration changes to the current configuration BES Clicking the Apply or Add button does NOT save the changes permanently All unsaved changes are erased after you reboot the Switch ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 29 Maintenance 29 4 Reboot System Reboot System allows you to restart the Switch without physically turning the power off It also allows you to load configuration one Config 1 or configuration two Config 2 when you reboot Follow the steps below to reboot the Switch 1 Inthe Maintenance screen click the Config 1 button next to Reboot System to reboot and load configuration one The following screen displays Figure 134 Reboot System Confirmation Microsoft Internet Explorer x 2 Are you sure you want to reboot system E Cancel 2 Click OK again and then wait for the Switch to restart This takes up to two minutes This does not affect the Switch s configuration Click Config 2 and follow steps 1 to 2 to reboot and load configuration two on the Switch 29 5 Firmware Upgrade Make sure you have downloaded and unzipped the correct model firmware and version to your comp
51. 210 Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example sssssssssseeeneeeenee 333 ES 3148 User s Guide 25 List of Figures Figure 211 Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example ccccceeeeeeeeeeeneeeaeceeeeeeeeeseeseeeesnenaneaeess 333 Figure 212 Conflicting Computer and Router IP Addresses Example cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeestnseeeaeees 334 Figure 2173 Securty CeriiCatE e 339 Figure 214 Login SAEN od ES 340 Figure 215 Cerificate General Intonation before Import 22 ierit ei br Pepe pal eccrine 340 Figure 216 Cort hicate import Wiz T 1s ierra shit tt asses ette pubs tmcesserrseom asi stoastsstwens seneeeueneryienes 341 Figure 217 Certificate Import Wizard per 341 Figure 219 Ceniicale Impan Wiad S ems 342 Figues 219 Roo Conical SOE on ion D n aso aca gad ae o den Loo ve Ha a e ed 342 Figure 220 Certificate General Informabon after WMO 12s eese detenti and kde kk taa 343 ES 3148 User s Guide List of Tables List of Tables Table 1 T ODE ESI usur cde o or ot i ha ite ee ee a ees 43 TaDIE SISSE PB oeusesizmuitnmdesutiesiusbt tud ba a vip chu uie aeta or CL ME dad 46 SUNS ES ATEA EE A A AE E E E O E ESAE ONE E EAN 47 Table 4 Navigation Panel Sub links Overview ssssssssssssssesssseseeeeeen nemen tnnt nennen nnne 53 Table 5 Web Configurator Screen Sub links Details sess 55 Table S Navigation a c c n i AA 56 Eis ac a TT TN T I UR TT 67 Table S
52. Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 183 Windows Vista Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties Internet Protocol Version 4 ICP IPv4 Properties 2E You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Use the following IP address Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses Advanced 10 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties window 11 Click Close to close the Local Area Connection Properties window 12 Close the Network Connections window 13 Turn on your Switch and restart your computer if prompted Verifying Settings 1 Click Start All Programs Accessories and then Command Prompt 2 Inthe Command Prompt window type ipconfig and then press ENTER You can also open Network Connections right click a network connection click Status and then click the Support tab Macintosh OS 8 9 1 Click the Apple menu Control Panel and double click TCP IP to open the TCP IP Control Panel ES 3148 User s Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 184 Macintosh OS 8 9 Apple Menu f About This Computer D Apple System Profiler E Calculator Chooser ADSL Control and Status Control Panels Appearance i Favorites Apple Menu Options Key Caps
53. BS Static VLAN Tx Tagging MUST be enabled on a port where you choose Tunnel Port ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking 21 3 VLAN Tag Format A VLAN tag service provider VLAN stacking or customer IEEE 802 1Q consists of the following three fields Table 52 VLAN Tag Format Type Priority VID Type is a standard Ethernet type code identifying the frame and indicates that whether the frame carries IEEE 802 1Q tag information SP TPID Service Provider Tag Protocol Identifier is the service provider VLAN stacking tag type Many vendors use 0x8100 or 0x9 100 TPID Tag Protocol Identifier is the customer IEEE 802 1Q tag If the VLAN stacking port role is Access Port then the Switch adds the SP TPID tag to all incoming frames on the service provider s edge devices 1 and 2 in the VLAN stacking example figure Ifthe VLAN stacking port role is Tunnel Port then the Switch only adds the SP TPID tag to all incoming frames on the service provider s edge devices 1 and 2 in the VLAN stacking example figure that have an SP TPID different to the one configured on the Switch If an incoming frame s SP TPID is the same as the one configured on the Switch then the Switch will not add the tag Priority refers to the IEEE 802 1p standard that allows the service provider to prioritize traffic based on the class of service CoS the customer has paid for On the Switch configure priority level of inne
54. Ek i nth kii 227 Figure 121 STEM olor aware Mode iuausssicbobqb a nexo Irt pP NM S ER EDI Pr EE EPIRI H ERE A IP E HT ERI DTP UD 227 Figure T22 IP Applicaton DISON ioo t Do trn a etn D be t oo C E cp o ER Cua 228 Figure 123 IP Application gt DiffServ gt 2 rate 3 Color Marker ssssssssseeeenene 229 Figure 124 IP Application gt DiffServ gt DSCP Setting reuesecettun reote tne tiorem tior tat peor tte v taa pun 230 ES 3148 User s Guide 23 List of Figures Figure 1251F Application DHCP SUS oussassatc E HP P DIE ER REPRE Ia EUR Ea pec E EE r dh e ttc es 234 Figure 126 IP Applicaton gt DHCP gt OIOBBl auesszcinssckotida ido Cei brk Yo pA nni REP L Ux x EE Re Epp EE 1d A ERE LE ELS EE ko 235 Figure 127 Global DHCP Relay Network Example rrt rtr tht tbe Erba ate Ebh at uuu bread dis uua 236 Figure 128 DHCP Relay Configuration Example 1 ece sedie heran riora eta onde eode ona sen aee 236 Figure 129 IP Applicaton gt DHCP VLAN Luteecesstketod T ERI EN PR MEER RET ERA EV S EREREU E E er pbu vea EDDA 237 Figure 130 DHCP Relay Tor TWO VES 1i secesasesistue neire E a QR EbkA 238 Figure 131 DHCP Relay for Two VLANs Configuration Example esee 238 Figure T32 Management gt Maintenance iipeosgpstbltenqpe rbd ivt ntin er br pee EDU PIpe FER EE ERU per RE buda dnd 239 Figure T33 Load Factory Destine Sal ierra doa das ce ose o bi udo ken d cea does ado e Lue 240 Figure 134 Reboot System C
55. Enter ifconfig in a terminal screen to check your TCP IP properties Figure 196 Red Hat 9 0 Checking TCP IP Properties eth0 root localhost ifconfig Link encap Ethernet HWaddr 00 50 BA 72 5B 44 inet addr 172 23 19 129 Bceast 172 23 19 255 Mask 255 255 255 0 UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU 1500 Metric 1 RX packets 717 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 frame 0 TX packets 13 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 carrier 0 collisions 0 txqueuelen 100 RX bytes 730412 713 2 Kb TX bytes 1570 1 5 Kb Interrupt 10 Base address 0x1000 root localhost ES 3148 User s Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address ES 3148 User s Guide Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions In order to use the web configurator you need to allow Web browser pop up windows from your device JavaScripts enabled by default Java permissions enabled by default BS Internet Explorer 6 screens are used here Screens for other Internet Explorer versions may vary Internet Explorer Pop up Blockers You may have to disable pop up blocking to log into your device Either disable pop up blocking enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 or allow pop up blocking and create an exception for your device s IP address Disable Pop up Blockers 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Pop up Blocker and then select Turn Off Pop up Blocker Figure 197 Pop up Blocker Mail and Ne
56. Example Status VID 2 Remote DHCP Server 1 1722310100 Remote DHCP Server 2 o 0040 Remote DHCP Server 3 o 0 0 0 r of Relay Agent Information Information VID Type DHCP Status Delete 1 Relay 192 168 1 100 a Delete Cancel ES 3148 User s Guide Maintenance This chapter explains how to configure the maintenance screens that let you maintain the firmware and configuration files 29 1 The Maintenance Screen Use this screen to manage firmware and your configuration files Click Management gt Maintenance in the navigation panel to open the following screen Figure 132 Management gt Maintenance OM ARSED Current Configuration 1 Firmware Upgrade Click Here Restore Configuration Click Here Backup Configuration Click Here Load Factory Default Click Here Save Configuration Config 1 Config 2 Reboot System Config 1 Config 2 i The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 93 Management gt Maintenance LABEL DESCRIPTION Current This field displays which configuration Configuration 1 or Configuration 2 is currently operating on the Switch Firmware Click Click Here to go to the Firmware Upgrade screen Upgrade Restore Click Click Here to go to the Restore Configuration screen Configuration Backup Click Click Here to go to the Backup Configuration screen Configuration Load Factory Click Click Here to rese
57. If you have a gateway IP address type it in the New gateway field and click Add 5 Click OK to save and close the TCP IP Properties window 6 Click OK to close the Network window Insert the Windows CD if prompted 7 Turn on your Switch and restart your computer when prompted Verifying Settings 1 Click Start and then Run 2 Inthe Run window type winipcfg and then click OK to open the IP Configuration window 3 Select your network adapter You should see your computer s IP address subnet mask and default gateway Windows 2000 NT XP The following example figures use the default Windows XP GUI theme 1 Click start Start in Windows 2000 NT Settings Control Panel ES 3148 User s Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 168 Windows XP Start Menu Internet Explorer 22 My Documents e Outlook Express W Paint Files and Settings Transfer W BJ Command Prompt e My Music E Acrobat Reader 4 0 B My Computer Tour Windows xP QB Windows Movie Maker 2 My Recent Documents gt e My Pictures Q9 Help and Support Search All Programs gt 177 Run D Log Off o Turn Off Computer 5 untitled Paint 2 Inthe Control Panel double click Network Connections Network and Dial up Connections in Windows 2000 NT Figure 169 Windows XP Control Panel amp Control Panel File Q Ba d po Search E Folders E Address Control Panel Vg Control Panel
58. MRSTP 1 and MRSTP2 on switch A To set up MRSTP activate MRSTP on the Switch and specify which port s belong to which spanning tree BS Each port can belong to one STP tree only Figure 45 MRSTP Network Example ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol 11 1 5 Multiple STP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1s is backward compatible with STP RSTP and addresses the limitations of existing spanning tree protocols STP and RSTP in networks to include the following features One Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST that represents the entire network s connectivity Grouping of multiple bridges or switching devices into regions that appear as one single bridge on the network A VLAN can be mapped to a specific Multiple Spanning Tree Instance MSTI MSTI allows multiple VLANs to use the same spanning tree Load balancing is possible as traffic from different VLANs can use distinct paths in a region 11 1 5 1 MSTP Network Example The following figure shows a network example where two VLANS are configured on the two switches If the switches are using STP or RSTP the link for VLAN 2 will be blocked as STP and RSTP allow only one link in the network and block the redundant link Figure 46 STP RSTP Network Example With MSTP VLANs 1 and 2 are mapped to different spanning trees in the network Thus traffic from the two VLANs travel on different paths The following figure sh
59. Management gt ARP Table in the navigation panel to open the following screen Use the ARP table to view IP to MAC address mapping s ES 3148 User s Guide 277 Chapter 35 ARP Table 278 Figure 162 Management gt ARP Table 172 21 100 153 172 21 207 247 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 5 192 168 1 10 192 168 1 100 Puan Index IP Address 1 172 21 0 2 2 172 21 3 16 3 172 21 3 18 4 172 21 3 40 5 172 21 3 66 6 172 21 3 90 7 172 21 3 91 8 172 21 3 95 8 172 21 3 120 10 172 21 3 138 11 172 21 4 99 12 172 21 10 11 13 14 15 16 17 18 MAC Address 00 05 5d 04 30 f1 00 05 1c 15 08 71 00 0b cd 8c 6d ed 00 0 76 07 41 0d 00 50 8d 47 73 4f 00 05 5d f4 49 20 00 50 ba ad 55 7c 00 10 b5 ae 56 97 00 10 b5 ae 62 32 00 a0 5 b2 62 26 00 0c 76 09 cf 88 08 00 20 ad f6 88 00 80 27 be a2 8c 00 0 76 09 17 1a 00 a0 5 3f 91 56 00 85 a0 01 01 04 00 a0 c5 5e dffg 00 85 a0 01 01 00 Type dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic static dynamic The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 117 Management gt ARP Table manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This is the ARP Table entry number IP Address This is the learned IP address of a device connected to a Switch port with corresponding MAC address below MAC Address This
60. Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol See MSTP 107 Multiple STP 109 Multiple STP see MSTP 110 MVR 177 configuration 178 group configuration 180 network example 177 MVR Multicast VLAN Registration 177 N NAT 332 network management system NMS 246 NTP RFC 1305 76 P password 58 administrator 254 PHB Per Hop Behavior 225 ping test connection 263 policy 157 158 and classifier 157 ES 3148 User s Guide Index and DiffServ 155 configuration 157 example 159 overview 155 rules 155 156 viewing 158 policy configuration 158 port authentication 139 and RADIUS 186 IEEE802 1x 141 142 188 190 MAC authentication 140 port based VLAN type 78 port cloning 279 280 advanced settings 279 280 basic settings 279 280 port details 68 port isolation 91 101 port mirroring 129 130 288 direction 130 egress 130 ingress 130 port redundancy 131 port security 145 address learning 146 limit MAC address learning 146 MAC address learning 145 overview 145 setup 145 221 port setup 82 port status 67 port VLAN trunking 87 port based VLAN 98 all connected 101 port isolation 101 settings wizard 101 ports standby 131 diagnostics 263 GBIC 34 mirroring 129 speed duplex 83 power voltage 75 power status 75 priority level 79 priority queue assignment 79 priority queue assignment 79 product registration 347 Product specification 287 protocol based VLAN 94 and IEEE 802 1Q tagging 94 example 97 hexadec
61. OD o o o O oO O Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 107 Management gt Access Control gt Remote Management LABEL DESCRIPTION Entry This is the client set index number A client set is a group of one or more trusted computers from which an administrator may use a service to manage the Switch Active Select this check box to activate this secured client set Clear the check box if you wish to temporarily disable the set without deleting it Start Address Configure the IP address range of trusted computers from which you can manage this End Address Switch The Switch checks if the client IP address of a computer requesting a service or protocol matches the range set here The Switch immediately disconnects the session if it does not match ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 30 Access Control Table 107 Management gt Access Control gt Remote Management continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Telnet FTP Select services that may be used for managing the Switch from the specified trusted HTTP ICMP computers SNMP SSH HTTPS Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring thi
62. Pe E E A O 233 Mom cr e 239 bor caben Moser 245 ETE dC E 263 rM 265 ES 3148 User s Guide 9 Contents Overview IM uc SIT M 269 lu VOIR Lees debent Erebi i etd OE A E RM LAGE VLL OR aU E pA at CO UE t EAR U KR P E EE RUE YER 215 ARP TUNE Je ees 277 O SONS I 279 Troubleshooting and Specifications secicissicesscsnsiansesansasansennasinsanansanseacatissnasonnasuadsansasannninanon 281 E regn 283 PROCESSUS eet CE 287 Appendices and MUER 2 2 a id eX REA EEE NERA NopRln NU L S rRF DENSEPbREEEENRUKUEREVERRKREFA NAME QRE MEM RR REMRUERR 293 ES 3148 User s Guide Table of Contents Table of Contents About This Vs rs Ce toe 3 rere pip dr pid e a 4 Sary On i Caan ep merer re npr or Pepe merrell sapernnere anne for trrMer enter errs tenn ter ar rrrsricr nearer rn rere Tre 6 CONSE COVE POW P 9 El 1o ptpgl cd 11 stor ROWO qc M 21 Hst of Tables MT M M 27 z nde p0o Pe 31 Chapter 1 introducing the SwitCh L T 33 DOE eT EA NE 33 T 1 4 BaCO ADPIC UBI iE E E E EEE 33 Vee BVI E IPE iS 34 1 1 3 H
63. REED FERE PPEERR RR nEEdA 36 Figure 6 Attaching Rubber gc M 39 Figure 7 Attaching the Mounting Brackets emer narra Entra auk e Eo pR d eR Ru NR RAMR RR Vn EPA GE uud Rd 40 Figure 9 Mounting the Swilce on s SOR csosustebutts tete rm HpUP eb tob R IEBERR OR QUU ERE Eo Ix UR Fo RN ONE M Coi UON d DA 41 PIQUE PONG dM 43 Figura 10 Transceiver Installation Example 1c cerent cera tdi rx ed HEP CIL Reha REEL ERR BO EL a a 45 Figure T1 Installed Transceiver ec ani A R nnn 45 Figure 12 Opening the Transceiver s Latch Example eene rentrer nn Etre hn arra d Eh sa arre ed sed appe dua 45 Figure T3 Transceiver Removal Example 4onisestenpeei v tei umbo x ut tete et eR Ee uites UpRE Bo ee 45 Figure 14 Rear Panel M T 46 Figure 19 x vicedepwiie edi or S 52 Figure 16 Web Configurator Honig Sereen Status 1isuse irte rri bet RRI FEX E tur bre PIED kr E rE rE 52 Figure 17 Change Administrator Login Password rd terrre o Rer iirrainn o RR FX M oes da 58 Figure 18 Resetting the Switch Via the Console Port 0 cccccesecccceeeseeceeeeeeneeeeeeeseseeseeeesneeseeeneeneeaes 60 Figure 19 Web Configurator Logout SOIGGIE cccscicccssccschvctensassecenessanstvecensancs vex pee aa 60 Figure 20 Initial Setup Network Example VLAN 15 5 rrr tton ti hh prt ERE Yet F3 E rei E ERR Erebi 63 Figure 21 Initial Setup Network Example Port VID erro
64. Setting Click Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting to display the screen shown next See Section 15 1 on page 131 for more information on link aggregation Figure 62 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting Link Aggregation Setting 4 Status LACP Group ID Active T1 O T2 L1 T3 C T4 O T5 C T5 O Port Group 1 None 2 None 3 None 4 None 5 None 6 None 7 None 8 None bra et RO i tn at MN RM Lm p I em oe EP s ER CPI a a a OE Qon a RP T Apply Cancel ES 3148 User s Guide 133 Chapter 15 Link Aggregation The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 39 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION Link Aggregation Setting This is the only screen you need to configure to enable static link aggregation Group ID The field identifies the link aggregation group that is one logical link containing multiple ports Active Select this option to activate a trunk group Port This field displays the port number Group Select the trunk group to which a port belongs Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non vola
65. Setting The Number of VLAN 1 Index VID Elapsed Time Status 1 1 1 00 31 Static Change Pages Previous Next ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example 2 Inthe Static VLAN screen select eonan VLAN Status ACTIVE enter a descriptive ACTIVE 2 Eempe name in the Name field and enter um e VLAN Group ID 2 in the VLAN Group ID field for the VLAN2 network Dm or S Nar M Tx Tagging aM C Normal d Forbidden LII 2 Normal Forbidden V Tx Tagging 3 Normal d C Forbidden M TxTagging 4 Normal 6d C Forbidden Iv TxTagging 5 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging B Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging 7 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging g E Maraal C tivar L Enrhiddan DZ Tu Tascine The VLAN Group ID field in this screen and the VID field in the IP Setup screen refer to the same VLAN ID 3 Since the VLAN2 network is connected to port 1 on the Switch select Fixed to configure port 1 to be a permanent member of the VLAN only 4 To ensure that VLAN unaware devices such as computers and hubs can receive frames properly clear the TX Tagging check box to set the Switch to remove VLAN tags before sending 5 Click Add to save the settings to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off 5 1 2 Setting Port VID Use PVID to add a tag to incoming untagged frames received on that port so that
66. The managed devices contain object variables managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a Switch Examples of variables include number of packets received node port status and so on A Management Information Base MIB is a collection of managed objects SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects SNMP itself is a simple request response protocol based on the manager agent model The manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations Table 97 SNMP Commands COMMAND DESCRIPTION Get Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent GetNext Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent In SNMPv1 when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent it initiates a Get operation followed by a series of GetNext operations Set Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent Trap Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 30 Access Control 30 3 1 SNMP v3 and Security SNMP v3 enhances security for SNMP management SNMP managers can be required to authenticate with agents before conducting SNMP management sessions Security can be further enhanced by encrypting the SNMP messages sent from the managers Encryption protects the contents o
67. This chapter introduces and shows you how to configure the broadcast storm control feature 13 1 Broadcast Storm Control Setup Broadcast storm control limits the number of broadcast multicast and destination lookup failure DLF packets the Switch receives per second on the ports When the maximum number of allowable broadcast multicast and or DLF packets is reached per second the subsequent packets are discarded Enable this feature to reduce broadcast multicast and or DLF packets in your network You can specify limits for each packet type on each port Click Advanced Application gt Broadcast Storm Control in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next Figure 59 Advanced Application gt Broadcast Storm Control Broadcast Storm DINH Active C Port Broadcast pkt s Multicast pkt s DLF pkt s OE seo WII MIU ts mip rp rp 80 rp rh rb r r o r v 5 ob bed of ob ob ob NUN mm ob ob sof J of of Apply Cancel ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 13 Broadcast Storm Control The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 34 Advanced Application gt Broadcast Storm Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable traffic storm control on the Switch Clear this check box to disable this feature Port This field displays a port number 4 Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to mak
68. This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length 256 to 511 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length 512 to This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were 1023 between 512 and 1023 octets in length ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics Table 8 Status gt Port Details continued LABEL DESCRIPTION 1024 to This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were 1518 between 1024 and 1518 octets in length Giant This field shows the number of packets dropped because they were bigger than the maximum frame size ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics ES 3148 User s Guide Basic Setting This chapter describes how to configure the System Info General Setup Switch Setup IP Setup and Port Setup screens 7 1 Overview The System Info screen displays general Switch information such as firmware version number and hardware polling information such as fan speeds The General Setup screen allows you to configure general Switch identification information The General Setup screen also allows you to set the system time manually or get the current time and date from an external server when you turn on your Switch The real time is
69. This link takes you to a screen where you can configure filtering of unauthorized DHCP and ARP packets in your network Loop Guard This link takes you to a screen where you can configure protection against network loops that occur on the edge of your network IP Application Static Route This link takes you to screens where you can configure static routes A static route defines how the Switch should forward traffic by configuring the TCP IP parameters manually DiffServ This link takes you to screens where you can enable DiffServ configure marking rules and set DSCP to IEEE802 1p mappings DHCP This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the DHCP settings Management Maintenance This link takes you to screens where you can perform firmware and configuration file maintenance as well as reboot the system Access Control This link takes you to screens where you can change the system login password Diagnostic This link takes you to screens where you can view system logs and test port s ES 3148 User s Guide and configure SNMP and remote management Chapter 4 The Web Configurator Table 6 Navigation Panel Links continued LINK DESCRIPTION Syslog This link takes you to screens where you can setup system logs and a system log server Cluster Management This link takes you to a screen where you can configure clustering management and view
70. Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter Level 4 Typically used for controlled load latency sensitive traffic such as SNA Systems Network Architecture transactions Level 3 Typically used for excellent effort or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay Level 2 This is for spare bandwidth Level 1 This is typically used for non critical background traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users Level 0 Typically used for best effort traffic Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 7 6 IP Setup Use the IP Setup screen to configure the default gateway device the default domain name server and add IP domains 7 6 1 IP Interfaces The Switch needs an IP address for it to be managed over the network The factory default IP address is 192 168 1 1 The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address The factory default subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 You can configure multiple IP addresses which are used to access and manage the switch from the ports belonging to th
71. User s Guide Chapter 30 Access Control Figure 141 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP gt Trap Group ORI SNMP Setting Trap Destination IP z Type Options System coldstart warmstart IV fanspeed temperature voltage V reset timesync intrusionlock loopguard Interface linkup linkdown autonegotiation AMA De authentication accounting IP O I ping I traceroute Switch stp mactable rmon Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 104 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP gt Trap Group LABEL DESCRIPTION Trap Destination Select one of your configured trap destination IP addresses These are the IP IP addresses of the SNMP managers You must first configure a trap destination IP address in the SNMP Setting screen Use the rest of the screen to select which traps the Switch sends to that SNMP manager Type Select the categories of SNMP traps that the Switch is to send to the SNMP manager Options Select the individual SNMP traps that the Switch is to send to the SNMP station See Section 30 3 3 on page 247 for individual trap descriptions The traps are grouped by category Selecting a category automatically selects all of the category s traps Clear the check boxes for individual traps that you do not want the Switch to send to the SNMP station Clearing a category s check box automaticall
72. a different IP multicast address range Start Address Type the starting multicast IP address for a range of multicast IP addresses that you want to belong to the IGMP filter profile End Address Type the ending multicast IP address for a range of IP addresses that you want to belong to the IGMP filter profile If you want to add a single multicast IP address enter it in both the Start Address and End Address fields ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 22 Multicast Table 59 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Click Add to save the profile to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Clear Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults Profile Name This field displays the descriptive name of the profile Start Address This field displays the start of the multicast address range End Address This field displays the end of the multicast address range Delete To delete the profile s and all the accompanying rules select the profile s that you want to remove in the Delete Profile column then click the Delete button To delete a rule s from a profile select the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete Rule column then click
73. and priority queues IP Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the management IP address subnet mask necessary for Switch management and DNS domain name server Port Setup This link takes you to screens where you can configure settings for individual Switch ports Advanced Application VLAN This link takes you to screens where you can configure port based or 802 1Q VLAN depending on what you configured in the Switch Setup menu You can also configure a protocol based VLAN or a subnet based VLAN in these screens Static MAC This link takes you to screens where you can configure static MAC addresses for a Forwarding port These static MAC addresses do not age out ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator Table 6 Navigation Panel Links continued LINK DESCRIPTION Filtering This link takes you to a screen to set up filtering rules Spanning Tree This link takes you to screens where you can configure the RSTP MRSTP MSTP to Protocol prevent network loops Bandwidth This link takes you to screens where you can cap the maximum bandwidth allowed Control from specified source s to specified destination s Broadcast Storm This link takes you to a screen to set up broadcast filters Control Mirroring This link takes you to screens where you can copy traffic from one port or ports to another port in order that you can
74. and source IP address in the packet do not The packet is a RELEASE or DECLINE packet and the source MAC address and source port do not match any of the current bindings The rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high trusted ports Rate pps Specify the maximum number for DHCP packets 1 2048 that the Switch receives from each port each second The Switch discards any additional DHCP packets Enter 0 to disable this limit which is recommended for volatile memory when you are done configuring Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard 24 5 2 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure Use this screen to enable DHCP snooping on each VLAN and to specify whether or not the Switch adds DHCP relay agent option 82 information Chapter 28 on page 233 to DHCP requests that the Switch relays to a DHCP server for each VLAN To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping gt Configure gt VLAN Figure 105 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping gt Configure gt VLAN DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure Configure Show VLAN Start VID End VID Apply
75. are enabled Yes or disabled No Name This field displays the descriptive name for this VLAN group Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 8 5 4 Configure VLAN Port Settings Use the VLAN Port Setting screen to configure the static VLAN IEEE 802 1Q settings on a port See Section 8 1 on page 85 for more information on static VLAN Click the VLAN Port Setting link in the VLAN Status screen ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN Figure 35 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting C OME Fort Setting J Subnet Based Vian Protocol Based Vian VLAN Status GVRP O Port isolation ri Port Ingress Check PVID GVRP Acceptable Frame Type VLAN Trunking E E L m m sx r 1 1 o a s a 2 r fr fas 3 r n mw D r p n mw z 5 r ll D 6 Oo h r far m 7 i nr fw s z rr IANI DD A OS ANSAN im Alm a fll fll m flim E flim E film AE om flim fl Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 18 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION GVRP GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is a registration protocol that defines a way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network Select this check box to permit VLAN groups beyond the local Switch Port Iso
76. attributes are copied Destination Enter the destination port or ports under the Destination label These are the ports Port which are going to have the same attributes as the source port You can enter individual ports separated by a comma or a range of ports by using a dash Example 2 4 6 indicates that ports 2 4 and 6 are the destination ports e 2 6 indicates that ports 2 through 6 are the destination ports Basic Setting Select which port settings you configured in the Basic Setting menus should be copied to the destination port s Advanced Select which port settings you configured in the Advanced Application menus Application should be copied to the destination ports Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES 3148 User s Guide PART IV Troubleshooting and Specifications bleshooting 283 cifications 287 Troubleshooting This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter The potential problems are divided into the following categories Power Hardware Connections and LEDs Switch Access and Login 37 1 Power Hardware Connections and LEDs e Th
77. authentication settings Server Mode This field is only valid if you configure multiple RADIUS servers Select index priority and the Switch tries to authenticate with the first configured RADIUS server if the RADIUS server does not respond then the Switch tries to authenticate with the second RADIUS server Select round robin to alternate between the RADIUS servers that it sends authentication requests to Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an authentication request response from the RADIUS server If you are using index priority for your authentication and you are using two RADIUS servers then the timeout value is divided between the two RADIUS servers For example if you set the timeout value to 30 seconds then the Switch waits for a response from the first RADIUS server for 15 seconds and then tries the second RADIUS server Index This is a read only number representing a RADIUS server entry IP Address Enter the IP address of an external RADIUS server in dotted decimal notation UDP Port The default port of a RADIUS server for authentication is 1812 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external RADIUS server and the Switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external RADIUS server and the Sw
78. eese idees eia adea adt tn n ka d dekn add 267 Table 112 ZyXEL Clustering Management Specifications ssssssssssssssseeee 269 Table 113 Management gt Cluster Management sccisiasccersieniesnpadecnstenpsvenssareacdenistepadennsseepuveniaanpaunaaihtnes 271 Table 114 FTP Upload to Cluster Member Example cccccceeeeeeeceeeaeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeecncanaeeeseeeeeeeeeenees 272 Table 115 Management gt Clustering Management gt Configuration sesee 273 Table 116 Management MAC Table uiuos rer ur rrt dp arta ue Sonde aanne bonia iaia E otiia 276 Tate 117 Mandgememnts ARP TIME uicundnn idee texd aeta edt eti pot Eb abo eade ea E Fem DANE 278 Table 118 Mahagement Configure Slane iuccuseenercketetene Ferki evene ke baden SEHE Fr dan E TE REN FPE CE e FERE Hen AEKERAS 280 Table 119 Hardware and Environmental Specifications sssssssssssssseeneee 287 Tale 120 Feature SOC CIGARS urea tivo PAPI IE SpER EEbS aaa Cab tu va Kk exa GU CERO EE Leia S NEE EAA NEE ANAA 288 Tabe 121 Standards SUD DOME Tr e R 289 Table 122 Console Dial Backup Port Pin Assignments s ssssiisirssrisrssrrsserisisirsseisssdrrnssrisssanisaisisdsinsssss 291 Table 123 Ethernet Cable Pin Assignments ieiiieseesiiiieeeeeenae rennen hr da Akira d d RARE RR RAE Rd 291 Table 124 IP Address Network Number and Host ID Example sss 326 ES 3148 User s Guide List of Tables Table 125 Subnet MAS
79. enable DHCP snooping and there are no trusted ports DHCP Vlan Select a VLAN ID if you want the Switch to forward DHCP packets to DHCP servers on a specific VLAN Note You have to enable DHCP snooping on the DHCP VLAN too You can enable Option82 in the DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure screen Section 24 5 2 on page 211 to help the DHCP servers distinguish between DHCP requests from different VLAN Select Disable if you do not want the Switch to forward DHCP packets to a specific VLAN ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard Table 74 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping gt Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Database If Timeout interval is greater than Write delay interval it is possible that the next update is scheduled to occur before the current update has finished successfully or timed out In this case the Switch waits to start the next update until it completes the current one Agent URL Enter the location of the DHCP snooping database The location should be expressed like this tftp domain name or IP addressy directory if applicable file name for example tftp 192 168 10 1 database txt Timeout interval Enter how long 10 65535 seconds the Switch tries to complete a specific update in the DHCP snooping database before it gives up Write delay interval Enter how long 10 65535 seconds the Switch waits to update the DHCP snooping database the first time t
80. for network environments NNTP TCP 119 Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service PING User Defined 1 Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable POP3 TCP 110 Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e mail from a POP3 server through a temporary connection TCP IP or other PPTP TCP 1723 Point to Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the control channel PPTP_TUNNEL User Defined 47 PPTP Point to Point Tunneling Protocol GRE enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the data channel RCMD TCP 512 Remote Command Service REAL_AUDIO TCP 7070 A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web REXEC TCP 514 Remote Execution Daemon RLOGIN TCP 513 Remote Login RTELNET TCP 107 Remote Telnet ES 3148 User s Guide Appendix D Common Services Table 135 Commonly Used Services continued NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION RTSP TCP UDP 554 The Real Time Streaming media control Protocol RTSP is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet SFTP TCP 115 Simple File Transfer Protocol SMTP TCP 25 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message exchange standard for the Internet SMTP enables you to move messages from one e mail server to another SN
81. in valid MAC address format that is six hexadecimal character pairs VID Type the VLAN group identification number Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults Index This field displays the index number of the rule Click an index number to change the settings Active This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when is it deactivated Name This field displays the descriptive name for this rule This is for identification purpose only MAC This field displays the source destination MAC address with the VLAN identification Address number to which the MAC address belongs VID This field displays the VLAN group identification number Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected checkbox es in the Delete column ES 3148 User s Guide Spanning Tree Protocol The Switch supports Spanning Tree Protocol STP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP and Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP as defined in the following standards e IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol EEE
82. is the MAC address of the device with corresponding IP address above Type This shows whether the MAC address is dynamic learned by the Switch or static ES 3148 User s Guide This chapter shows you how you can copy the settings of one port onto other ports Configure Clone 36 1 Configure Clone Cloning allows you to copy the basic and advanced settings from a source port to a destination port or ports Click Management gt Configure Clone to open the following screen Figure 163 Management gt Configure Clone Source Port Features Basic Setting Advanced Application _ amp Configure Clone Pal Active Name Speed Duplex BPDU Control Flow Control Intrusion Lock VLAN1q VLAN1q Member Bandwidth Control VLAN Stacking Port Security Broadcast Storm Control Mirroring Port Authentication Queuing Method IGMP Filtering Spanning Tree Protocol Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Protocol bhased VLAN Port based VLAN MAC Authentication Two rate three color marker Ethernet OAM Loop Guard ARP Inspection DHCP Snooping EIBEBUBEELBERGSI ChE BEELUEEFEDIBEEEELUEEFEULEELTI Apply Cancel ES 3148 User s Guide 279 Chapter 36 Configure Clone The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 118 Management gt Configure Clone LABEL DESCRIPTION Source Enter the source port under the Source label This port s
83. it does not include the 802 3x Pause packets TX Collision The following fields display information on collisions while transmitting Single This is a count of successfully transmitted packets for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision Multiple This is a count of successfully transmitted packets for which transmission was inhibited by more than one collision Excessive This is a count of packets for which transmission failed due to excessive collisions Excessive collision is defined as the number of maximum collisions before the retransmission count is reset Late This is the number of times a late collision is detected that is after 512 bits of the packets have already been transmitted Error Packet The following fields display detailed information about packets received that were in error RX CRC This field shows the number of packets received with CRC Cyclic Redundant Check error s Length This field shows the number of packets received with a length that was out of range Runt This field shows the number of packets received that were too short shorter than 64 octets including the ones with CRC errors Distribution 64 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were 64 octets in length 65 to 127 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length 128 to 255
84. its status MAC Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the MAC addresses and types of devices attached to what ports and VLAN IDs ARP Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the MAC addresses IP address resolution table Configure Clone This link takes you to a screen where you can copy attributes of one port to other ports 4 3 1 Change Your Password After you log in for the first time it is recommended you change the default administrator password Click Management gt Access Control gt Logins to display the next screen Figure 17 Change Administrator Login Password ITIC Administratp Edit Logins 1 3 4 Old Password New Password Retype to confirm Please record your new password whenever you change it The system will lock you out if you have forgotten your password Login User Name Password Retype to confirm Access Control Apply Cancel 4 4 Saving Your Configuration When you are done modifying the settings in a screen click Apply to save your changes back to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off Click the Save link in the upper right hand corner of the web configurator to save your configuration to nonvolatile memory Nonvolatile memory refers to the Switch s storage that remains even if the Switch s power is turned off ES 3148 User s Guid
85. loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh VLAN Use this section of the screen to add VLANs upon which the Switch is to perform IGMP snooping Name Enter the descriptive name of the VLAN for identification purposes VID Enter the ID of a static VLAN the valid range is between 1 and 4094 Note You cannot configure the same VLAN ID as in the MVR screen Add Click Add to insert the entry in the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Clear Click this to clear the fields ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 22 Multicast Table 58 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Snooping VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This is the number of the IGMP snooping VLAN entry in the table Name This field displays the descriptive name for this VLAN group VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column then click t
86. mask box Type the IP address of your Switch in the Router address box 5 Click Apply Now and close the window 6 Turn on your Switch and restart your computer if prompted Verifying Settings Check your TCP IP properties in the Network window Linux This section shows you how to configure your computer s TCP IP settings in Red Hat Linux 9 0 Procedure screens and file location may vary depending on your Linux distribution and release version ES 3148 User s Guide 311 Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address LES Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator Using the K Desktop Environment KDE Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address using the KDE 1 Click the Red Hat button located on the bottom left corner select System Setting and click Network Figure 188 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Network Configuration Devices wv Network Configuration aiii Ax File Profile Help f B Xx New Edit Copy Delete Activate Deactivate Devices Hardware DNS Hosts atc You may configure network devices associated with 2 E physical hardware here Multiple logical devices can be T associated with a single piece of hardware Profile Status Device Nickname Type X Inactive ethO ethO Ethemet 2 Double click on the profile of the network card you wish to configure The Ethernet Device General screen displays
87. number of ARP packets the switch discarded for the VLAN since the switch last restarted 24 6 2 ARP Inspection Log Status Use this screen to look at log messages that were generated by ARP packets and that have not been sent to the syslog server yet To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Log Status ES 3148 User s Guide 213 Chapter 24 IP Source Guard Figure 108 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Log Status CI inspection Total number of logs 0 Index Port VID og Status Clearing log status table Sender MAC Status Apply Sender IP Num Pkts Reason Time The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 79 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Log Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Clearing log status table Click Apply to remove all the log messages that were generated by ARP packets and that have not been sent to the syslog server yet Total number of logs This field displays the number of log messages that were generated by ARP packets and that have not been sent to the syslog server yet If one or more log messages are dropped due to unavailable buffer there is an entry called overflow with the current number of dropped log messages Index This field displays a sequential number for each log message Port This field displa
88. of a port on the Switch s Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this to activate TRTCM on the port Commit Specify the Commit Information Rate CIR for this port Rate Peak Specify the Peak Information Rate PIR for this port Rate ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 27 Differentiated Services Table 86 IP Application gt DiffServ gt 2 rate 3 Color Marker continued LABEL DESCRIPTION DSCP Use this section to specify the DSCP values that you want to assign to packets based on the color they are marked via TRTCM green Specify the DSCP value to use for packets with low packet loss priority yellow Specify the DSCP value to use for packets with medium packet loss priority red Specify the DSCP value to use for packets with high packet loss priority Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 27 4 DSCP t
89. of the service provider s network Select Tunnel Port available for Gigabit ports only for egress ports at the edge of the service provider s network In order to support VLAN stacking on a port the port must be able to allow frames of 1526 Bytes 1522 Bytes 4 Bytes for the second tag to pass through it SPVID SPVID is the service provider s VLAN ID the outer VLAN tag Enter the service provider ID from 1 to 4094 for frames received on this port See Chapter 8 on page 85 for more background information on VLAN ID Priority On the Switch configure priority level of inner IEEE 802 1Q tag in the Port Setup screen 0 is the lowest priority level and 7 is the highest Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking ES 3148 User s Guide Multicast This chapter shows you how to configure various multicast features 22 1 Multicast Overview Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways Unicast 1 sender to 1 recipient or Broadcast 1 sender to everybody on the network Multicast delivers IP packets to just a group of hosts on the n
90. of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured Changed Times Time Since Last Change This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured Instance These fields display the MSTI to VLAN mapping In other words which VLANs run on each spanning tree instance Instance This field displays the MSTI ID VLAN This field displays which VLANs are mapped to an MSTI MSTI Select the MST instance settings you want to view Bridge Root refers to the base of the MST instance Our Bridge is this Switch This Switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root Switch Internal Cost This is the path cost from the root port in this MST instance to the regional root Switch Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must communicate with the root of the MST instance ES 3148 User s Guide Bandwidth Control This chapter shows you how you can cap the maximum bandwidth using the Bandwidth Control screen 12 1 Bandwidth Control Overview Bandwidth control means defining a maximum allowable bandwidth for incoming and or out going traffic flows on a port 12 1 1 CIR and PIR The Committed Information Rate CIR is the guaranteed bandwidth for the incoming traffic flow on a
91. on page 59 forgot the user name or password The default user name is admin and the default password is 1234 These fields are case sensitive so make sure Caps Lock is not on If this does not work you have to reset the Switch to its factory defaults See Section 4 6 on page 59 cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator Make sure you are using the correct IP address The default out of band management IP address is 192 168 0 1 The default in band management IP address is 192 168 1 1 f you changed the IP address Section 7 6 on page 79 use the new IP address f you changed the IP address and have forgotten it see the troubleshooting suggestions for I forgot the IP address for the Switch Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See Section 3 3 on page 47 Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop up windows and has JavaScripts and Java enabled See Appendix B on page 317 Make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the Switch If you know that there are routers between your computer and the Switch skip this step Try to access the Switch using another service such as Telnet If you can access the Switch check the remote management and secure client settings to find out why the Switch does not respond to HTTP Reset the Switch to its factory defaults and try to access the Switch with the default IP address See S
92. operating system as a trusted certification authority The following example procedure shows how to import the Switch s self signed server certificate into your operating system as a trusted certification authority 1 In Internet Explorer double click the lock shown in the following screen ES 3148 User s Guide Appendix E Importing Certificates Figure 214 Login Screen e 2 Click Install Certificate to open the Install Certificate wizard Figure 215 Certificate General Information before Import General Details Certification Path gsx Certificate Information This CA Root certificate is not trusted To enable trust install this certificate in the Trusted Root Certification Authorities store Issued to DOAOCSSSBS2B Issued by 0040C559652B alid from 12 31 1999 to 12 24 2029 3 Click Next to begin the Install Certificate wizard ES 3148 User s Guide Appendix E Importing Certificates Figure 216 Certificate Import Wizard 1 Certificate Import Wizard xi Welcome to the Certificate Import Wizard This wizard helps you copy certificates certificate trust lists and certificate revocation ists from your disk to a certificate store A certificate which is issued by a certification authority is a confirmation of your identity and contains information used to protect data or to establish secure network connections A certificate store is the system area where certficates ar
93. or HTTPS services you may change the default service port by typing the new port number in the Server Port field If you change the default port number then you will have to let people who wish to use the service know the new port number for that service Timeout Type how many minutes a management session via the web configurator can be left idle before the session times out After it times out you have to log in with your password again Very long idle timeouts may have security risks Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 30 10 Remote Management From the Access Control screen display the Remote Management screen as shown next You can specify a group of one or more trusted computers from which an administrator may use a service to manage the Switch Click Access Control to return to the Access Control Screen Figure 151 Management gt Access Control gt Remote Management NIGUDIGRHALENEFDNIN NN Secured Client Setup Access Control Entry Active Start Address End Address Telnet FTP HTTP ICMP SNMP SSH HTTPS 1 Ww oo foooo e Ww NW VW RW KR FM 2 pn pao poe Oo o o o o GO 3 n oo poo o o n O n oO n 4 0 aoo foo
94. packet gets as it is forwarded across the DiffServ network Based on the marking rule different kinds of traffic can be marked for different priorities of forwarding Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies ES 3148 User s Guide 225 Chapter 27 Differentiated Services 27 1 2 DiffServ Network Example The following figure depicts a DiffServ network consisting of a group of directly connected DiffServ compliant network devices The boundary node A in Figure 119 in a DiffServ network classifies marks with a DSCP value the incoming packets into different traffic flows Platinum Gold Silver Bronze based on the configured marking rules A network administrator can then apply various traffic policies to the traffic flows An example traffic policy is to give higher drop precedence to one traffic flow over others In our example packets in the Bronze traffic flow are more likely to be dropped when congestion occurs than the packets in the Platinum traffic flow as they move across the DiffServ network Figure 119 DiffServ Network P Platinum G Gold IB S Silver B B Bronze 27 2 Two Rate Three Color Marker Traffic Policing Traffic policing is the limiting of the input or output transmission rate of a class of traffic on the basis of user defined criteria Traffic policing methods measure traffic flows against user defined criteria and identify it as eit
95. port The Peak Information Rate PIR is the maximum bandwidth allowed for the incoming traffic flow on a port when there is no network congestion The CIR and PIR should be set for all ports that use the same uplink bandwidth If the CIR is reached packets are sent at the rate up to the PIR When network congestion occurs packets through the ingress port exceeding the CIR will be marked for drop ES The CIR should be less than the PIR BES The sum of CIRs cannot be greater than or equal to the uplink bandwidth 12 2 Bandwidth Control Setup Click Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control in the navigation panel to bring up the screen as shown next ES 3148 User s Guide 125 Chapter 12 Bandwidth Control Figure 58 Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control e Bandwidth Control Active C Port ingress Rate MIE Egress Rate Active Commit Rate Active Peak Rate O Kbps O Kbps O Kbps 1 i kops O MO ks r fi kps 2 C 1 Kbps m fi Kbps D 1 Kbps 3 m fi Kbps n fi Kbps w 1 Kbps 4 C fi Kbps 0 fi Kbps a 1 Kbps 5 O Kbps m Kbps m hi Kbps 6 m 1 Kbps m f Kbps r kps 7 Mo lks kbps r ftps 8 f Kbps Li fs kbps m f kops Apply Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 33 Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable bandwidth control on the Switch Port This field displays the port number
96. port is connected to a switch in loop state This is accomplished by periodically sending a probe packet and seeing if the packet returns on the same port If this is the case the Switch will shut down the port connected to the switch in loop state The following figure shows a loop guard enabled port N on switch A sending a probe packet P to switch B Since switch B is in loop state the probe packet P returns to port N on A The Switch then shuts down port N to ensure that the rest of the network is not affected by the switch in loop state Figure 114 Loop Guard Probe Packet The Switch also shuts down port N if the probe packet returns to switch A on any other port In other words loop guard also protects against standard network loops The following figure illustrates three switches forming a loop A sample path of the loop guard probe packet is also shown In this example the probe packet is sent from port N and returns on another port As long as loop guard is enabled on port N The Switch will shut down port N if it detects that the probe packet has returned to the Switch Figure 115 Loop Guard Network Loop ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 25 Loop Guard LES After resolving the loop problem on your network you can re activate the disabled port via the web configurator s
97. ru Telephone 7 095 542 89 29 Fax 7 095 542 89 25 Web www zyxel ru Regular Mail ZyXEL Russia Ostrovityanova 37a Str Moscow 117279 Russia Singapore Support E mail support zyxel com sg Sales E mail sales zyxel com sg Telephone 65 6899 6678 Fax 65 6899 8887 Web http www zyxel com sg Regular Mail ZyXEL Singapore Pte Ltd No 2 International Business Park The Strategy 03 28 Singapore 609930 Support E mail support zyxel es Sales E mail sales zyxel es Telephone 34 902 195 420 Fax 34 913 005 345 Web www zyxel es Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Arte 21 5 planta 28033 Madrid Spain ES 3148 User s Guide Appendix G Customer Support Sweden Support E mail support zyxel se Sales E mail sales zyxel se Telephone 46 3 1 744 7700 Fax 46 31 744 7701 Web www zyxel se Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications A S Sj porten 4 41764 G teborg Sweden Thailand Support E mail support zyxel co th Sales E mail sales zyxel co th Telephone 662 831 5315 Fax 662 831 5395 Web http www zyxel co th Regular Mail ZyXEL Thailand Co Ltd 1 1 Moo 2 Ratchaphruk Road Bangrak Noi Muang Nonthaburi 11000 Thailand Ukraine Support E mail support ua zyxel com Sales E mail sales ua zyxel com Telephone 380 44 247 69 78 Fax 380 44 494 49 32 Web www ua zyxel com Regular Mail ZyXEL Ukraine 13 Pimonenko Str Kiev 04050 Ukraine United Kingdom Support E mai
98. security certificate wafissued byla company you have not chosen to trust Vieyfthe certificgfe to determine whether you want to trust the ROS autbGrity Do you want to proceed No View Certificate ES 3148 User s Guide 257 Chapter 30 Access Control 30 8 2 Netscape Navigator Warning Messages When you attempt to access the Switch HTTPS server a Website Certified by an Unknown Authority screen pops up asking if you trust the server certificate Click Examine Certificate if you want to verify that the certificate is from the Switch If Accept this certificate temporarily for this session is selected then click OK to continue in Netscape Select Accept this certificate permanently to import the Switch s certificate into the SSL client Figure 147 Security Certificate 1 Netscape Website Certified by an Unknown Authority Unable to verify the identity of ES 3148 00a0c5012345 as a trusted site Possible reasons for this error The site s certificate is incomplete due to a server misconfiguration You are connected to a site pretending to be your confidential information Please notify the site s webmaster abo Before accepting this certificate yA willing to to accept this certifica 00a0c5012345 Accept this certificate permanently Accept this certificate temporarily For this session Do not accept this certificate and do not connect to this Web site Figure 148 Security C
99. sends a query to VLAN 1 on the receiver port in this case an uplink port on the Switch If there is another subscriber device connected to this port in the same subscriber VLAN the receiving port will still be on the list of forwarding destination for the multicast traffic Otherwise the Switch removes the receiver port from the forwarding table Figure 86 MVR Multicast Television Example VLAN 1 i SN ig ore mj H an 22 7 General MVR Configuration Use the MVR screen to create multicast VLANs and select the receiver port s and a source port for each multicast VLAN Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR link to display the screen as shown next You can create up to three multicast VLANs and up to 256 multicast rules on the Switch ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 22 Multicast BS Your Switch automatically creates a static VLAN with the same VID when you create a multicast VLAN in this screen Figure 87 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR 4 OLD Multicast Setting Group Configuration Active O Name Multicast VLAN ID 802 1p Priority 0 Mode Dynamic C Compatible Port Source Port Receiver Port None Tagging s None d Li 1 e e I D 2 Ol LH 3 e o m 4 oO C c r 5 le Ol O 6 Ol LH 7 C Ol E 8 Ol O E E D D E I GU ANEA N LU E I NI EEEN C OO e N A A eA GO OS Add Cancel VLAN Ac
100. th anna ninth ana nnn 183 Figure 92 MVR Group Configuration EXample uices ccei tier ttam teer ttt eorr tue portau peo ed Ida ERE prc dR EEUU 183 FISD l0 185 Figure 94 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct eee re retin da ptor t ann E EbR ne Tre h ya Ras sera ape RE n EME Rer puS 186 Figure 95 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt RADIUS Server Setup ues 187 Figure 96 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt TACACS Server Setup ssusssss 189 Figure 97 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt Auth and Acct Setup ssssssssssssss 191 Figure 98 DHCP Snooping Database File Format iue aset rrt metet anra entm nt nen nnd 200 Figure 99 Example Man in the middle Attack esee esee rien naria naa nnn tn a naa kot Ra a Ru ER 201 Figure 100 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard 1 a reir orte Ebo IIUNPE P FEY tI pond on E eta d Or EF bua 203 Figure 101 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt Static Binding sssesss 204 Figure 102 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping sssssssssssss 205 Figure 103 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping gt Configure 208 Figure 104 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping gt Configure gt Port 210 Figure 105 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP S
101. the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete Profile Delete Rule check boxes 22 6 MVR Overview Multicast VLAN Registration MVR is designed for applications such as Media on Demand MoD that use multicast traffic across an Ethernet ring based service provider network MVR allows one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network While isolated in different subscriber VLANs connected devices can subscribe to and unsubscribe from the multicast stream in the multicast VLAN This improves bandwidth utilization with reduced multicast traffic in the subscriber VLANs and simplifies multicast group management MVR only responds to IGMP join and leave control messages from multicast groups that are configured under MVR Join and leave reports from other multicast groups are managed by IGMP snooping The following figure shows a network example The subscriber VLAN 1 2 and 3 information is hidden from the streaming media server S In addition the multicast VLAN information is only visible to the Switch and S Figure 85 MVR Network Example 22 6 1 Types of MVR Ports In MVR a source port is a port on the Switch that can send and receive multicast traffic in a multicast VLAN while a receiver port can only receive multicast traffic Once configured the Switch maintains a forwarding table that matches the multicast stream to the associated multicast group ES 3148 User
102. the IEEE 802 3 standards A value of Ethernet II indicates that the packets are formatted according to RFC 894 Ethernet Il encapsulation Layer 2 Specify the fields below to configure a layer 2 classifier ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 18 Classifier Table 44 Advanced Application gt Classifier continued LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Select Any to classify traffic from any VLAN or select the second option and specify the source VLAN ID in the field provided Priority Select Any to classify traffic from any priority level or select the second option and specify a priority level in the field provided Ethernet Select an Ethernet type or select Other and enter the Ethernet type number in Type hexadecimal value Refer to Table 46 on page 152 for information Source MAC Select Any to apply the rule to all MAC addresses Address To specify a source select the second choice and type a MAC address in valid MAC address format six hexadecimal character pairs Port Type the port number to which the rule should be applied You may choose one port only or all ports Any Destination MAC Select Any to apply the rule to all MAC addresses Address To specify a destination select the second choice and type a MAC address in valid MAC address format six hexadecimal character pairs Layer 3 Specify the fields below to configure a layer 3 classifier DSCP Select Any to cl
103. the Switch to add the system name to the client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES 3148 User s Guide 235 Chapter 28 DHCP 28 3 3 Global DHCP Relay Configuration Example The follow figure shows a network example where the Switch is used to relay DHCP requests for the VLANI and VLAN2 domains There is only one DHCP server that services the DHCP clients in both domains Figure 127 Global DHCP Relay Network Example E DHCP Server T 192 168 1 100 Configure the DHCP Relay screen as shown Make sure you select the Option 82 check box to set the Switch to send additional information such as the VLAN ID together with the DHCP requests to the DHCP server This allows the DHCP server to assign the appropriate IP address according to the VLAN ID Figure 128 DHCP Relay Configuration Example ner Relay tat Active iv Remote DHCP Server 1 Remote DHCP Server 2 Remote DHCP Server 3 Relay Agent Information Information 28 4 Configuring DHCP VLAN Settings Use this screen to configure your DHCP settings based on the VLAN domain of the DHCP c
104. to the egress port Send the matching frames broadcast or DLF multicast marked for dropping or to be sentto the CPU to the egress port Setthe packet s VLAN ID Metering Enable Drop the packet Out of profile Change the DSCP value action Set OutDrop Precedence Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping Add Cancel Clear ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 19 Policy Rule The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 49 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable the policy Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes Classifier s This field displays the active classifier s you configure in the Classifier screen Select the classifier s to which this policy rule applies To select more than one classifier press SHIFT and select the choices at the same time Parameters Set the fields below for this policy You only have to set the field s that is related to the action s you configure in the Action field General VLAN ID Specify a VLAN ID number Egress Port Type the number of an outgoing port Outgoing Select Tag to add the specified VID to packets on the specified outgoing port packet Otherwise select Untag format for Egress port Priority Specify a priority level DSCP Specify a DSCP DiffServ Code Point number between 0 and 63 TOS Spe
105. to which the port belongs This must be an existing VLAN which you defined in the Advanced Applications VLAN screens Priority Select the priority level that the Switch will assign to frames belonging to this VLAN Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Index This is the index number identifying this protocol based VLAN Click on any of these numbers to edit an existing protocol based VLAN Active This field shows whether the protocol based VLAN is active or not Port This field shows which port belongs to this protocol based VLAN Name This field shows the name the protocol based VLAN Ethernet Type This field shows which Ethernet protocol is part of this protocol based VLAN ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN Table 20 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Protocol Based VLAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION VID This field shows the VLAN ID of the port Priority This field shows the priority which is assigned to frames belonging to this protocol based VLAN Delete Click this to delete the protocol based VLANs which you marked for deletion Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh
106. traffic users You can connect computers directly to the Switch s port or connect other switches to the Switch In this example all computers share high speed applications on the server To expand the network simply add more networking devices such as switches routers computers print servers etc Figure 1 Backbone Application ES 3148 User s Guide 33 Chapter 1 Introducing the Switch 1 1 2 Bridging Example The Switch can connect different company departments RD and Sales to the corporate backbone It can alleviate bandwidth contention and eliminate server and network bottlenecks All users that need high bandwidth can connect to high speed department servers via the Switch You can provide a super fast uplink connection by using a Gigabit Ethernet mini GBIC port on the Switch Moreover the Switch eases supervision and maintenance by allowing network managers to centralize multiple servers at a single location Figure 2 Bridging Application 1 1 3 High performance Switched Example The Switch is ideal for connecting two networks that need high bandwidth Switching to higher speed LANs such as ATM Asynchronous Transmission Mode is not feasible for most people due to the expense of replacing all existing Ethernet cables and adapter cards restructuring your network and complex maintenance The Switch can provide the same bandwidth as ATM at much lower cost while still being able to use existing a
107. uico cei ei Ie iei es ia Da MeN I ERO SERE iia 225 27T DNS OI LV e 225 24 1 7 BSGP and Per Hon BeNOR eesis na i aaaea Eaa Eia 225 271 2 Dif3erv Network EXSImple uio ove bet tr Hp AE EXER ENEEE RE FEANU ES RR NPUR ERE LEN ERN HIA RE Eun 226 27 2 Two Rate Three Color Marker Traffic Policing irae rere erae ent en ton deti ines 226 27 21 TRTOCM lt CHortblind Mode ER 227 21 2 2 TRITUM Color aware ModE ccccaisscccissssiccsnsrssiccncsadeoreeanssaunceensacautacunis aa 227 A Ee Apr T 228 27 3 1 Configuring 2 Rate 3 Color Marker Settings ssssrssssrrssrreeerrenrrreresreesssrenrissasasesns 228 27 4 DSCP oJEBE 3021p Priority SUMUS ouxnsuddecinici dede eiie oti fr dad dots 230 27 4 1 Configuring DSCP Settings 2 osea edad ede heben add uada oae Sk end addi dd 230 Chapter 28 p m e 233 WES eIDA 1 at 233 Z5 T IDEO Sa ee aero mre eer nee veer teem Be enter rer a BOR x omia bete Uo MI 233 29 12 DHCP Cong oh COBRE ciasscrniudeaniseeiadech pRER PR EKNXx PE RR CH d ees cob Y Pr erent 233 Ea ws cur v 233 OA PRG ETT 234 28 3 1 DHCP Relay Agent Information 2c ended itta ai 234 28 3 2 Configuring DHCP Global Relay audaces radere isa da oh rita 235 28 3 3 Global DHCP Relay Configuration Example uiuere cun k rtr e kFRE I ne X FPE e ne kepaaa 236 28 4 Configuring DHCP VLAN SODFIS aucccsessecas ese ve tnu pet r etae Epp rt IRI s denen E aa
108. 000001 11000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 192 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 193 Broadcast Address 192 168 1 255 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 254 Example Eight Subnets Similarly use a 27 bit mask to create eight subnets 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 and 111 The following table shows IP address last octet values for each subnet Table 132 Eight Subnets SUBNET ADDRESS FIRST ADDRESS ADDRESS ADDRESS 1 0 1 30 31 2 32 33 62 63 3 64 65 94 95 4 96 97 126 127 ES 3148 User s Guide Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 132 Eight Subnets continued SUBNET ADDRESS FIRST ADDRESS ADDRESS ADDRESS 5 128 129 158 159 6 160 161 190 191 7 192 193 222 223 8 224 225 254 255 Subnet Planning The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 24 bit network number Table 133 24 bit Network Number Subnet Planning NO BORROWED SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS NO HOSTS PER 1 255 255 255 128 25 126 2 255 255 255 192 26 62 3 255 255 255 224 27 30 4 255 255 255 240 28 16 14 5 255 255 255 248 29 32 6 6 255 255 255 252 30 64 2 7 255 255 255 254 31 128 1 The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 16 bit network number Table 134 16 bit Net
109. 1 date 2007 04 19 time 17 21 03 serial number 00000001 Acct Delay Time ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 23 Authentication amp Accounting 23 3 2 2 Attributes Used for Accounting Exec Events The attributes are listed in the following table along with the time that they are sent the difference between Console and Telnet SSH Exec events is that the Telnet SSH events utilize the Calling Station Id attribute Table 68 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Console ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM UPDATE STOP User Name Y Y lt NAS Identifier NAS IP Address Service Type Acct Status Type Acct Delay Time Acct Session ld Acct Authentic lt lt lt lt Acct Session Time lt lt lt lt lt lt Acct Terminate Cause lt lt lt lt lt lt lt Table 69 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Telnet SSH ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM UPDATE STOP User Name Y Y lt NAS Identifier NAS IP Address Service Type Calling Station Id Acct Status Type Acct Delay Time Acct Session ld Acct Authentic lt lt lt lt lt Acct Session Time lt lt lt lt lt lt Acct Terminate Cause lt lt lt lt x lt 23 3 2 3 Attributes Used for Accounting IEEE 802
110. 1 15 seconds of the burst interval Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values 24 7 2 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure Use this screen to enable ARP inspection on each VLAN and to specify when the Switch generates log messages for receiving ARP packets from each VLAN To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure gt VLAN Figure 111 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure gt VLAN ARF Inspection YLA onfigure Configure VLAN Start VID End VID Apply VID Enabled Log Apply Cancel ES 3148 User s Guide 217 Chapter 24 IP Source Guard The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 82 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure gt VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to manage in the section below Start VID Enter the lowest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below End VID Enter the highest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below Apply Click this to display the s
111. 1 5 8 17 32 2 1 This trap is sent when intrusion lock occurs on a port loopguard LoopguardEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 17 32 2 1 This trap is sent when loopguard shuts down a port Table 99 SNMP Interface Traps n OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION linkup linkUp 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 4 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is up LinkDownEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 17 32 2 2 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is up linkdown linkDown 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 3 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is down LinkDownEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 17 32 2 1 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is down autonegotiation AutonegotiationFailedEventO 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 17 32 2 1 This trap is sent when an Ethernet interface fails to auto negotiate with the peer Ethernet interface lear AutonegotiationFailedEventC 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 17 32 2 2 This trap is sent when an Ethernet interface auto negotiates with the peer Ethernet interface ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 30 Access Control Table 100 AAA Traps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION authentication authenticationFailure 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 5 This trap is sent when authentication fails due to incorrect user name and or password AuthenticationFailureEventO 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 17 32 2 This trap is sent when n 1 authentication fails du
112. 12 Bandwidth COMO M 125 12 1 Bandwidth DoWtrol OVOPVIBIW Suiisceda Dementia evene iki un e EUR vienna Hatten bad osa REEL pan pedi i 125 AICR amna e ulate tte ans ania es 125 pd IDEE IUS 0 DTE T ET 125 Chapter 13 Broadcast Storms CONO ss ecd pi REA ERES Red Ink Rd ERA ARE Sese a k aN Anian VE nu E EVRREUERERI RM aiian 127 13 1 Broadcast Stem Conirol Sep 3e teu V ct ERR ed ke EP RpI e MERE EFI LASER RI OIDAM econo 127 Chapter 14 MTO ec e 129 T4 T Ore DEG SSW 25 5 codes t RO eo anurans ee nama aD eR dod ce UR 129 Chapter 15 Hne ABESSE ovs icivadibvc scias IS Ix a E VENE LUI OR RU RM KEIEn d Pag d Na UE 131 pc wal Wl ect lus s WE m 131 15 2 Dynamic Link ru Em 131 19 2 1 Link Agoregaton Rame 132 1o Lik Aggra n E B uocatus RR SOPORE EUER OER e Dux SERIO REIN TREE ERN pl Decr pn ORA EEHIS 132 194 Link ABS op SB ITI aina 133 16 5 Link Aggregation Control Protocol auod kate i ra eia nha tH d nha tia ho d E canes 134 15 9 Static TRUNKING Example 2 heredi dde cti tdi tke td dotada d ddr kata 136 Chapter 16 pp Teide 139 16 1 PotAuthenticaton OvVernieW A visas succes aiaa N E aaea aaaea aada 139 16212 IEEE 8021x Aue nua WON sisinya n EA 139 Te WAS FANON m 140 16 2 Port Authentication Configuration eiu eae errat ek Roa ta Eti ed cea E Sara dramas bedi dane 141 16 2 1 Activate IEEE B2 1X DOCU c
113. 192 168 1 128 25 The following figure shows the company network after subnetting There are now two sub networks A and B ES 3148 User s Guide Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting Figure 209 Subnetting Example After Subnetting jl n VA 4 192 168 1 0 25 cu Nm u B LE 13192 168 1 128 25 II 41 4 CE eee um um um PP mm m m m um Dp et D s C 2 D et In a 25 bit subnet the host ID has 7 bits so each sub network has a maximum of 27 2 or 126 possible hosts a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet s address itself all ones is the subnet s broadcast address 192 168 1 0 with mask 255 255 255 128 is subnet A itself and 192 168 1 127 with mask 255 255 255 128 is its broadcast address Therefore the lowest IP address that can be assigned to an actual host for subnet A is 192 168 1 1 and the highest is 192 168 1 126 Similarly the host ID range for subnet B is 192 168 1 129 to 192 168 1 254 Example Four Subnets The previous example illustrated using a 25 bit subnet mask to divide a 24 bit address into two subnets Similarly to divide a 24 bit address into four subnets you need to borrow two host ID bits to give four possible combinations 00 01 10 and 11 The subnet mask is 26 bits 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 or 255 255 255 192 Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits giving 26 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet a host I
114. 1x 6 o 128 19 1x 7 o 128 19 1x 8 o 128 19 1 iM PRE L LPP LRA PAG Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 29 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MRSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Status Click Status to display the MRSTP Status screen see Figure 53 on page 116 Tree This is a read only index number of the STP trees Active Select this to activate an STP tree Clear this to disable an STP tree Note You must also activate Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration screen to enable MRSTP on the Switch Bridge Priority Bridge priority is used in determining the root switch root port and designated port The switch with the highest priority lowest numeric value becomes the STP root switch If all switches have the same priority the switch with the lowest MAC address will then become the root switch Select a value from the drop down list box The lower the numeric value you assign the higher the priority for this bridge Bridge Priority determines the root bridge which in turn determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units configuration message generations by the root switch The allowed range is 1 to 10 seconds ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol Table
115. 1x Events The attributes are listed in the following table along with the time of the session they are sent Table 70 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Console ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM UPDATE STOP User Name Y Y Y NAS IP Address NAS Port Class Called Station Id Calling Station Id NAS Identifier lt lt lt xx lt lt lt lt x lt lt lt lt xx lt ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 23 Authentication amp Accounting Table 70 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Console ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM UPDATE STOP NAS Port Type Y Y lt Acct Status Type Acct Delay Time Acct Session ld Acct Authentic Y Y Y Y Acct Input Octets Acct Output Octets Acct Session Time Acct Input Packets Acct Output Packets lt lt lt lt lt Acct Terminate Cause Acct Input Gigawords lt Acct Output Gigawords lt lt lt lt xxix lt ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 23 Authentication amp Accounting ES 3148 User s Guide IP Source Guard Use IP source guard to filter unauthorized DHCP and ARP packets in your network 24 1 IP Source Guard Overview IP source guard uses a binding table to distinguish between authorized and unauthorized DHCP and ARP packets in your n
116. 29 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MRSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION MAX Age This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure All switch ports except for designated ports should receive BPDUs at regular intervals Any port that ages out STP information provided in the last BPDU becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the Switch ports attached to the network The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time in seconds a switch will wait before changing states This delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state otherwise temporary data loops might result The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds As a general rule Note 2 Forward Delay 1 gt Max Age gt 2 Hello Time 1 Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you ma
117. 34 35 36 37 39 39 40 41 42 43 M 45 46 47 49 49 30 51 52 123 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 0n oa B M1 16 17 1 1 2 21 2 2 M 25 26 22 20 29 30 31 32 epo Gre ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 21 Advanced Application gt VLAN Port Based VLAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Setting Wizard Choose All connected or Port isolation All connected means all ports can communicate with each other that is there are no virtual LANs All incoming and outgoing ports are selected This option is the most flexible but also the least secure Port isolation means that each port can only communicate with the CPU management port and cannot communicate with each other All incoming ports are selected while only the CPU outgoing port is selected This option is the most limiting but also the most secure After you make your selection click Apply top right of screen to display the screens as mentioned above You can still customize these settings by adding deleting incoming or outgoing ports but you must also click Apply at the bottom of the screen Incoming These are the ingress ports an ingress port is an incoming port that is a port through which a data packet enters If you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other you must define the ingress port for both ports The numbers in the top row denote the incoming port for the corresponding port listed on the le
118. 55 255 128 25 1000 0000 128 ES 3148 User s Guide 327 Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 127 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation continued sumerweek AURA T exer SERRE 255 255 255 192 26 1100 0000 192 255 255 255 224 27 1110 0000 224 255 255 255 240 28 1111 0000 240 255 255 255 248 29 1111 1000 248 255 255 255 252 30 1111 1100 252 Subnetting You can use subnetting to divide one network into multiple sub networks In the following example a network administrator creates two sub networks to isolate a group of servers from the rest of the company network for security reasons In this example the company network address is 192 168 1 0 The first three octets of the address 192 168 1 are the network number and the remaining octet is the host ID allowing a maximum of 2 2 or 254 possible hosts The following figure shows the company network before subnetting Figure 208 Subnetting Example Before Subnetting a a Y Internet il a i p i a i I y 192 168 1 0 24 4 4 L umumum m m m m m m m m m You can borrow one of the host ID bits to divide the network 192 168 1 0 into two separate sub networks The subnet mask is now 25 bits 255 255 255 128 or 25 The borrowed host ID bit can have a value of either 0 or 1 allowing two subnets 192 168 1 0 25 and
119. 6 SSH Secure Shell 255 SSL Secure Socket Layer 256 standby ports 131 static bindings 199 static MAC address 103 static MAC forwarding 93 95 103 static routes 223 224 static trunking example 136 static VLAN 89 control 90 tagging 90 status 52 67 LED 47 link aggregation 132 port 67 port details 68 power 75 STP 115 118 122 VLAN 88 status lights 47 STP 107 288 bridge ID 116 119 bridge priority 114 117 configuration 114 117 120 designated bridge 108 forwarding delay 115 118 Hello BPDU 108 Hello Time 115 116 117 119 how it works 108 Max Age 115 116 118 119 path cost 108 115 118 port priority 115 118 port state 109 root port 108 status 115 118 122 terminology 107 vs loop guard 219 subnet 325 subnet based VLANs 92 and DHCP VLAN 93 and priority 92 configuration 93 subnet mask 326 subnetting 328 switch lockout 59 switch reset 59 switch setup 77 switching 288 syntax conventions 4 syslog 202 265 protocol 265 server setup 266 settings 265 setup 265 severity levels 265 system information 73 system log 263 system reboot 241 T TACACS 186 setup 188 TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus 185 tagged VLAN 85 temperature indicator 74 time current 76 time zone 76 Time RFC 868 76 time server 76 time service protocol 76 format 76 trademarks 345 ES 3148 User s Guide Index transceiver installation 44 removal 45 traps destination 251 TRTCM
120. 75 viewing 276 maintenance 239 configuration backup 242 current configuration 239 firmware 241 main screen 239 restoring configuration 242 Management Information Base MIB 246 management port 43 101 management specifications 289 managing the device good habits 36 using FTP See FTP using SNMP See SNMP using Telnet See command interface using the command interface See command interface using the web configurator See web configurator man in the middle attacks 201 max age 121 hops 121 MIB and SNMP 246 supported MIBs 247 MIB Management Information Base 246 mini GBIC ports 44 connection speed 44 connector types 44 transceiver installation 44 transceiver removal 45 mirroring ports 129 monitor port 129 130 mounting brackets 40 MSA MultiSource Agreement 44 MST Instance See MSTI 111 MST region 111 MSTI 111 MST ID 111 MSTI Multiple Spanning Tree Instance 110 MSTP 107 110 bridge ID 123 124 configuration 120 configuration digest 124 forwarding delay 121 Hello Time 123 hello time 121 Max Age 123 max age 121 max hops 121 MST region 111 network example 110 path cost 122 port priority 122 revision level 121 MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol 107 MTU Multi Tenant Unit 77 multicast 171 802 1 priority 173 and IGMP 171 IP addresses 171 overview 171 setup 172 173 multicast group 176 multicast VLAN 180 Multiple Spanning Tree Instance See MSTI 110 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol 109
121. 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol JEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol The Switch also allows you to set up multiple STP configurations or trees Ports can then be assigned to the trees 11 1 STP RSTP Overview BS R STP detects and breaks network loops and provides backup links between switches bridges or routers It allows a Switch to interact with other R STP compliant switches in your network to ensure that only one path exists between any two stations on the network The Switch uses IEEE 802 1w RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol that allows faster convergence of the spanning tree than STP while also being backwards compatible with STP only aware bridges In RSTP topology change information is directly propagated throughout the network from the device that generates the topology change In STP a longer delay is required as the device that causes a topology change first notifies the root bridge that then notifies the network Both RSTP and STP flush unwanted learned addresses from the filtering database In RSTP the port states are Discarding Learning and Forwarding In this user s guide STP refers to both STP and RSTP 11 1 1 STP Terminology The root bridge is the base of the spanning tree ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame onto a LAN through that port The recommended cost is assigned according to the speed of the
122. Address Setting in ifconfig ethO sssssseee 314 Figure 194 Red Hat 9 0 DNS Settings in FesolvGOhlT ucuscesccen scorta tror tte teret tank e eoa Iu pa etaed kr upER 314 Figure 195 Red Hat 9 0 Restart Ethernet Card ossssispsct ex ERSUHOGELEESRMNCHE DR ERR RELIER CAES 314 Figure 196 Red Har 2 0 Checking TCP IP Properties cadence draenei 315 lux nnsecledrhevlle me M 317 Figure 198 Internet Options Privacy sca dirt ei eodd en nda n El ES pada beh n a ERU Kd bah E EAE a 318 Figur 199 imemet ODBOHS PIVa ositeaon de eon na tonk uet RE ee PL DURER cm n ett bue fu pub asi con pet eens 319 Figure 200 Pop up Blocker Settings M 319 Figure 201 Intermet Options DG QUEICUE ua quas accen Rit Id ig tik a p d List t Rd tnt da at Ct da s aL c pa 320 Figure 202 Security Settings Java OCPIplg 22e ciii ieeca ont erede korr td det kk pid ke iiaia 321 Figure 209 Securty Slings Java Lusctodetininasipe tendance aguda atti b nun Fi ptite de 321 Geet eps c r cct ou Nem 322 Figure 205 Mozilla Firefox Tools gt ODBONS tcccicssssrccssacses cust ceste ttu o rt seurasi iass keiina i SE anur sieaas 323 Figure 206 Mozilla Firefox Content Security suisse kiere rion bte kai nlt nin Rr kc 323 Figure 207 Network Number and Host Bee c ER 326 Figure 208 Subnetting Example Before Subnetting 1er rra etna nes ere n nn 328 Figure 209 Subnetting Example After Subnetting eeeeessesseeeeeeeener nennen nt tnn nnn nnn 329 Figure
123. AppleTalk GR Network Browser ColorSync G Recent Applications Control Strip S Recent Documents ee DialAssist cif Remote Access Status Energy Saver Scrapbook Extensions Manager 49 Sherlock 2 File Exchange a Speakable Items File Sharing y Stickies General Controls Internet Keyboard Keychain Access Launcher Location Manager Memory Modem Monitors Mouse Multiple Users Numbers QuickTime Settings Remote Access Software Update Sound Speech USB Printer Sharing 2 Select Ethernet built in from the Connect via list Figure 185 Macintosh OS 8 9 TCP IP TCP IP camest vn Setup Configure Using DHCP Server DHCP Client ID l IP Address lt will be supplied by server 7 Sunet mask lt will be supplied by server gt Router address lt will be supplied by server gt Search comans Name server addr lt will be supplied by server 3 For dynamically assigned settings select Using DHCP Server from the Configure list 4 For statically assigned settings do the following From the Configure box select Manually ES 3148 User s Guide 309 Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Type your IP address in the IP Address box Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box Type the IP address of your Switch in the Router address box 5 Close the TCP IP Control Panel 6 Click Save if prompted to save changes to your confi
124. CR EM PEEEER 103 SEES EI E E A A 103 9 2 Configuring Statie MAC Forwarding ecxeexassivenseiskiata it e p adita b redd pci d aon 103 Chapter 10 gl eno rra APR TTERTTURA 105 10 1 Connaure a Filler RUIE coucesu ipe aso Fe Petit oie PpI IS EE REF INR rtu MEER TEAM FER EM RUIT 105 Chapter 11 Spanning Tree uinriieie s P 107 TIT IPAS Te AOVERUQU Louise t p v p oa tu a bi ER RN 107 IELTS TEMPO pcre Mons rete er Madaitenepdien Shed tn tuuc eprM px FE RUD dete 107 pd D UEISMIRIS Ae 108 ES 3148 User s Guide 13 Table of Contents BEC PGi ISIS P 109 TT AUIS EUSTEE E N kp i ce etu dal Ead e E PA ETE EU Ian tuU A e 109 uu qJp dee m 110 11 2 Spanning Tree Protocol Status CPI q i osre drca ror ix iiiar peru du ox p CA td aanipoutes THe Tl Spanning moe COMORIAN oonerkneiaestkcrictaaktrkedddarben RR DH Dixet dois te pre e RH RA EE RR 113 11 4 Configure Rapid Spanning Tree PROG ausceeseecesnccesa iue sccea tune zutid sone tati ind 114 11 5 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status essere bb prr tr Ert EIER REN ek kt ga 115 11 6 Configure Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol sssssssee 117 11 7 Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status sess 118 11 8 Configure Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol eesemm emm 120 71 9 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Status cuecseiseseiest tabes ero eco PLA ERE eut Ta bU FUR P Rr Er eve t 122 Chapter
125. CTET OCTET Se TOE 192 168 1 2 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000010 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111114 11111111 00000000 Network Number 11000000 10101000 00000001 Host ID 00000010 By convention subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the leftmost bit of the mask followed by a continuous sequence of zeros for a total number of 32 bits Subnet masks can be referred to by the size of the network number part the bits with a 1 value For example an 8 bit mask means that the first 8 bits of the mask are ones and the remaining 24 bits are zeroes ES 3148 User s Guide Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just like IP addresses The following examples show the binary and decimal notation for 8 bit 16 bit 24 bit and 29 bit subnet masks Table 125 Subnet Masks BINARY DECIMAL OCTET OCTET OCTET SUl OGEN 8 bitmask 11111111 00000000 00000000 00000000 255 0 0 0 16 bitmask 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 255 255 0 0 24 bitmask 11111111 11111111 11111141 00000000 255 255 255 0 29 bit mask 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111000 255 255 255 248 Network Size The size of the network number determines the maximum number of possible hosts you can have on your network The larger the number of network num
126. D of all zeroes is the subnet itself all ones is the subnet s broadcast address Table 128 Subnet 1 LAST OCTET BIT IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER VALUE IP Address Decimal 192 168 1 0 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 0 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 62 192 168 1 63 ES 3148 User s Guide Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 129 Subnet 2 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 64 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 01000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 64 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 65 Broadcast Address 192 168 1 127 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 126 Table 130 Subnet 3 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 128 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 10000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 128 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 129 Broadcast Address 192 168 1 191 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 190 Table 131 Subnet 4 LAST OCTET BIT IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 192 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00
127. ED ARP Inspection VLAN Status Status Enabled VLAN Show VLAN range C Selected VLAN Start VID End VID Apply VID Received Request Reply Forwarded Dropped The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 78 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt VLAN Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Show VLAN range Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to look at in the section below Enabled VLAN Select this to look at all the VLANs on which ARP inspection is enabled in the section below Selected VLAN Select this to look at all the VLANs in a specific range in the section below Then enter the lowest VLAN ID Start VID and the highest VLAN ID End VID you want to look at Apply Click this to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above Received This field displays the total number of ARP packets received from the VLAN since the switch last restarted Request This field displays the total number of ARP Request packets received from the VLAN since the switch last restarted Reply This field displays the total number of ARP Reply packets received from the VLAN since the switch last restarted Forwarded This field displays the total number of ARP packets the switch forwarded for the VLAN since the switch last restarted Dropped This field displays the total
128. EIEJ S c cC c C BIEIEEIE C c c c C EIEJIEJEE E c c c C BIEJEEEIE E c c C C EIEJEIE E c C 6 S EIE S sLILILILILIL C c C LILILILIL IC c c c C C c c c C c c ey Wl c c 6 CLIE S s LiLiLiLILIL CII c c c c RII CI e c c Ibe c e Ci s DODD oO c we o c c c O c c c c c c C s c c C EIL e LILILILILIC c c c C LILILILIL C cc c CEILILILIL C c c c CLEILEILILIEIC c C 6 C EIEJILILIE c c c CLIE LLLLLCLILIEILIE c c CORDED c c c C EIEJEIEIE C c c c C EICILIEIE E c c c eEIEIEIEIE C C LrLrrULtLILILILILIL cC c c c EILILILILIC c c c c EILILILIL C c c c C EIEILILILIC c c 6 CLI ILILILI co 2 ninibini LILILI Lc C C EILILILIL IC c c cC C BIEILILILIC c c c C LIEILILILI C c s c CLEILIEILILI C C sLLLLCCLILILILILIC c cC c CLILILILILIC c c c C LILILILIL C c C C CLBILILILIL C s c C CLIEIE IL C C 5 scLuLrLrtLILILILILI t rcc ODODE c c c c cC LILEILILIL c c c c cC LILILILIL s c c c CLILEILILILI cic e cam m cc EILELLLCLLr cLLLLIELrrcrcrEBLBLLLELCLCrcrc LLLELEL LCcccLEIE LILILILILIUL c cC C LILILILIL IC c c c C EILILILIL C c c c C EILIEILIL C c c s C Wl C c c c CLIE s LILILILILIL c cC c C LILILILILIC c c c COOCOO c c c C LEIEIEILILIC c s c CL IEILILIELC c c 6 LoD s s DOODO LL LI c e ODODE RI s c e C EILILILIEC c co ie SDRC CL C LILILILILIC c c L c a c c c C LILILILIL s c c c C LILILILIIEC C E 2 LLLLtLILILI LUDO CODD oo OCOD ol oe DDD ci co oi s LLDLUtCtLILILI rrcrr rLILILILILIC c cc C E
129. ERE EEEE TEMA FEES TRIP AE ken AREE PV eoo Naa 239 Tabie 94 Filename Conventions Meere 243 Table 95 General Commands for GUI based FTP Clients esistente naa 244 Table 96 Access Control OvervieW 1aeueausexkel ei reap Ebr eR Le pna pei eet tJ edi n ink EXE E dena d x pa BE epi aen 245 Table 97 SNMP Commande iate ID an AR etescibeude ritrova nep T d au Eos etii 246 Tabe 90 SNMP SyS Taps DETTO mm 247 THE Se SNMP ECS MADS UU a Ah SAAE OE AA S EA BAUDET ANAA 248 Tade TOO AAA MAPS m M 249 Table TOT SNMP IP TEADS auca aA 249 Table 102 SNNP Swifcli TIA DS ayisan Hamaiesersisiantaduecsseiaticai oe aiceaneeeaete 250 Table 103 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP sssccccccsisccsscccsssecis seca senciiawasunsaenarsnnnl ecersserssannrnneee 251 Table 104 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP gt Trap Group sss 253 Table 105 Management gt Access Control gt Logins eessssssessseeesserrrsrersreerrnreessterneearinansatenanaaranaassaeea 254 Table 106 Management gt Access Control gt Service Access Control sess 260 Table 107 Management gt Access Control gt Remote Management sese 260 Table 108 Management DIBOIOSHO seccccccccescccicacceueteiesscestenssagsbeatened tese acre tutae E 263 Table 109 Syslog Severi Levels 2 petendi rta ERE e LIE e PET FR He ER ERA RE Evi EPA AREA Rd 265 Hrs XN Managemen Sy e eE 266 Table 111 Management gt Syslog gt Server Setup ies
130. ES 3148 Series Intelligent Layer 2 Switch User s Guide Version 3 80 8 2007 Edition 1 DEFAULT LOGIN IP Address _http 192 168 1 1 User Name admin Password 1234 ZyXEL www zyxel com About This User s Guide About This User s Guide Intended Audience This manual is intended for people who want to configure the Switch using the web configurator You should have at least a basic knowledge of TCP IP networking concepts and topology Related Documentation Web Configurator Online Help Embedded web help for descriptions of individual screens and supplementary information Command Reference Guide The Command Reference Guide explains how to use the Command Line Interface CLI and CLI commands to configure the Switch BES It is recommended you use the web configurator to configure the Switch Supporting Disk Refer to the included CD for support documents ZyXEL Web Site Please refer to www zyxel com for additional support documentation and product certifications User Guide Feedback Help us help you Send all User Guide related comments questions or suggestions for improvement to the following address or use e mail instead Thank you The Technical Writing Team ZyXEL Communications Corp 6 Innovation Road II Science Based Industrial Park Hsinchu 300 Taiwan E mail techwriters zyxel com tw ES 3148 User s Guide 3 Document Conventions Document Conventions Warning
131. IGMP join report frame s is dropped on this port IGMP Filtering Profile Select the name of the IGMP filtering profile to use for this port Otherwise select Default to prohibit the port from joining any multicast group You can create IGMP filtering profiles in the Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile screen IGMP Querier Mode The Switch treats an IGMP query port as being connected to an IGMP multicast router or server The Switch forwards IGMP join or leave packets to an IGMP query port Select Auto to have the Switch use the port as an IGMP query port if the port receives IGMP query packets Select Fixed to have the Switch always use the port as an IGMP query port Select this when you connect an IGMP multicast server to the port Select Edge to stop the Switch from using the port as an IGMP query port The Switch will not keep any record of an IGMP router being connected to this port The Switch does not forward IGMP join or leave packets to this port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 22 4 IGMP Snooping VLAN Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast in the navigation panel Cli
132. ILEIEIE E C c c c c EIE DUDUQ L cc C LiLILILIL e c c c C LILILILILIC c c c C EILIEILILIC C CI c cc cible LLuLLULLILILEILIEIC c c c e EIEIEIEIL c c c c C EILICILIL C c c C C EICILILIE C c c c C Oe SOUL OCOD Cc x C LILILILILIC c c c c LEILILILIL E cC c C C EIEILILIL C c c c CL ILILILILI c c s COLLO CODODD c s c cC LILILILIL c c c c C ODD c c c c c EIEILIL IL c c c c C ODODE O e sr rrutLILILILILI s c c cC LILILILILI C c c c C LEILEILILIL I C c c c c LEIEILILILI C c c c c LILILILILI c c aL OLO O DDOD Uc UL DRDO OCU CRD o OO CRD Uc LILILILILI C c sLIEIEIEIE E C c S wa YY C o C EIEIE IE E C C C C EIEJIEIE IE C c c c C EIEIEIEIE E c S LILILILIL Ic c c e c EILEIEILIL I C c c c CODD c c c CRD c c c c EIEIEIE E C c c c c EIE e DMR be c c RII CID I c c c cllc c i DR cc Cibi ee LID DI IDI ccc cbe LILILILILIs L L m c e e C LILILILILIU c c 8 CLILILILIL C c c c CIULILILILIC c c a LrcrrEkLIEIEIEIE CcCcccEIEIEIEIE cc c C EJIEIEIE E c c CEJIEJIEE E C c c c C EIEJIEIE IE ce Lrrbr LILILILILIL Cc c c EILILILIL I c c c c C LILEILILI C c c 6 C EIEILIL LIC c c 5 C LILILILILI C c LubLtLILILILILIL cc c c EIEILILIL C c c c c RD C c c c c LEILILILIL C c c c c LIEILILILI c c6 LELLCLCLILILILILIC cc c CLILILILILIC LC c cC C LILILILILIL c C C CBILILILIL C c C C CEILILILILIL C krrrrtLILELILILI crcccLILILILIL I c c c c c EIEILILIL c c c c c LIE Do OOCL O e mame em mo 2A NAANA AARAA ARR RRARRARRA RR ERAS TGCS ERS SSF RARER 33
133. ILILILIL I C c c amp CODD C c c c oo LLE C a UCC CORDED OCC a S a co Co Uc Meg LrLrLctLILLILILIL eeg gy gay ey ee wl gg yy LILILILIL c c sLLrPECcUCLILILILILI LODODO c c c C EJIE ILILIL IS c c c c LIEJIEILIL C c c UCD c o e s LILILILILIL Cel LOD E c c c LD Pe c c c eI ee c c C a a c c c C Ens jamm LOL C LILILILIL C c c c LILILILILIC c c e PII c c c C EILILILILIC C c c Ciis sR OL LEI CDI c e c C a a a c II i sLILILILILIUL c c C LILILILIL IC c c c C EILILILIL IC s c c C c c c C Wl c c c C LIEU s LILILILILIL c c c C LILILILIL C c c c CEILILILIL s c c c c LILIEILIE C c c c C Wl C c c c C sLLLLDLLILILIEIE I ccc cLEIEIEIEE c cc c e BRODER c c c C EJIEJIEJIE E o c c c C EIEJIEIE E ce sLLLLrtLILILILILIL ccc cLEILILILILIC c c e c Wl c c c C LEIEILILILIC c c 5 c LILILILILI c c sLLuLLtLILILILILIL Lr rcELELLILLICLUL r cLILILLIELILLC r rtrLILILLILICLCLCo LILILILILIC Oie stLLLtLILILILILIL c c c c OOOO e c c c LEILILILIL C c c c C c c c C IL ILILILI c c sLLULLCLILLILILIL ccc cELEILILILILI c c c C LEILILILIL C cC c C C LILILILIL C c c c C ODODO C GA m c C C LED c c c e DDD c c c C a e e e e c C c OI c c 6 i LILILILILIU c c c C LILILILIL IC c c e C C c c c C EILILILIL C c c c C Wl c c c CLIE s LILILILILIL c cC c CLILILILILIC c s c CEILILILIL C c c c C LEILIEILILIC c c c CLILILILIL C c c c C E LILILILIL IC c c c CODD ee c c CODD c c c c EILILIE E C c c c C E
134. ION VLAN Type Choose 802 1Q or Port Based The VLAN Setup screen changes depending on whether you choose 802 1Q VLAN type or Port Based VLAN type in this screen See Chapter 8 on page 85 for more information Bridge Control Select Active to allow the Switch to handle bridging control protocols STP for Protocol example You also need to define how to treat a BPDU in the Port Setup screen Transparency MAC Address MAC address learning reduces outgoing traffic broadcasts For MAC address Learning learning to occur on a port the port must be active Aging Time Enter a time from 10 to 3000 seconds This is how long all dynamically learned MAC addresses remain in the MAC address table before they age out and must be relearned GARP Timer Switches join VLANs by making a declaration A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using GARP Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message A Leave All message terminates all registrations GARP timers set declaration timeout values See the chapter on VLAN setup for more background information Join Timer Join Timer sets the duration of the Join Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a Join Period timer The allowed Join Time range is between 100 and 65535 milliseconds the default is 200 milliseconds See the chapter on VLAN setup for more background information Leave Timer Leave Time sets the duration of the Leave Period timer for GVRP in mi
135. KS sister tte o C sian EAE 327 Table 120 Maximum H st INUPIDERS 2uxssezcceuussuadspuanb rds MEME E MERE aaa ERM A RU iaaiiai E FEMA RUE kRAS Rada 327 Table 127 Altemative Subnet Mask Notalloh irrisica Cobara piv etaa i Ea Lob dux A EF ax dd ues Vaud 327 Tape 128 SUID T auae eade dc ales Rad rt a a uae en e sc Ra i 329 WARIS TOS SUNG d aetes 330 Dp TSU SUIT c a ek ee eh ak eai aie 330 TUET SI MUT D T TUR 330 jr grands cT eaten a eee eae 330 Table 133 24 bit Network Number Subnet Planning ccccceeceseneeeeeeeeeneeesecenenseeeeceeensneeeeeeeenneees 331 Table 134 16 bit Network Number Subnet Planning sseeeee emen 331 Table 135 Commonly Used OOIVIDBS cseccscsascerssnesaasresiveaaturcessdseuareonsarddurtaszaaauareensqzaureeeaarsaureeencaauiionss 335 ES 3148 User s Guide PART Introduction troducing the Switch 33 Introducing the Switch This chapter introduces the main applications and features of the Switch It also introduces the ways you can manage the Switch See Chapter 38 on page 287 for a complete list of features that are common to all of the models 1 1 Overview This section shows a few examples of using the Switch in various network environments 1 1 1 Backbone Application The Switch is an ideal solution for small networks where rapid growth can be expected in the near future The Switch can be used standalone for a group of heavy
136. LAN Port i Any Add Cancel Clear Index MAC Address IP Address Lease Type VLAN Port Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 72 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt Static Binding LABEL DESCRIPTION MAC Address Enter the source MAC address in the binding IP Address Enter the IP address assigned to the MAC address in the binding VLAN Enter the source VLAN ID in the binding Port Specify the port s in the binding If this binding has one port select the first radio button and enter the port number in the field to the right If this binding applies to all ports select Any Add Click this to create the specified static binding or to update an existing one Cancel Click this to reset the values above based on the last selected static binding or if not applicable to clear the fields above Clear Click this to clear the fields above Index This field displays a sequential number for each binding MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address in the binding IP Address This field displays the IP address assigned to the MAC address in the binding Lease This field displays how long the binding is valid Type This field displays how the Switch learned the binding static This binding was learned from information provided manually by an administrator VLAN This field displays the source VLAN ID in the bin
137. M v v v v e III v v v v v IV v eee PIPPI Pe ee PPP III s vivi v v v v viii v v vvv vri sMM PRM v v vri vtr vrl ttti vti MMMMM r rv v v PMP v Ie iv I I VLL IU v Ie Iv Iv IMP e Iv Iv Iv PI Iv I7 Iv Iv Ie VL o oMM PMR v rv v PPMP PPM v rv v Iw PM PPMP Iv iv Iv PIMP e Iv Iv Iv Ie VLL VL Iv IV Iv Iv IV TV o aevi PP ee ee IMM ee ee Mie ee e e II m m a 2 vvv PVP PO PPI MP OV PO IMM rriv ee ee IMI v a AA ANA Al cd cd cd A AAA a cd cA Ac a CA A A lt A CS uP RPV PMP PVP PO OPM IM OV IMM Pe Pe MIP vi IMI v SVM PRP MMe he PIP Be NI PE III v s MMMM Pek ee PM PM PM ee ee OPP PPP ee ee PPP PP ee rv s OMMMMP PPR REMMI e v v eM e e e vivir viii eoMM PIMP VK v v PMP MMe v v rv OM PIM ie v iv iv ie MAAMA Iv iv Iv Iv Ij IMM Iv Iv Iv Iv MR n OM MMMM v v v e Iviiviiviiviiviiv v v v v III v v vivir tiii MM PMP v vr rivi PV POM PVP vivi v rmm ri asevrviriivivrtrriviII mistress aVV PV PMP PVP Pe PIM IM Pe PO IMM Pe Pe iiiv vivir vv s CA AA AAA AAA AAA AAA AAA AAA AAA 12345678 9 D n D D M B 16H M D 2 22 2 x 2 25 2 2 2 3 3 3 B M 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4841444495525 Apply Cancel ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN Figure 42 Advanced Application gt VLAN Port Based VLAN Setup Port Isolation Setting Wizard Portisolation z Apply a LLOC LODDODODO UL LC ODDO Oeo EB AAAA a aa PCE a a a mm ES sLLLLL LILILILILIL C rcrcrcELILILILILIC O o rc CBD c c C c LIEILILILIC o O c CLILILILEILI e c e sLIEEI
138. MAC addresses and VLAN group ID Click Advanced Application gt Filtering in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next Figure 44 Advanced Application gt Filtering E hit Active C Name Discard source Action Discard destination MAC L EL dE Jb d BL m VID Ada Cancel Clear Index Active Name MAC Address VID Action Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 23 Advanced Application gt Filtering LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Make sure to select this check box to activate your rule You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it by deselecting this check box Name Type a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for this rule This is for identification only ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 10 Filtering Table 23 Advanced Application gt Filtering continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Action Select Discard source to drop frame from the source MAC address specified in the MAC field The Switch can still send frames to the MAC address Select Discard destination to drop frames to the destination MAC address specified in the MAC address The Switch can still receive frames originating from the MAC address Select Discard source and Discard destination to block traffic to from the MAC address specified in the MAC field MAC Type a MAC address
139. MP TCP UDP 161 Simple Network Management Program SNMP TRAPS TCP UDP 162 Traps for use with the SNMP RFC 1215 SQL NET TCP 1521 Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems including mainframes midrange systems UNIX systems and network servers SSH TCP UDP 22 Secure Shell Remote Login Program STRM WORKS UDP 1558 Stream Works Protocol SYSLOG UDP 514 Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX server TACACS UDP 49 Login Host Protocol used for Terminal Access Controller Access Control System TELNET TCP 23 Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments It operates over TCP IP networks Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems TFTP UDP 69 Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an Internet file transfer protocol similar to FTP but uses the UDP User Datagram Protocol rather than TCP Transmission Control Protocol VDOLIVE TCP 7000 Another videoconferencing solution ES 3148 User s Guide 337 Appendix D Common Services ES 3148 User s Guide Importing Certificates This appendix shows importing certificates examples using Netscape Navigator and Internet Explorer 5 This appendix uses the ZyWALL 70 as an example Other models should be similar Import Switch Certificates into Netscape Navigator In Netscape Navigator you can p
140. MRSTP a panning Tree Protocol Status Configuration RSTP MRSTP MSTP IC Tree Protocol MRSTP Tree 1 7 Bridge Root Our Bridge Bridge ID 8000 001349000002 8000 001349000002 Hello Time second 2 2 Max Age second 20 20 Forwarding Delay second 15 15 Cost to Bridge 0 Port ID 0x0000 Topology Changed Times 0 Time Since Last Change 0 00 00 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 30 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MRSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Configuration Click Configuration to specify which STP mode you want to activate Click MRSTP to edit MRSTP settings on the Switch Tree Select which STP tree configuration you want to view Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tree the root bridge Our Bridge is this Switch This Switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds at which the root switch transmits a second configuration message The root bridge determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Max Age second This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure Forwarding Delay second This is the time in seconds the r
141. N configurations are 4 094 TPID User Priority CFI VLAN ID 2 Bytes 3 Bits 1 Bit 12 bits 8 1 1 Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames Each port on the Switch is capable of passing tagged or untagged frames To forward a frame from an 802 1Q VLAN aware switch to an 802 1Q VLAN unaware switch the Switch first decides where to forward the frame and then strips off the VLAN tag To forward a frame from an 802 1Q VLAN unaware switch to an 802 10 VLAN aware switch the Switch first decides where to forward the frame and then inserts a VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port s default VID The default PVID is VLAN 1 for all ports but this can be changed A broadcast frame or a multicast frame for a multicast group that is known by the system is confining the broadcast to a specific domain ES 3148 User s Guide duplicated only on ports that are members of the VID except the ingress port itself thus Chapter 8 VLAN 8 2 Automatic VLAN Registration 8 2 1 GARP 8 2 1 1 GARP Timers 8 2 2 GVRP GARP and GVRP are the protocols used to automatically register VLAN membership across switches GARP Generic Attribute Registration Protocol allows network switches to register and de register attribute values with other GARP participants within a bridged LAN GARP is a protocol that provides a generic mechanism for protocols that serve a more specific application for example GVRP Switches join VLANs by mak
142. NDU A CLER GEN P VRs Rede DER 37 Hardware Istallation and Lone DE auiosc ies or Ren o ri EE XE pod bl ROG RR MER 39 Reber WAS EP 1s E D o E oo ET 43 begets ciiin dM EIE TEL TT a 49 TV WS EIU deme T vm TERS 51 hiiiEe dcbet 63 System Status and Port Statistics ura andere tuto k a Deux pa anun LE NAAN NANENANE E RO pA AENA EEE ANA 67 civiue corps TER 73 VLAN 85 cud MAC EBINSIB DOIBD 2uscensdmadis tese Ania RE Ee roc bu i ities eli a SERV DRESS EM EVRRU EI LUPA MU EEGMA 103 nim 105 scu uM Auigsrs ee KR 107 Dad OCOD caca ie ete oie o e itti mie ur cux M den telatd diem 125 Broadcast SIM i m 127 E EA E PP RET E UT UU UE NU EO 129 Lib gor OBI a idit teda ke re rae p tren edt Ra Da a MR Pai kuM dn KR o adt HERE Terry IAE RUN 131 PEE PULO 2n pore o e FER a E cL E ied 139 FOIT DEG idis eae tia dien d dam diclus Mu headed a spade ead deena uaa Mca a 145 erc ge 149 lu m 155 SUID TE ii e eU 161 VLAN Eccl 165 LIE DUIS T ar EET T EN RR QI IP NOI RETI TIUNUNOR IRE RN NINE 171 Pipe P Piero RR E E ES 185 lub DUITE M M 199 Ela QI CCP 219 odi e 223 Direrontalad SOVICE once orba RU p E LG te EL RU dodge 225
143. P IP Address type an IP address in IP address and a subnet mask in Subnet mask and then click Add Repeat the above two steps for each IP address you want to add Configure additional default gateways in the IP Settings tab by clicking Add in Default gateways In TCP IP Gateway Address type the IP address of the default gateway in Gateway To manually configure a default metric the number of transmission hops clear the Automatic metric check box and type a metric in Metric Click Add Repeat the previous three steps for each default gateway you want to add Click OK when finished ES 3148 User s Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 182 Windows Vista Advanced TCP IP Properties Advanced TCP IP Settings ee IP Settings pws wis IP addresses IP address Subnet mask DHCP Enabled Add Edit Remove Default gateways Gateway Metric Add Edit Remove J Automatic metric Cancel 9 Inthe Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties window the General tab Click Obtain DNS server address automatically if you do not know your DNS server IP address es f you know your DNS server IP address es click Use the following DNS server addresses and type them in the Preferred DNS server and Alternate DNS server fields If you have previously configured DNS servers click Advanced and then the DNS tab to order them ES 3148 User s Guide 307
144. P relay option 82 When the DHCP server responds the Switch removes the information in the Agent Information field before forwarding the response to the original source You can configure this setting for each source VLAN This setting is independent of the DHCP relay settings Chapter 28 on page 233 24 1 1 4 Configuring DHCP Snooping Follow these steps to configure DHCP snooping on the Switch 1 Enable DHCP snooping on the Switch 2 Enable DHCP snooping on each VLAN and configure DHCP relay option 82 3 Configure trusted and untrusted ports and specify the maximum number of DHCP packets that each port can receive per second 4 Configure static bindings 24 1 2 ARP Inspection Overview Use ARP inspection to filter unauthorized ARP packets on the network This can prevent many kinds of man in the middle attacks such as the one in the following example Figure 99 Example Man in the middle Attack In this example computer B tries to establish a connection with computer A Computer X is in the same broadcast domain as computer A and intercepts the ARP request for computer A Then computer X does the following things It pretends to be computer A and responds to computer B It pretends to be computer B and sends a message to computer A As a result all the communication between computer A and computer B passes through computer X Computer X can read and alter the information passed between them ES 3148 User s Guide
145. RFC 2012 SNMPv2 MIB for TCP RFC 2013 SNMPv2 MIB for UDP RFC 2131 DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2132 DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2138 RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RFC 2139 RADIUS Accounting RFC 2236 Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP Version 2 RFC 2475 DiffServ DSCP to IEEE 802 1p priority mapping RFC 2674 Bridge MIB extension for IEEE 802 1Q RFC 2698 Two Rate Three Color Marker RFC 2865 Vendor specific Attributes for RADIUS Authentication RFC 2866 Vendor specific Attributes for RADIUS Accounting RFC 2869 Vendor specific Attributes for RADIUS Accounting RFC 3046 DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Relay Agent Information RFC 3164 Syslog RFC 3414 User based Security Model USM for version 3 of the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP v3 RFC 3376 Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP Version 3 RFC 3580 Tunneling Protocol Vendor specific Attributes for RADIUS Authentication IEEE 802 1D MAC Bridges IEEE 802 1d MAC level Priority IEEE 802 1p MAC level Priority IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1x Port Authentication IEEE 802 3 3u Fast Ethernet IEEE 802 3ab Gigabit Ethernet IEEE 802 3ad Link Aggregation IEEE 802 3x Flow control IEEE 802 3z 1000BASE X For optical fiber link 1000BASE SX LX ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 38 Product Speci
146. SN cc P 51 Lud cc cu udis S 51 zai mec MM ere 52 dT Chande YOU PESSWDII questi ud o DASS ERR HERR E LL PC URN AL ARR RI US 58 rc emo tdt i170 T 58 nO niii 100 e 59 AG ISSO MO PEON pisai ade 59 2 mu spurius ba Ace awsome Nase omen 59 4 7 Logging Out of tho Web Configurator 12 uiui cece ser dieti tnnt drca aiti diaz t didt 60 Lil cl MER NETS D UU T I IM 61 Chapter 5 mihal Setup dE eg T 63 A TIVEIVIOW e I 63 NEM uU IpRuT NP aie ani ean adi uaiaeminns 63 Sole oul ON bam 64 5 2 Configuring Switch Management IP Adress 1 rore trate terrre crt pertice 65 Chapter 6 v roca Status and Port TAG NM 67 BRA a aah tocar Ritter Side cick casa ah fered ellen a Koln I UNE ETT 67 6 2 POM Status SUMINA MM 67 GAT SUE POLDA auensitwcettibiorae ent vH LER TUAE PALAIS ED REX RAI RU RIAL 68 Chapter 7 rti lj 73 A EROSION errr ee eee te di ivi etant muti n ree errr erie teeter errr E 73 perl uL m 73 12 ES 3148 User s Guide Table of Contents E ccc UD X 75 FEM WNW ih n RET 77 T O MICH Setup GORGE sranani dtia ane obira bri aN E Sanin es ern aAa NE 77 CO 0 0 cS 79 E AI CTIA ES PRU ELE E eee 79 pM IECIT 82 Chapter 8 Q8
147. Status Port Detalls 1 oaeeuiec ee eel Piae HAEC E ERES CEA IR pU DI ER SEL ERERRERMTAAEERI UE URUR coUa RR ER PO I ets AUI RA 69 Tete 9 Basic Setting Oyster IF usssco peccet P ERREUR R 74 Table 10 Basic Setting gt General SOM uer aeeiuue aka auda gea kd bui bur ua Ed bead 4 eun RE Ra d eU Rei rd d Dun E LER ARUR E senna 76 Table 11 Basic Setting gt Switch Selipr iuc corper tale adest pete dd arri adde pat Ri date EE bL ORE PEE E R 78 Table 12 Basi Seni IF Seb e 80 Table 13 Basic Saling POIL SOUD adinatcideei anata eet rd AN RA POP doa he RR v SEES RE ERR DIA 82 Table 14 IEEE 802 10 VLAN Terminology aussesesccckessssaceteiesaacces sence cet Fa dae petet eade Ee enam ae EAR 86 Table 15 Advanced Application gt VLAN VLAN Status nennen 88 Table 16 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Detail 89 Table 17 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN ccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseseees 90 Table 18 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting sssssssssssseenee 91 Table 19 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Subnet Based VLAN Setup 93 Table 20 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Protocol Based VLAN Setup 96 Table 21 Advanced Application gt VLAN Port Based VLAN Setup eee 101 Table 22 Adv
148. Support E mail support zyxel fi Sales E mail sales zyxel fi Telephone 358 9 4780 8411 Fax 358 9 4780 8448 Web www zyxel fi Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Oy Malminkaari 10 00700 Helsinki Finland France E mail info zyxel fr Telephone 33 4 72 52 97 97 Fax 33 4 72 52 19 20 Web www zyxel fr Regular Mail ZyXEL France rue des Vergers Bat 1 C 69760 Limonest France Germany Support E mail support zyxel de Sales E mail sales zyxel de Telephone 49 2405 6909 69 Fax 49 2405 6909 99 Web www zyxel de Regular Mail ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH Adenauerstr 20 A2 D 52146 Wuerselen Germany Hungary Support E mail support g zyxel hu Sales E mail info zyxel hu Telephone 36 1 3361649 Fax 36 1 3259100 Web www zyxel hu Regular Mail ZyXEL Hungary 48 Zoldlomb Str H 1025 Budapest Hungary ES 3148 User s Guide Appendix G Customer Support India Support E mail support zyxel in Sales E mail sales zyxel in Telephone 91 11 30888144 to 91 11 30888153 Fax 91 11 30888149 91 11 26810715 Web http www zyxel in Regular Mail India ZyXEL Technology India Pvt Ltd II Floor F2 9 Okhla Phase 1 New Delhi 110020 India Support E mail support zyxel co jp Sales E mail zyp zyxel co jp Telephone 81 3 6847 3700 Fax 81 3 6847 3705 Web www zyxel co jp Regular Mail ZyXEL Japan 3F Office T amp U 1 10 10 Higashi Gotanda Shinagawa ku T
149. Switch Version Specify the version of the SNMP trap messages IP Enter the IP addresses of up to four managers to send your SNMP traps to Port Enter the port number upon which the manager listens for SNMP traps ES 3148 User s Guide 254 Chapter 30 Access Control Table 103 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Username Enter the username to be sent to the SNMP manager along with the SNMP v3 trap Note This username must match an existing account on the Switch configured in Management Access Control Logins screen User Information Use this section to configure users for authentication with managers using SNMP v3 Note Use the username and password of the login accounts you specify in this section to create accounts on the SNMP v3 manager Index This is a read only number identifying a login account on the Switch Username This field displays the username of a login account on the Switch Security Level Select whether you want to implement authentication and or encryption for SNMP communication from this user Choose noauth to use the username as the password string to send to the SNMP manager This is equivalent to the Get Set and Trap Community in SNMP v2c This is the lowest security level auth to implement an authentication algorithm for SNMP messages sent by this user priv to implement authentication an
150. TION Active Check this box to activate this subnet based VLANs on the Switch DHCP Vlan When DHCP snooping is enabled DHCP clients can renew their IP address through Override the DHCP VLAN or via another DHCP server on the subnet based VLAN Select this to force the DHCP clients in this IP subnet to obtain their IP addresses through the DHCP VLAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN Table 19 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Subnet Based VLAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Check this box to activate the IP subnet VLAN you are creating or editing Name Enter up to 32 alpha numeric characters to identify this subnet based VLAN IP Enter the IP address of the subnet for which you want to configure this subnet based VLAN Mask Bits Enter the bit number of the subnet mask To find the bit number convert the subnet mask to binary format and add all the 1 s together Take 255 255 255 0 for example 255 converts to eight 1s in binary There are three 255s so add three eights together and you get the bit number 24 Source Port Enter the port to which this subnet based VLAN is bound VID En
151. Weighted Fair Queuing 162 WRR Weighted Round Robin Scheduling 162 Z ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System 243 ES 3148 User s Guide Index ES 3148 User s Guide
152. a Permissions 5 Click Close to return to the Privacy screen 6 Click Apply to save this setting JavaScripts If pages of the web configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer check that JavaScripts are allowed 1 In Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Security tab Figure 201 Internet Options Security General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Select a Web content zone to specify its security settings e Z o e Internet Local intranet Trusted sites Restricted sites Internet A This zone contains all Web sites you Gites haven t placed in other zones m Security level for this zone Move the slider to set the security level for this zone E Medium Safe browsing and still functional a Prompts before downloading potentially unsafe content Unsigned Activex controls will not be downloaded Appropriate for most Internet sites C Custom Level D Default Level OK Cancel Apply Click the Custom Level button Scroll down to Scripting oar WO ND Click OK to close the window Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected the default Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected the default ES 3148 User s Guide Appendix B Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions Figure 202 Security Settings Java Scripting Security Settings Se
153. ace the IP TOS with the 802 1 priority value to replace the TOS field with the value you configure in the Priority field Select Set the Diffserv Codepoint field in the frame to set the DSCP field with the value you configure in the DSCP field ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 19 Policy Rule Table 49 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Outgoing Select Send the packet to the mirror port to send the packet to the mirror port Select Send the packet to the egress port to send the packet to the egress port Select Send the matching frames broadcast or DLF multicast marked for dropping or to be sent to the CPU to the egress port to send the broadcast multicast DLF marked to drop or CPU frames to the egress port Select Set the packet s VLAN ID to set the VLAN ID of the packet with the value you configure in the VLAN ID field Metering Select Enable to activate bandwidth limitation on the traffic flow s then set the actions to be taken on out of profile packets Out of profile action Select the action s to be performed for out of profile traffic Select Drop the packet to discard the out of profile traffic Select Change the DSCP value to replace the DSCP field with the value specified in the Out of profile DSCP field Select Set Out Drop Precedence to mark out of profile traffic and drop it when network is congested Select Do not drop the matching frame
154. act upon the traffic that matches the rules To configure policy rules refer to Chapter 19 on page 155 Click Advanced Application gt Classifier in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen as shown ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 18 Classifier Figure 72 Advanced Application gt Classifier Active Name Layer 2 Layer 3 Index amp Classifier Packet Format All Active Name Rule r m VLAN mary oC Priority oa any c os I e all Ethernet Type 6 dier Ee Hex Any Lo MAC Address c we 4 BI 4 BI 14 i Any Port C Destinatior MAC Address int 3 1 C MAC 1 G Any DSCP O i o all I Establish Only IP Protocol C others Dec IP Address 0000 Address Prefix Source G Any Socket Number C E IP Address ooo m Address Prefix 0040 Destination G Any Socket Number ocket Numbe o 1 Add Cancel Clear Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 44 Advanced Application gt Classifier LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable this rule Name Enter a descriptive name for this rule for identifying purposes Packet Format Specify the format of the packet Choices are All 802 3 tagged 802 3 untagged Ethernet Il tagged and Ethernet Il untagged A value of 802 3 indicates that the packets are formatted according to
155. ag based IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Number of VLAN 4K 1000 static VLANs Supports GVRP Protocol based VLAN support IP subnet based VLAN Port Aggregation Supports IEEE 802 3ad static and dynamic LACP port trunking Up to six groups and each group can aggregate up to eight ports Port mirroring All ports support port mirroring Bandwidth control Supports rate limiting at 64Kbps increment TRTCM Layer 3 IP Capability IPV4 support 64 Management IPs 4K IP address table Wire speed IP forwarding Routing protocols Static Routing IP services DHCP relay VLAN based DHCP relay DiffServ Security IEEE 802 1x port based authentication Static MAC Address Forward Multiple RADIUS Servers Multiple TACACS Servers IP Source Guard Static IP MAC binding DHCP snooping ARP inspection MAC authentication ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 38 Product Specifications Table 120 Feature Specifications continued FEATURE DESCRIPTION Management System Control Alarm Status surveillance LED indication for alarm and system status Performance monitoring Line speed Throughput monitoring CMP packet transmission Port mirroring and aggregation Spanning Tree Protocol Loopguard IGMP snooping Firmware upgrade and download through FTP TFTP Self diagnostics FLASH memory Daylight saving time support 802 3ah OAM Four RMON groups history statistics a
156. agged incoming frames on a port Ingress filtering If set the Switch discards incoming frames for VLANs that do not have this port as a member ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN 8 3 Port VLAN Trunking Enable VLAN Trunking on a port to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass through that port This is useful if you want to set up VLAN groups on end devices without having to configure the same VLAN groups on intermediary devices Refer to the following figure Suppose you want to create VLAN groups 1 and 2 V1 and V2 on devices A and B Without VLAN Trunking you must configure VLAN groups 1 and 2 on all intermediary switches C D and E otherwise they will drop frames with unknown VLAN group tags However with VLAN Trunking enabled on a port s in each intermediary switch you only need to create VLAN groups in the end devices A and B C D and E automatically allow frames with VLAN group tags 1 and 2 VLAN groups that are unknown to those switches to pass through their VLAN trunking port s Figure 30 Port VLAN Trunking N N po I V1 V2 N SS rere s 8 4 Select the VLAN Type Select a VLAN type in the Basic Setting gt Switch Setup screen Figure 31 Switch Setup Select VLAN Type L Switch Setup e VLAN Type nain C Port Based 8 5 Static VLAN Use a static VLAN to decide whether an incoming frame on a port should be sentto a VLAN group as normal d
157. anager and so left the member list etc Offline the switch is disconnected Offline shows approximately 1 5 minutes after the link between cluster member and manager goes down 33 2 1 Cluster Member Switch Management Go to the Clustering Management Status screen of the cluster manager switch and then select an Index hyperlink from the list of members to go to that cluster member switch s web configurator home page This cluster member web configurator home page and the home page that you d see if you accessed it directly are different Figure 157 Cluster Management Cluster Member Web Configurator Screen ZyXEL Status O Logout B Help Basic Setting GS 2024 S35 2024 Member Menu Advanced Application Routing Protocol Basic Setting Advanced Appli Routing Protocol Management J Management System Info VLAN Static Route Setup Diagnostic General Setup Static MAC p6 MAC Table Switch Setup i e ARP Table IP Setup Port Status Port Setup Maintenance Diagnostic Cluster Management ee MAC Table Port Authentication ARP Table Port Security Access Control ES 3148 User s Guide 271 Chapter 33 Cluster Management 33 2 1 1 Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch You can use FTP to upload firmware to a cluster member switch through the cluster manager switch as shown in the following example Figure 158 Example Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Membe
158. anced Application gt Static MAC Forwarding eeee e 104 Table 23 Advanced Application gt Flltering auerceedeaee ent eet Ente E bern edi unn du Rene ep rei ce 105 Table 24 SIP PAN GOSI aW M 108 Jable 25 STP Fon IOS i AREA 109 Table 26 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration 113 Table 27 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt RSTP eeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeees 114 Table 28 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status RSTP ccceeecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 116 Table 29 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MRSTP 1 eene 117 Table 30 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MRSTP suus 119 Table 31 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP 1 esee 121 Table 32 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MSTP ssssssssssss 123 Table 33 Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control neenon 126 Table 34 Advanced Application gt Broadcast Storm Control sese 128 Table 35 Advanced Application gt MINONNG i2iiiiuccccse cierta tbid tae hende ire annin E arcte tria 130 Table 36 Link Aggregation ID Local Swllel iuis rrenedt ce PH REERECEIRI HK T PRS REEF Lern han aada 132 Table 37 Link Aggregation ID Peer SwWiteh iuusceeise d
159. ange Pages Click Previous or Next to show the previous next screen if all status information cannot be seen in one screen 8 5 2 Static VLAN Details Use this screen to view detailed port settings and status of the VLAN group See Section 8 1 on page 85 for more information on static VLAN Click on an index number in the VLAN Status screen to display VLAN details Port Number 5 VD 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 sinn Status 1357 9 4 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 UUUU Uu Uu Uu Uu U U U U Uu Uu Uu Uu Uu Uu Uu Uu Uu Uu Uu Uu Uu Uu 1 152 14 57 Static UU UU U Uu Uu Uu Uu U U U Uu Uu Uu Uu Uu Uu Uu Uu Uu Uu Uu Uu Uu Uu VLAN Status ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 16 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Detail LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Status Click this to go to the VLAN Status screen VID This is the VLAN identification number that was configured in the Static VLAN screen Port Number This column displays the ports that are participating in a VLAN A tagged port is marked as T an untagged port is marked as U and ports not participating in a VLAN are marked as Elapsed Time This field shows how long it has been since a normal VLAN was registered or a static VLAN was set up Status This field shows how this VLAN was added to the Switch d
160. anvienee 265 ES 3148 User s Guide Table of Contents 58 AHO Ggerver SEE deia asse puddd n HER E RR MU TEE KR RA3S YMO 3U FR AG adag at 266 Chapter 33 CNICIF Manageme Lais ener emcee EROR FER n IER ERRARE LEA EEEERRI GIRL EE RA SMEI RUN CER ARAM per en er ui RR ERE RUE 269 33 1 Clustering Management Status Overview iussit enerte er nne pr Ye eux EE Haee EE e PEA ae eee pA ee aan ea 269 33 2 Cluster Management Status E 270 33 2 1 Cluster Member Switch Management een tn anna rk tn annua kn 271 33 9 Clustering Management Configuration 4 4 texts re xr ertet a te ERRIR Y Ee x ER ERN UE kx En bMS CU RR dE de ERES 272 Chapter 34 MAC TAU f 275 CLOSE Ie 1 S 275 4 2 Xgpag Me MAC TADE casana andi eaesaread nied doe eh ede beeen 276 Chapter 35 P QI rm Pm 277 29 1 ARP Table OVOISIBW sorrara aorssd a namadsnndanonsssiainaesigsaaatediiedneeus 277 TROV ARP WOE MR ARETE EENE ARS 277 35 2 VIEWING ihe ARP Table oisean i i a 277 Chapter 36 Configure CloMG sssri aaa aaa A EEA EEO ARAS iS 279 s AEri AD sor sce E TEA N E ANE TU 279 Part IV Troubleshooting and Specifications 281 Chapter 37 TrNDIES BOTE E d Axe aei E UE RURId a sip Ia Mae RP SEM GI A ERI ICA DX HUM REM MERE o RIEN AE DRM KE 283 37 1 Power Hardware Connections and LEDS 1 2 ii rrr nr FA X RER E ERE Y2RE Rega xx iadi 283 Sy SWIM ACGSSS and LOGIN e
161. arersiereveecssanmindeiineds 291 Figure 165 Windows 95 98 Me Network Configuration eese enne nnne nnne 296 Figure 166 Windows 95 98 Me TCP IP Properties IP Address ssseH 297 Figure 167 Windows 95 98 Me TCP IP Properties DNS Configuration sseeeeeeees 298 ES 3148 User s Guide List of Figures Figure ToS Windows XP SEIT MONU casei sscacsestsssanszsnstassnarenessianatensunsauasenes Kr RSS HC 8 ERE ada t 299 Figure 169 Windows XP Control Panel ssscccascnusstcanastts kt ota to aab ero ERE E nL ERR EA VERA ERR MEMBR RR RER EEG kinde seat 299 Figure 170 Windows XP Control Panel Network Connections Properties sssuuss 300 Figure 171 Windows XP Local Area Connection Properties 1 nde caer aa d EE a sed RR s 300 Figure 172 Windows XP Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties eene nnnnnnns 301 Figure 173 Windows XP Advanced TCP IP PEIODSKUBS 5 critici rre tinet abut re aeui c tuti einai 302 Figure 174 Windows XP Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties sse 303 Figure 179 Windows Vista DATE MBENL odes basi Ebo tcc eg Ee AAN 304 Figure 179 Windows Vista Control Panel 12 5 aes d reat haer DR XH ki ots ot pa E REED 304 Figure 177 Windows Vista Network And InCePWE 11e etes dba gana nep adea ncc 304 Figure 178 Windows Vista Network and Sharing DOtrer uiii tec ieacem tat Ide tae be cbr hee cbe tds EEida 304 Figure 178 Windo
162. as shown Figure 189 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Ethernet Device General i w Ethernet Device General Route Hardware Device Nickname ethO lt Activate device when computer starts Allow all users to enable and disable the device Automatically obtain IP address settings with dhcp DHCP Settings Hostname optional Automatically obtain DNS information from provider Statically set IP addresses Manual IP Address Settings Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Address 3 Cancel 312 ES 3148 User s Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address f you have a dynamic IP address click Automatically obtain IP address settings with and select dhep from the drop down list f you have a static IP address click Statically set IP Addresses and fill in the Address Subnet mask and Default Gateway Address fields Click OK to save the changes and close the Ethernet Device General screen 4 If you know your DNS server IP address es click the DNS tab in the Network Configuration screen Enter the DNS server information in the fields provided Co Figure 190 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Network Configuration DNS Y Network Configuration File Profile Help 689 New Edit Copy Delete Devices Hardware DNS Hosts c You may configure the system s hostname domain name servers and search d
163. as soon as you make them Source Port Select this option to set this port as the MVR source port that sends and receives multicast traffic All source ports must belong to a single multicast VLAN Receiver Port Select this option to set this port as a receiver port that only receives multicast traffic None Select this option to set the port not to participate in MVR No MVR multicast traffic is sent or received on this port Tagging Select this checkbox if you want the port to tag the VLAN ID in all outgoing frames transmitted Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh VLAN This field displays the multicast VLAN ID Active This field displays whether the multicast group is enabled or not Name This field displays the descriptive name for this setting Mode This field displays the MVR mode Source Port This field displays the source port number s Receiver Port This field displays the receiver port number s 802 1p This field displays the priority level Delete To delete a multicast VLAN s select the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column then click the Delete button Cancel Clic
164. assify traffic from any DSCP or select the second option and specify a DSCP DiffServ Code Point number between 0 and 63 in the field provided IP Select an IP protocol type or select Other and enter the protocol number in decimal value Protocol Refer to Table 48 on page 153 for more information You may select Establish Only for TCP protocol type This means that the Switch will pick out the packets that are sent to establish TCP connections Source IP Enter a source IP address in dotted decimal notation Address Specify the address prefix by entering the number of ones in the subnet mask nt A subnet mask can be represented by a 32 bit binary notation For example the subnet renx mask 255 255 255 0 can be represented as 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 and counting up the number of ones in this case results in 24 sad Note You must select either UDP or TCP in the IP Protocol field before you configure the socket numbers Select Any to apply the rule to all TCP UDP protocol port numbers or select the second option and enter a TCP UDP protocol port number Destination IP Enter a destination IP address in dotted decimal notation Address Specify the address prefix by entering the number of ones in the subnet mask Pres A subnet mask can be represented by a 32 bit binary notation For example the subnet Fee mask 255 255 255 0 can be represented as 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 and co
165. ata packet leaves for both ports Port based VLANs are specific only to the Switch on which they were created When you activate port based VLAN the Switch uses a default VLAN ID of 1 You cannot change it In screens such as IP Setup and Filtering that require a VID you must enter 1 as the VID The port based VLAN setup screen is shown next The CPU management port forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports 8 11 1 Configure a Port based VLAN Select Port Based as the VLAN Type in the Switch Setup screen and then click VLAN from the navigation panel to display the next screen ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN Figure 41 Advanced Application gt VLAN Port Based VLAN Setup All Connected Setting Wizard Port isolation x Apply Incoming 123 45 67 8 9 D lh D B M B 1 9 2 2 22 BM 25 2 2 23 9 X 3 3 3 4 35 3 3 3 3 4 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 59 51 32 LPR VP PRP ee ee PIMP Pe ee ee PPM Pe eee PPMP ee ee PPI r m IVR RP IMP Ve Pe III Ve PMI v v v v PI ee II lI vt VRRP RPM PVP Pe PPMP eV PM PIM v vri vtri lI v e NAN ANAM cdl Cdl cd SAAN ANCA cd cd cl AACR al CAAA CARA cl cl CAA CA Cc cl CA SVP RR Rw PPP PO PPMP eV PPM IM VP Ve PIM Pe ee IM ll s AMMAM Rr ee PPP ee ee PPP ee Pe ee PP AR lt FII v e e e PRIMM Pee Pe PPMP eee MPV ee PI e r e lll MMMMM r e vv PRIMM PP ee ee PMV eee PRIMI ee IMI vri s A a 24 za a a a a a a al RIES
166. ation across diverse interconnected networks C Show icon in notification area when connected 5 The Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window opens the General tab in Windows XP Ifyou have a dynamic IP address click Obtain an IP address automatically f you have a static IP address click Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address Subnet mask and Default gateway fields Click Advanced ES 3148 User s Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 172 Windows XP Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties General Alternate Configuration You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings btain an IP address automatically C Use the following IP address Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses 6 Ifyou do not know your gateway s IP address remove any previously installed gateways in the IP Settings tab and click OK Do one or more of the following if you want to configure additional IP addresses nthe IP Settings tab in IP addresses click Add In TCP IP Address type an IP address in IP address and a subnet mask in Subnet mask and then click Add Repeat the above two steps for each IP address you want to add Configure addit
167. atus in all web configurator screens to display the Status screen as shown next Figure 23 Status Port Name 1 in d deo In gt I ED Port Statu S ng Link State LACP 100M F FORWARDING Disabled Down STOP Disabled Down STOP Disabled Down STOP Disabled Down STOP Disabled Down STOP Disabled Down STOP Disabled Down S STOP Disabled TF NOI ON P OS un En OES ae Clear Counter SY TxPkts 475436 0 0 0 joooo RxPkts 141897 jooooooo Errors 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 _ 9 A 5 Ix KB s RxKB s UpTime 4 903 2992 152004 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 0 0 N e Pa 0 0 0 00 00 c The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 7 Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This identifies the Ethernet port Click a port number to display the Port Details screen refer to Figure 24 on page 69 Name This is the name you assigned to this port in the Basic Setting gt Port Setup screen Link This field displays the speed either 10M for 10Mbps 100M for 100Mbps or 1000M for 1000Mbps and the duplex F for full duplex or H for half It also shows the cable type Copper or Fiber for the combo ports ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics Table 7 Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION State If STP Spann
168. ays the port number d Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to activate RSTP on this port Priority Configure the priority for each port here Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in a switch Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first The allowed range is between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128 Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port It is recommended to assign this value according to the speed of the bridge The slower the media the higher the cost see Table 24 on page 108 for more information Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 11 5 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status Click Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the status screen as shown next See Section 11 1 o
169. ber bits the smaller the number of remaining host ID bits An IP address with host IDs ofall zeros is the IP address of the network 192 168 1 0 with a 24 bit subnet mask for example An IP address with host IDs of all ones is the broadcast address for that network 192 168 1 255 with a 24 bit subnet mask for example As these two IP addresses cannot be used for individual hosts calculate the maximum number of possible hosts in a network as follows Table 126 Maximum Host Numbers SUBNET MASK HOST ID SIZE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF HOSTS 8 bits 255 0 0 0 24 bits eee 16777214 16 bits 255 255 0 0 16 bits 216 5 65534 24 bits 255 255 255 0 8 bits 20102 254 29 bits 255 255 255 248 3 bits 29 24 6 Notation Since the mask 1s always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left followed by a continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask you can simply specify the number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet This is usually specified by writing a followed by the number of bits in the mask after the address For example 192 1 1 0 25 is equivalent to saying 192 1 1 0 with subnet mask 255 255 255 128 The following table shows some possible subnet masks using both notations Table 127 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation ALTERNATIVE LAST OCTET LAST OCTET SUBNET MASK NOTATION BINARY DECIMAL 255 255 255 0 24 0000 0000 0 255 2
170. c COMMUNE INEM opran 250 30 3 5 Cormguring SNMP Trap Group cicccsccessicsnch casscaeais sencdeae setate ep pp casseansnd den ca Epp danaa 252 20 35 Selimo Up Logn PENI uoenaseedekieei epac etx te hdi d taii ed t n Rn ELE Et 254 aD SOM EVOIIBW s s e Rica MM IEDPM CINE IM E peeled NEN Mix ME 255 ape Mox SSH WOES sao p be Dodson a e a paa aant ao ep Mua vig EE 255 30 6 SSH Implementation on the Switch iiu eere ere re Lern nh detta e nra bn rtm eta ud pa 256 30 5 1 Requirements Tor Using SSH iiio casses petpsace eut pvp idigi aa 256 20 7 POON to HTTP S do idevtte titt Le ptt Hay DI Ehe PIER ve ERR pE FEE IU LEE rH de LOIR ER RA 256 SUSEBMITPS ESSI into io di pErRU tr ye tere tr rte rene A 257 30 8 1 Internet Explorer Warning Messages 0 ccccssecnscsescenecceesssnneceeenssnneeseeseennesenuninenes 257 30 8 2 Netscape Navigator Warning Messages sse 258 aU The Man SURO ETT aaae Bv ta Ee UR nieces In ob ovME ER vis EXIp a SRM TENURE 258 ego Web Porn Access COMITOl usse tezxccatie e ER ren pHDRT ca ia Ua RR Ha RR edad a ada dean 259 Smile Wee 260 Chapter 31 RI NO ipee anaes aeachankiiduiawiagwiaeacadiassantaacnseaesieei a asewiaiactndegcanimicaere 263 CAMPI sicui er 203 Chapter 32 OUS nsicmnk vedi rU Da bo VO PEN ET EK TENTE sbueitavendiansalahelsai E MOVAAN E IN ARD ERA XI ARR T 265 ve Toys COSI arta bata rh nla nnd tia px Salads adden ipaam dA 265 32 2 Ec i SOUP siiin RN A eauvesenceu
171. c received from IP subnet 172 16 1 0 24 voice services You also have a subnet based VLAN with priority 5 and VID of 200 for traffic received from IP subnet 192 168 1 0 24 video services Lastly you configure VLAN with priority 3 and VID of 300 for traffic received from IP subnet 10 1 1 0 24 data services All untagged incoming frames will be classified based on their source IP subnet and prioritized accordingly That is video services receive the highest priority and data the lowest Figure 36 Subnet Based VLAN Application Example m 0 Internet iul Untagged Frames po S S3 10 1 1 0 24 VID 300 ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN 8 7 Configuring Subnet Based VLAN Click Subnet Based VLAN in the VLAN Port Setting screen to display the configuration screen as shown LES Subnet based VLAN applies to un tagged packets and is applicable only when you use IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN Figure 37 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Subnet Based VLAN EMIGI Vlan Port Setting Active DHCP Vian Override Apply Active go Name IP Mask Bits Source Port VID Priority Add Cancel index Active Name IP Mask Bits Source Port VID Priority Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 19 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Subnet Based VLAN Setup LABEL DESCRIP
172. ccccicssssiccevageseacneis beoe rti berti dete dde xoi tap Le 141 ES 3148 User s Guide Table of Contents 16 2 2 Activate MAC AuBIBREOSUDE sisirain ph pd Loa S o kd tesa odd 142 Chapter 17 Pon SECUN Y Mr n 145 TE DOO POIL OSCUEIS aussesamtebonte er er mer tte meester er eene E Du uoa bebe a ERR E ula e tv ERR vu AME RUE 145 17 2 Pon Secuniy SEW m 145 Chapter 18 B E a E A A A AE E E E A A E N 149 18 1 About the Classifier and QOS uses rir enin k Rada E a e EN A KNEE 149 IprdqescperniysBurie de 149 18 3 Viewing and Editing Classifier Configuration 5 ccce ntt np th ep et tete 152 p Caerccaradzch qe Ried aieeisaad NA 153 Chapter 19 pee god He Lr p a on rm 155 TE Foley TRUS OVC Ze 155 DR A a sais EO E MAE NE E A UE ba xx AERA CU COO aeui be pe MuR A TE 155 18 1 2 DSCP and Per Hop BENAMION sicduiciccassnccosiscscsecedrs bogies ssouraieds aas RI Tb EFE LEO EPI RE une 155 159 2 Comiguring Foll Bless m te boe prd toin odd bod oda o ado dts ad 156 19 3 Viewing and Editing Policy Configuration rk rrkc inet EFE NR EEPAPEEO eu HEU n EF SEE dee HE e REFERO 158 19 4 Policy Example m 159 Chapter 20 RPE o opo ec HP 161 20 1 Queuing Method OVSIVIGWW ssseotisse sten stade itane tura stri kd aaa sqb ie 161 PRESQUE A
173. ccceeceeeeeeeenceceeceeeeeeeeeseeseseecneneaeeeeeeeeees 92 Figure 37 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Subnet Based VLAN 93 Figure 38 Protocol Based VLAN Application Example 12 2 ccrte ctae trn Peto Ra drea ae eh qb ia Luo 95 ES 3148 User s Guide 21 List of Figures Figure 39 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Protocol Based VLAN 96 Figure 40 Protocol Based VLAN Configuration Example ccccccsssssceeeeseeeeceeeeeeseeceeneeeeeeseeeesnneaees 97 Figure 41 Advanced Application gt VLAN Port Based VLAN Setup All Connected 99 Figure 42 Advanced Application gt VLAN Port Based VLAN Setup Port Isolation 100 Figure 43 Advanced Application gt Static MAC Forwarding eem 103 Figure 44 Advanced Application gt Fiering sssiccccussevccss eet ttbrt tpa etat asses tons eonun tees ieis 105 Figure 45 MRS TP Network Example eso sssaeeeos integers hod terga Ra EE ER a EnA HA abundet n Eae LEER Redi odd 109 Figure 46 STP RSTF Newoik Exaile sisiencediateie Ri Eee bR EUN IbPEn dE nn PH EFEPEDI HERR EDI ME PERPE DIEM RM EUIS 110 Figure 4r MOTPE Mebork EXSmplb oos ine cng asian doc Dus Rad acc da a D Eo c do at RU ads 111 Figura 48 MSTIS in Different Regions aunoisccc petens Debo ce eei aded kaain E EPA CA UA TERI oped Kee pens 112 Figure 49 MSTP and Legacy RSTP Network Examp
174. ch 1 Configure DHCP snooping See Section 24 1 1 4 on page 201 LES It is recommended you enable DHCP snooping at least one day before you enable ARP inspection so that the Switch has enough time to build the binding table 2 Enable ARP inspection on each VLAN 3 Configure trusted and untrusted ports and specify the maximum number of ARP packets that each port can receive per second ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard 24 2 IP Source Guard Use this screen to look at the current bindings for DHCP snooping and ARP inspection Bindings are used by DHCP snooping and ARP inspection to distinguish between authorized and unauthorized packets in the network The Switch learns the bindings by snooping DHCP packets dynamic bindings and from information provided manually by administrators static bindings To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard Figure 100 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard P Source Guar e Static Binding DHCP Snooping ARP Inspection Index MAC Address IP Address Lease Type VID 1 a1 1212 121201 1722337 222 infinity static 1 18 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 71 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays a sequential number for each binding MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address in the binding IP Address This field disp
175. cify the type of service TOS priority level Metering You can configure the desired bandwidth available to a traffic flow Traffic that exceeds the maximum bandwidth allocated in cases where the network is congested is called out of profile traffic Bandwidth Specify the bandwidth in kilobit per second Kbps Enter a number between 1 and 1000000 Out of Specify a new DSCP number between 0 and 63 if you want to replace or remark the Profile DSCP number for out of profile traffic DSCP Action Specify the action s the Switch takes on the associated classified traffic flow Forwarding Select No change to forward the packets Select Discard the packet to drop the packets Select Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping to retain the frames that were marked to be dropped before Priority Select No change to keep the priority setting of the frames Select Set the packet s 802 1 priority to replace the packet s 802 1 priority field with the value you set in the Priority field Select Send the packet to priority queue to put the packets in the designated queue Select Replace the 802 1 priority field with the IP TOS value to replace the packet s 802 1 priority field with the value you set in the TOS field Diffserv Select No change to keep the TOS and or DSCP fields in the packets Select Set the packet s TOS field to set the TOS field with the value you configure in the TOS field Select Repl
176. ck Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping gt Configure gt Port ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard Figure 104 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping gt Configure gt Port DHCP Snooping Port Configure Configure Port Server Trusted state Rate pps Untrusted Gntusted il Untrusted Untusted Untrusted Untrusted Untrusted Untrusted Untusted Ip TQUE CONUM RUP CU Lan URP m a LU Neh me NE NE NE NP m P E NP NP N SH Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen TTE 0 4 0 QV 0 AD Table 75 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping gt Configure gt Port DHCP packets arrive is too high NACK match any of the current bindings LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays the port number If you configure the port the settings are applied to all of the ports Server Trusted state Select whether this port is a trusted port Trusted or an untrusted port Untrusted Trusted ports are connected to DHCP servers or other switches and the Switch discards DHCP packets from trusted ports only if the rate at which Untrusted ports are connected to subscribers and the Switch discards DHCP packets from untrusted ports in the following situations The packet is a DHCP server packet for example OFFER ACK or The source MAC address
177. ck mounting requirements and precautions and describes the installation steps 2 2 1 Rack mounted Installation Requirements Two mounting brackets Eight M3 flat head screws and a 2 Phillips screwdriver Four M5 flat head screws and a 2 Phillips screwdriver LES Failure to use the proper screws may damage the unit 2 2 1 1 Precautions Make sure the rack will safely support the combined weight of all the equipment it contains Make sure the position of the Switch does not make the rack unstable or top heavy Take all necessary precautions to anchor the rack securely before installing the unit 2 2 2 Attaching the Mounting Brackets to the Switch 1 Position a mounting bracket on one side of the Switch lining up the four screw holes on the bracket with the screw holes on the side of the Switch Figure 7 Attaching the Mounting Brackets ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection 2 Using a 2 Phillips screwdriver install the M3 flat head screws through the mounting bracket holes into the Switch 3 Repeat steps and 2 to install the second mounting bracket on the other side of the Switch 4 You may now mount the Switch on a rack Proceed to the next section 2 2 3 Mounting the Switch on a Rack 1 Position a mounting bracket that is already attached to the switch on one side of the rack lining up the two screw holes on the bracket with the screw holes on the
178. ck the Multicast Setting link and then the IGMP Snooping VLAN link to display the screen as shown See Section 22 1 4 on page 172 for more information on IGMP Snooping VLAN ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 22 Multicast Figure 83 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Snooping VLAN OMG VLAN Index Name Name VID Delete A Multicast Setting C auto C fixed Apply Cancel m Ada Cancel Clear Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 58 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Snooping VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Mode Select auto to have the Switch learn multicast group membership information of any VLANs automatically Select fixed to have the Switch only learn multicast group membership information of the VLAN s that you specify below In either auto or fixed mode the Switch can learn up to 16 VLANs including up to three VLANs you configured in the MVR screen For example if you have configured one multicast VLAN in the MVR screen you can only specify up to 15 VLANs in this screen The Switch drops any IGMP control messages which do not belong to these 16 VLANs Note You must also enable IGMP snooping in the Multicast Setting screen first Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or
179. configuration file you would not have to totally re configure the Switch You could simply restore your last configuration ES 3148 User s Guide PART Il Hardware Hardware Installation and Connection 39 Hardware Overview 43 Hardware Installation and Connection This chapter shows you how to install and connect the Switch 2 1 Freestanding Installation 1 Make sure the Switch is clean and dry 2 Setthe Switch on a smooth level surface strong enough to support the weight of the Switch and the connected cables Make sure there 1s a power outlet nearby 3 Make sure there is enough clearance around the Switch to allow air circulation and the attachment of cables and the power cord 4 Remove the adhesive backing from the rubber feet 5 Attach the rubber feet to each corner on the bottom of the Switch These rubber feet help protect the Switch from shock or vibration and ensure space between devices when stacking Figure 6 Attaching Rubber Feet EX IT SS Jii ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection LES Do NOT block the ventilation holes Leave space between devices when stacking For proper ventilation allow at least 4 inches 10 cm of clearance at the front and 3 4 inches 8 cm at the back of the Switch This is especially important for enclosed rack installations 2 2 Mounting the Switch on a Rack This section lists the ra
180. configurator You have to log in with your password again after you log out This is recommended after you finish a management session for security reasons Figure 19 Web Configurator Logout Screen Thank you for using the Web Configurator Please close the browser before next login Goodbye 60 ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 4 8 Help The web configurator s online help has descriptions of individual screens and some supplementary information Click the Help link from a web configurator screen to view an online help description of that screen ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator ES 3148 User s Guide Initial Setup Example This chapter shows how to set up the Switch for an example network 5 1 Overview The following lists the configuration steps for the initial setup e Create a VLAN Set port VLAN ID Configure the Switch IP management address 5 1 1 Creating a VLAN VLANs confine broadcast frames to the VLAN group in which the port s belongs You can do this with port based VLAN or tagged static VLAN with fixed port members In this example you want to configure port 1 as a member of VLAN 2 Figure 20 Initial Setup Network Example VLAN ONEVENEIUDINNEND WLAN Port Setting Static VLAN The Number of VLAN 1 Index VID 1 1 Status Static 1 Click Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN Pa VLAN Status VLAN Port
181. ction Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping Add Cancel Clear ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 19 Policy Rule ES 3148 User s Guide Queuing Method This chapter introduces the queuing methods supported 20 1 Queuing Method Overview Queuing is used to help solve performance degradation when there is network congestion Use the Queuing Method screen to configure queuing algorithms for outgoing traffic See also Priority Queue Assignment in Switch Setup and 802 1p Priority in Port Setup for related information Queuing algorithms allow switches to maintain separate queues for packets from each individual source or flow and prevent a source from monopolizing the bandwidth 20 1 1 Strictly Priority Strictly Priority SP services queues based on priority only As traffic comes into the Switch traffic on the highest priority queue Q7 is transmitted first When that queue empties traffic on the next highest priority queue Q6 is transmitted until Q6 empties and then traffic is transmitted on Q5 and so on If higher priority queues never empty then traffic on lower priority queues never gets sent SP does not automatically adapt to changing network requirements 20 1 2 Weighted Fair Queuing Weighted Fair Queuing is used to guarantee each queue s minimum bandwidth based on its bandwidth weight portion the number you configure in the Weight field see Figure 18 1 when ther
182. ctive PWR Green On The system is turned on Off The system is off SYS Green Blinking The system is rebooting and performing self diagnostic tests On The system is on and functioning properly Off The power is off or the system is not ready malfunctioning ALM Red On There is a hardware failure Off The system is functioning normally 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Port LNK ACT Green Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from a 10 Mbps Ethernet network On The link to a 10 Mbps Ethernet network is up Amber Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from a 100 Mbps Ethernet network On The link to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is up Off The link to an Ethernet network is down or not connected Dual Personality Interface LNK ACT Green Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from a 10 Mbps or a 1000 Mbps Ethernet network On The link to a 10 Mbps or a 1000 Mbps Ethernet network is up Amber Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from a 100 Mbps Ethernet network On The link to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is up Off The link to an Ethernet network is down or not connected ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview Table 3 LEDs continued LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION LNK Green On The port has a successful connection Off No Ethernet device is connected to this port ACT Green Blinking The port is receiving or trans
183. ctivity of the entire network and it is equivalent to a spanning tree in an STP RSTP The CIST is the default MST instance MSTID 0 Any VLANS that are not members of an MST instance are members of the CIST In an MSTP enabled network there is only one CIST that runs between MST regions and single spanning tree devices A network may contain multiple MST regions and other network segments running RSTP Figure 49 MSTP and Legacy RSTP Network Example Region 3 Region 2 Physical Connection RSTP on the Link 11 2 Spanning Tree Protocol Status Screen The Spanning Tree Protocol status screen changes depending on what standard you choose to implement on your network Click Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol to see the screen as shown 112 ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol Figure 50 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol Spanning Tree Protocol Status Configuration RSTP MRSTP MSTP Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Bridge Root Our Bridge Bridge ID 0000 000000000000 0000 d00000000000 Hello Time second 0 0 Max Age second 0 0 Forwarding Delay second 0 0 Cost to Bridge 0 Port ID 0x0000 Topology Changed Times 0 Time Since Last Change 0 00 00 This screen differs depending on which STP mode RSTP MRSTP or MSTP you configure on the Switch This screen is described in detail in the section that follows the configuration section for each STP mode Click Con
184. d encryption for SNMP messages sent by this user This is the highest security level Note The settings on the SNMP manager must be set at the same security level or higher than the security level settings on the Switch Authentication Select an authentication algorithm MD5 Message Digest 5 and SHA Secure Hash Algorithm are hash algorithms used to authenticate SNMP data SHA authentication is generally considered stronger than MD5 but is slower Privacy Specify the encryption method for SNMP communication from this user You can choose one of the following DES Data Encryption Standard is a widely used but breakable method of data encryption It applies a 56 bit key to each 64 bit block of data AES Advanced Encryption Standard is another method for data encryption that also uses a secret key AES applies a 128 bit key to 128 bit blocks of data Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 30 3 5 Configuring SNMP Trap Group From the SNMP screen click Trap Group to view the screen as shown Use the Trap Group screen to specify the types of SNMP traps that should be sent to each SNMP manager 252 ES 3148
185. d shown ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 7 Basic Setting Table 9 Basic Setting gt System Info continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Current This field displays this fan s current speed in Revolutions Per Minute RPM MAX This field displays this fan s maximum speed measured in Revolutions Per Minute RPM MIN This field displays this fan s minimum speed measured in Revolutions Per Minute RPM lt 41 is displayed for speeds too small to measure under 2000 RPM Threshold This field displays the minimum speed at which a normal fan should work Status Normal indicates that this fan is functioning above the minimum speed Error indicates that this fan is functioning below the minimum speed Voltage V The power supply for each voltage has a sensor that is capable of detecting and reporting if the voltage falls out of the tolerance range Current This is the current voltage reading MAX This field displays the maximum voltage measured at this point MIN This field displays the minimum voltage measured at this point Threshold This field displays the percentage tolerance of the voltage with which the Switch still works Status Normal indicates that the voltage is within an acceptable operating range at this point otherwise Error is displayed 7 3 General Setup Use this screen to configure general settings such as the system name and time Click Basic Setting and General Setup in t
186. dapters and switches Moreover the current LAN structure can be retained as all ports can freely communicate with each other In the following example two Switches use trunking to connect two networks Figure 3 High performance Switched Application t LI I I I I I I 1 i LI I ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 1 Introducing the Switch 1 1 4 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Application Examples This section shows a workgroup and a shared server example using 802 1Q tagged VLANs A VLAN Virtual Local Area Network allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Stations on a logical network belong to one group A station can belong to more than one group With VLAN a station cannot directly talk to or hear from stations that are not in the same group s unless such traffic first goes through a router For more information on VLANs refer to Chapter 8 on page 85 1 1 4 1 Tag based VLAN Example Ports in the same VLAN group share the same frame broadcast domain and thus increase network performance through reduced broadcast traffic VLAN groups can be modified at any time by adding moving or changing ports without any re cabling Figure 4 Tag based VLAN Application 1 1 4 2 VLAN Shared Server Example Shared resources such as a server can be used by all ports in the same VLAN as the server as shown in the following example In this example only ports that need access to the s
187. ding Port This field displays the port number in the binding If this field is blank the binding applies to all ports Delete Select this and click Delete to remove the specified entry Cancel Click this to clear the Delete check boxes above ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard 24 4 DHCP Snooping Use this screen to look at various statistics about the DHCP snooping database To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping Figure 102 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping DHCP Snooping d Database Status Description Agent URL Write delay timer Abort timer Agent running Delay timer expiry Abort timer expiry Last succeeded time Last failed time Last failed reason Total attempts Startup failures Successful transfers Failed transfers Successful reads Failed reads Successful writes Failed writes Database detail Description First successful access Last ignored bindings counters Binding collisions Invalid interfaces Parse failures Expired leases Unsupported vlans Last ignored time Total ignored bindings counters Binding collisions Invalid interfaces Parse failures Expired leases Unsupported vlans Status 300 300 None Not Running Not Running None None No failure recorded Times o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Status None o 0 0 0 0 Confiqure IPSG seconds seconds ES 3148 Us
188. e gt Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong model firmware may damage your device 29 8 2 FTP Command Line Procedure 1 Launch the FTP client on your computer 2 Enter open followed by a space and the IP address of your Switch 3 Press ENTER when prompted for a username 4 Enter your password as requested the default is 1234 ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 29 Maintenance 5 Enter bin to set transfer mode to binary 6 Use put to transfer files from the computer to the Switch for example put firmware bin ras transfers the firmware on your computer firmware bin to the Switch and renames it to ras Similarly put config cfg config transfers the configuration file on your computer config cfg to the Switch and renames it to config Likewise get config config cfg transfers the configuration file on the Switch to your computer and renames it to config cfg See Table 94 on page 243 for more information on filename conventions 7 Enter quit to exit the ftp prompt 29 8 3 GUI based FTP Clients The following table describes some of the commands that you may see in GUI based FTP clients Table 95 General Commands for GUI based FTP Clients COMMAND DESCRIPTION Host Address Enter the address of the host server Login Type Anonymous This is when a user I D and password is automatically supplied to the server for anonymous access Anonymous logins will w
189. e Chapter 4 The Web Configurator BS Use the Save link when you are done with a configuration session 4 5 Switch Lockout You could block yourself and all others from using in band management managing through the data ports if you do one of the following 1 Delete the management VLAN default is VLAN 1 2 Delete all port based VLANs with the CPU port as a member The CPU port is the management port of the Switch Filter all traffic to the CPU port Disable all ports Misconfigure the text configuration file Forget the password and or IP address Prevent all services from accessing the Switch ONO 0 W Change a service port number but forget it BS Be careful not to lock yourself and others out of the Switch If you do lock yourself out try using out of band management via the management port to configure the Switch 4 6 Resetting the Switch If you lock yourself and others from the Switch or forget the administrator password you will need to reload the factory default configuration file 4 6 1 Reload the Configuration File Uploading the factory default configuration file replaces the current configuration file with the factory default configuration file This means that you will lose all previous configurations and the speed of the console port will be reset to the default of 9600bps with 8 data bit no parity one stop bit and flow control set to none The password will also be reset to
190. e maximum number for DHCP packets that each port trusted or untrusted can receive each second ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard Trusted ports are connected to DHCP servers or other switches The Switch discards DHCP packets from trusted ports only if the rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high The Switch learns dynamic bindings from trusted ports The Switch will drop all DHCP requests if you enable DHCP snooping and there are no trusted ports Untrusted ports are connected to subscribers The Switch discards DHCP packets from untrusted ports in the following situations The packet is a DHCP server packet for example OFFER ACK or NACK The source MAC address and source IP address in the packet do not match any of the current bindings The packet is a RELEASE or DECLINE packet and the source MAC address and source port do not match any of the current bindings The rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high 24 1 1 2 DHCP Snooping Database The Switch stores the binding table in volatile memory If the Switch restarts it loads static bindings from permanent memory but loses the dynamic bindings in which case the devices in the network have to send DHCP requests again As a result it is recommended you configure the DHCP snooping database The DHCP snooping database maintains the dynamic bindings for DHCP snooping and ARP inspection in a file on an external TFTP server If you set up t
191. e Network window Configuration tab select your network adapter s TCP IP entry and click Properties 2 Click the IP Address tab If your IP address is dynamic select Obtain an IP address automatically Ifyou have a static IP address select Specify an IP address and type your information into the IP Address and Subnet Mask fields Figure 166 Windows 95 98 Me TCP IP Properties IP Address TCP IP Properties NE 7 x Bindings Advanced NeBIOS DNS Configuration Gateway WINS Configuration IP Address n IP address can be automatically assigned to this computer IF your network does not automatically assign IP addresses ask your network administrator for an address and then type it in the space below C Specify an IP address v Detect connection to network media Cancel 3 Click the DNS Configuration tab f you do not know your DNS information select Disable DNS f you know your DNS information select Enable DNS and type the information in the fields below you may not need to fill them all in ES 3148 User s Guide 297 Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 167 Windows 95 98 Me TCP IP Properties DNS Configuration Bindings Advanced Netpios DNS Configuration Gateway WINS Configuration IP Address 4 Click the Gateway tab Ifyou do not know your gateway s IP address remove previously installed gateways
192. e Switch does not turn on None of the LEDs turn on Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the Switch 2 Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the Switch and plugged in to an appropriate power source Make sure the power source is turned on Disconnect and re connect the power adaptor or cord to the Switch If the problem continues contact the vendor AO e The ALARM ALM LED is on 1 Disconnect and re connect the power adaptor to the Switch 2 Ifthe problem continues contact the vendor e One of the LEDs does not behave as expected Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED See Section 3 3 on page 47 Check the hardware connections See Chapter 2 on page 39 Inspect your cables for damage Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables Disconnect and re connect the power adaptor to the Switch If the problem continues contact the vendor ES 3148 User s Guide cO WN Chapter 37 Troubleshooting 37 2 Switch Access and Login e forgot the IP address for the Switch O N The default out of band management IP address is 192 168 0 1 The default in band management IP address is 192 168 1 1 Use the console port to log in to the Switch Use the management port to log in to the Switch Use the out of band management IP address If this does not work you have to reset the Switch to its factory defaults See Section 4 6
193. e is traffic congestion WFQ is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle Queues with larger weights get more guaranteed bandwidth than queues with smaller weights This queuing mechanism is highly efficient in that it divides any available bandwidth across the different traffic queues By default the weight for QO is 1 for Q1 is 2 for Q2 is 3 and so on Guaranteed bandwidth is calculated as follows Queue Weight x Port Speed Total Queue Weight For example using the default setting QO on Port 1 gets a guaranteed bandwidth of 1 x 100 Mbps 3 Mbps 14 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 20 Queuing Method 20 1 3 Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR Round Robin Scheduling services queues on a rotating basis and is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle A queue is a given an amount of bandwidth irrespective of the incoming traffic on that port This queue then moves to the back of the list The next queue is given an equal amount of bandwidth and then moves to the end of the list and so on depending on the number of queues being used This works in a looping fashion until a queue is empty Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR uses the same algorithm as round robin scheduling but services queues based on their priority and queue weight the number you configure in the queue Weight field rather than a fixed amount of bandwidth WRR is activated only when a port
194. e kept To continue click Next 4 Select where you would like to store the certificate and then click Next Figure 217 Certificate Import Wizard 2 Certificate Import Wizard Certificate Store Certificate stores are system areas where certificates are kept Windows can automatically select a certificate store or you can specify a location For C Place all certificates in the following store 5 Click Finish to complete the Import Certificate wizard ES 3148 User s Guide Appendix E Importing Certificates Figure 218 Certificate Import Wizard 3 Certificate Import Wizard x Completing the Certificate Import You have successfully completed the Certificate Import wizard You have specified the Following settings Certificate Store Selected Automatically determined by t Content Certificate cma 6 Click Yes to add the Switch certificate to the root store Figure 219 Root Certificate Store Root Certificate Store A Do you want to ADD the following certificate to the Root Store Subject ZyWALL 70 0040C5598526 Issuer Self Issued Time Validity Friday December 31 1999 through Monday December 24 2029 Serial Number 386D4386 Thumbprint sha1 4BD15E93 45778C9F DA3F9ADS ACDSC1BC 574308CE Thumbprint md5 D3458DB5 CC3748BE ABBOCF81 A79472D2 ES 3148 User s Guide Appendix E Importing Certificates Figure 220 Certificate General I
195. e multicast group in dotted decimal notation Enter the same IP address as the Start Address field if you want to configure only one IP address for a multicast group Refer to Section 22 1 1 on page 171 for more information on IP multicast addresses Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MVLAN This field displays the multicast VLAN ID Name This field displays the descriptive name for this setting Start Address This field displays the starting IP address of the multicast group End Address This field displays the ending IP address of the multicast group Delete Select Delete Group and click Delete to remove the selected entry ies from the table Cancel Select Cancel to clear the checkbox es in the table 22 8 1 MVR Configuration Example The following figure shows a network example where ports 1 2 and 3 on the Switch belong to VLAN 1 In addition port 7 belongs to the multicast group with VID 200 to receive multicast traffic the News and Movie channels from the remote streaming media server S Computers A B and C in VLAN 1 are able to receive the traffic ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 22 Multicast Figure 89 MVR Configuration Example
196. e on this port The Switch forwards packets whose MAC address es is in the MAC address table on this port Packets with no matching MAC address es are dropped Clear this check box to disable the port security feature The Switch forwards all packets on this port Address Learning MAC address learning reduces outgoing broadcast traffic For MAC address learning to occur on a port the port itself must be active with address learning enabled Limited Number of Learned MAC Address Use this field to limit the number of dynamic MAC addresses that may be learned on a port For example if you set this field to 5 on port 2 then only the devices with these five learned MAC addresses may access port 2 at any one time A sixth device would have to wait until one of the five learned MAC addresses aged out MAC address aging out time can be set in the Switch Setup screen The valid range is from 0 to 16384 0 means this feature is disabled ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 17 Port Security Table 43 Advanced Application gt Port Security continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afres
197. e part of a much larger organization you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses Regardless of your particular situation do not create an arbitrary IP address always follow the guidelines above For more information on address assignment please refer to RFC 1597 Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466 Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space 332 ES 3148 User s Guide Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting IP Address Conflicts Each device on a network must have a unique IP address Devices with duplicate IP addresses on the same network will not be able to access the Internet or other resources The devices may also be unreachable through the network Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example More than one device can not use the same IP address In the following example computer A has a static or fixed IP address that is the same as the IP address that a DHCP server assigns to computer B which is a DHCP client Neither can access the Internet This problem can be solved by assigning a different static IP address to computer A or setting computer A to obtain an IP address automatically Figure 210 Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example H 1 N V IMS d D 1681 33 ASE Internet p p Ba 5 192 168 1 33 mm mm mmmmmm Conflicting Router IP Addresses Example Since a router connects different networks it must have interfaces using differen
198. e pre defined VLAN s WES You must configure the VLAN first ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 7 Basic Setting Figure 28 Basic Setting gt IP Setup WP Setup Domain Name Server 0 0 0 0 Default Management in band Outofband In band Management IP C DHCP Client Address Static IP Address IP Address 192 168 1 1 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 VID 1 Out of band Management IP IP Address 192 158 0 1 Address IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Apply Cancel In band IP Addresses IP Address 0 0 0 0 IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 VID Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Manageable Ci Add Cancel Index IP Address IP Subnet Mask VID Default Gateway Manageable Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 12 Basic Setting gt IP Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Domain DNS Domain Name System is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP Name Server address and vice versa Enter a domain name server IP address in order to be able to use a domain name instead of an IP address Default Specify which traffic flow In Band or Out of band the Switch is to send packets Management originating from itself such as SNMP traps or packets with unknown source Select Out of band to have the Switch send the packets to the out of band management port This means that device s connected to the other port s do not
199. e some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Broadcast pkt s Select this option and specify how many broadcast packets the port receives per second Multicast pkt s Select this option and specify how many multicast packets the port receives per second DLF pkt s Select this option and specify how many destination lookup failure DLF packets the port receives per second Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES 3148 User s Guide Mirroring This chapter discusses port mirroring setup screens 14 1 Port Mirroring Setup Port mirroring allows you to copy a traffic flow to a monitor port the port you copy the traffic to in order that you can examine the traffic from the monitor port without interference Click Advanced Application gt Mirroring in the navigation panel to display the Mirroring screen Use this screen to select a monitor port and specify the traffic flow to be copied to the monitor port Figure 60 Advanced Application gt
200. e to incorrect user name and or password RADIUSNotReachableEvent 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 17 32 2 This trap is sent when there is no On 1 response message from the RADIUS server RADIUSNotReachableEvent 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 17 32 2 This trap is sent when the RADIUS Clear 2 server can be reached accounting RADIUSNotReachableEvent 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 17 32 2 This trap is sent when there is no On 1 response message from the RADIUS accounting server RADIUSNotReachableEvent 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 17 32 2 This trap is sent when the RADIUS Clear 2 accounting server can be reached Table 101 SNMP IP Traps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION ping pingProbeFailed 1 3 6 1 2 1 80 0 1 This trap is sent when a single ping probe fails pingTestFailed 1 3 6 1 2 1 80 0 2 This trap is sent when a ping test consisting of a series of ping probes fails pingTestCompleted 1 3 6 1 2 1 80 0 3 This trap is sent when a ping test is completed traceroute traceRoutePathChange 1 3 6 1 2 1 81 0 1 This trap is sent when a path to a target changes traceRouteTestFailed 1 3 6 1 2 1 81 0 2 This trap is sent when a traceroute test fails traceRouteTestCompleted 1 3 6 1 2 1 81 0 3 This trap is sent when a traceroute test is completed ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 30 Access Control Table 102 SNMP Switch Traps
201. ection 4 6 on page 59 ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 37 Troubleshooting 7 Ifthe problem continues contact the vendor e can see the Login screen but cannot log in to the Switch 1 Make sure you have entered the user name and password correctly The default user name is admin and the default password is 1234 These fields are case sensitive so make sure Caps Lock is not on 2 You cannot log in to the web configurator while someone is using the Telnet or the console port to access the Switch Log out of the Switch in the other session or ask the person who is logged in to log out Disconnect and re connect the power adaptor or cord to the Switch Ifthis does not work you have to reset the Switch to its factory defaults See Section 4 6 on page 59 AO e cannot Telnet to the Switch See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator Ignore the suggestions about your browser In addition consider the following suggestions before you reset the Switch to its factory defaults 1 You may have exceeded the maximum number of concurrent Telnet sessions Close other Telnet sessions or try connecting again later 2 Try to access the Switch using another service such as HTTP If you can access the Switch check the remote management and secure client settings to find out why the Switch does not respond to Telnet e cannot use FTP to upload down
202. ed by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT APPAREIL A LASER DE CLASS 1 PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040 10 AND 1040 11 PRODUIT CONFORME SELON 21 CFR 1040 10 ET 1040 11 Viewing Certifications 1 Go to http www zyxel com 2 Select your product on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product s page 3 Select the certification you wish to view from this page ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user purchaser that this product is free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase During the warranty period and upon proof of purchase should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and or materials ZyXEL will at its discretion repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating ES 3148 User s Guide Appendix F Legal Information condition Any replacement will consist of a new or re manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL This warranty shall not apply if the product has be
203. ed entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 19 Policy Rule 19 4 Policy Example The figure below shows an example Policy screen where you configure a policy to limit bandwidth and discard out of profile traffic on a traffic flow classified using the Example classifier refer to Section 18 4 on page 153 Figure 77 Policy Example OLOTE 2 Te st Example Name Jlassifier s Metering VLAN ID Bandwidth 1000 Kbps Egress Port fi Outof Profile 3 DSCP Parameters Outgoing packet format for Egress port Priority DA DSCP TOS pa Forwarding No change C Discard the packet C Do not drop the matching frame previously mar Priority perTowdropping No change C Setthe packet s 802 1 priority C Send the packetto priority queue C Replace the 802 1 priority fielf wi Diffserv No change C Setthe packet s TOS field C Replace the IP TOS field with the 802 1 priority value C Setthe Diffserv Codepoint field in the frame Outgoing Action Send the packetto the mirror port Send the packetto the egress port Sendthe matching frames broadcast or DLF multicast marked for dropping orto be sentto the CPU to the egress port Setthe packet s VLAN ID Metering Enable M Drop the packet Change the DSCP value Set Out Drop Precedence Out of profile a
204. ee Section 7 7 on page 82 or via commands see the CLI Reference Guide 25 2 Loop Guard Setup Click Advanced Application gt Loop Guard in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown BS The loop guard feature can not be enabled on the ports that have Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP MRSTP or MSTP enabled Figure 116 Advanced Application gt Loop Guard Port Active Ae Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 83 Advanced Application gt Loop Guard LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable loop guard on the Switch The Switch generates syslog internal log messages as well as SNMP traps when it shuts down a port via the loop guard feature Port This field displays a port number Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them ES 3148 User s Guide 221 Chapter 25 Loop Guard Table 83 Advanced Application gt Loop Guard continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable the loop guard feature on this port The Switch sends probe packets from this port to check if the Switch it is connected to is in loop state If the Switch that this port is connected is in loop state the Switch will shut down this port Clear this check box to disable the
205. eee as 2 Inthe Control Panel double click Network and Internet Figure 176 Windows Vista Control Panel g Control Panel File Edit View Tools Help Control Panel Home j System and Maintenance User Accounts Classic View a B Get started with Windows Change account type Ae Back up your computer Appearance and Check for updates Personalization Allow a program through Windows Change desktop background Firewall Change the color scheme Security Adjust screen resolution etwork and Internet onnect to the Internet Clock Language and Region View network status and tasks 4 li Change keyboards or other input methods Set up file sharing Change display language 3 Click Network and Sharing Center Figure 177 Windows Vista Network And Internet CION GP p Control Panel p Network and Internet v 5 Search p File Edit View Tools Help Control Panel Home x neta M Network and Sharing Center Yie csta nd Connect to a network View network computers and devices Add a device to the network Set up file sharing System and Maintenance Security Network and Internet US RENURTISENT Internet Options Connect to the Internet Change your homepage Manage browser add ons Programs Delete browsing history and cookies Hardware and Sound 4 Click Manage network connections Figure 178 Windows Vista Network and Sharing Center O AS
206. eeeeceeeeeeseeneeeeeseaneeeeeenanes 259 Figure 150 Management gt Access Control gt Service Access Control esses 259 Figure 151 Management gt Access Control gt Remote Management sees 260 Figure 152 Management gt DEDPYOSU 55 5 m xte a p rackXio aad Aa Rd Ri haad A 263 Figure 159 Nandgemien Syslog arei EDHDRI I LUN Rr cbe eroi rtrt o ordei err PRIN E Nu ERA NR PR IDHAN BRUN 266 Figure 154 Management gt Syslog gt Server Setup 1 issiaesssismasan netta dn na etta ruta ctae dana cba d 2a buda 267 Figure 155 Clustering Application Example seisein ees dire ek anaana Lenta an dk en eR be oaa bua Le Pa a ERR Ea AA 270 Figure 155 Management gt Cluster Management 25 renaerer ertet erre eae ePpre gene pared ro kFE pe d ae rreran anis 270 Figure 157 Cluster Management Cluster Member Web Configurator Screen sssusss 271 Figure 158 Example Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch sese 272 Figure 159 Management gt Clustering Management gt Configuration ssseee 273 Figure TOMAC Falher lt sicis cans oedarmo di en dax et aoa en abo GR d ob da eas Fd gu RR a ae 275 Figure 161 Management 4 loc N 276 Figure 162 Management gt ARP Table 278 Figure 163 Management gt Configure Clone sees tend kit ka t ah kh ik a a scammed baie 279 Figure 164 Console Dial Backup Port Pin Layout scseesetcecersateinccssinnicdocetonniecaeinied
207. eesssssssesesreerssnenssrersneernnnnesteerneerssnnssaeennneae 162 Figure 79 VLAN Slacking BXempla sacs syd cers d o ode ose cda doas dance aane dos ee 166 Figure 80 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking sssssseee eene eene 168 Figure 81 Advanced Application gt BIUIISBE cciccrscsicercdecsevvernesecanscactsniauaeaecdanauaccauees aaan innon aane 172 22 ES 3148 User s Guide List of Figures Figure 82 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting 173 Figure 83 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Snooping VLAN 175 Figure 84 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile 176 Figure 25 MYR Nabvork BXeliplg asiieazeduede ipee aga be co aee tater dox Sor omnes 177 Figure oo MVR Multicast Television Example uisoesiserkepvex cetxbobedekek eel d Y ARRER PO a AEE lelenuacanneuaarties 178 Figure 87 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR eene 179 Figure 88 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR Group Configuration 181 Figure 99 MYR Comiquratign Example sinaaiinsismcinnxmemasnaneainanunrniaiarinenatmenieramnunen 182 Figure 90 MYR Coniguraton EXIIDIS aicoxexbieectenirdadion ined ete do ci dade Mode ete de Gn M od ERR 182 Figure 91 MVR Group Configuration Example seeeeeeseseeeeeseeeees neret nnan nani
208. efault outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation Gateway Manageable Select this option to allow the Switch to be managed using this specified IP address Add Click Add to save the new rule to the Switch s run time memory It then displays in the summary table at the bottom of the screen Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields Index This field displays the index number of an entry Click an index number to edit the rule IP Address This field displays the IP address IP Subnet This field displays the subnet mask Mask VID This field displays the VLAN identification number of the network Default This field displays the IP address of the default outgoing gateway Gateway ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 7 Basic Setting Table 12 Basic Setting gt IP Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Manageable This field displays whether the Switch can be managed using the specified IP address Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 7 7 Port Setup Use this screen to configure Switch port settings Click Basic Setting gt Port Setup in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen Figure 29 Basic Setting gt Port Setup OLDE Port Active Name Type Speed Duplex Flow Control 802 1p Priority BPDU Control go Auto v go ov Peer v 1 v 10 100M Auto v
209. el to begin configuring this screen afresh 8 8 Protocol Based VLANs Protocol based VLANs allow you to group traffic into logical VLANs based on the protocol you specify When an upstream frame is received on a port configured for a protocol based VLAN the Switch checks if a tag is added already and its protocol The untagged packets of the same protocol are then placed in the same protocol based VLAN One advantage of using protocol based VLANs is that priority can be assigned to traffic of the same protocol Protocol based VLAN applies to un tagged packets and is applicable only when you use IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN For example port 1 2 3 and 4 belong to static VLAN 100 and port 4 5 6 7 belong to static VLAN 120 You configure a protocol based VLAN A with priority 3 for ARP traffic received on port 1 2 and 3 You also have a protocol based VLAN B with priority 2 for Apple Talk traffic received on port 6 and 7 All upstream ARP traffic from port 1 2 and 3 will be grouped together and all upstream Apple Talk traffic from port 6 and 7 will be in another group and have higher priority than ARP traffic when they go through the uplink port to a backbone switch C Figure 38 Protocol Based VLAN Application Example 8 9 Configuring Protocol Based VLAN BS Click Protocol Based VLAN in the VLAN Port Setting screen to display the configuration screen as shown Protoco
210. ementation 256 public keys private keys 256 HTTPS example 257 IANA 332 IEEE 802 1p priority 79 IEEE 802 1x 139 activate 141 142 188 190 reauthentication 142 IGMP version 171 IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol 171 IGMP filtering 171 profile 176 profiles 173 IGMP snooping 171 MVR 177 ingress port 101 installation freestanding 39 mounting brackets 40 precautions 40 rack mounting 40 rubber feet 39 Internet Assigned Numbers Authority See IANA 332 IP capability 288 interface 79 services 288 setup 79 IP source guard 199 ARP inspection 199 201 DHCP snooping 199 static bindings 199 L LACP 131 system priority 135 timeout 136 layer 2 features 288 layer 3 features 288 LEDs 47 lights 47 limit MAC address learning 146 link aggregation 131 dynamic 131 ID information 132 setup 133 134 status 132 Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP 131 lockout 59 log 263 login 51 password 58 login accounts 253 Administrator 253 configuring via web configurator 253 multiple 253 non administrator 254 number of 253 login password 254 loop guard 219 how it works 220 port shut down 221 probe packet 220 loop guard vs STP 219 ES 3148 User s Guide 357 Index MAC Media Access Control 74 MAC address 74 277 maximum number per port 146 MAC address learning 78 93 95 103 146 specify limit 146 MAC authentication 140 aging time 143 MAC filter and ARP inspection 202 MAC table 275 how it works 2
211. en Table 56 Multicast Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This is the index number of the entry VID This field displays the multicast VLAN ID Port This field displays the port number that belongs to the multicast group Multicast Group This field displays IP multicast group addresses 22 3 Multicast Setting Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting link to display the screen as shown See Section 22 1 on page 171 for more information on multicasting ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 22 Multicast Figure 82 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting JNAMUGDEEGETNGUTNENN Multicast Status IGMP Snooping VLAN IGMP Filtering Profile MVR Active O Host Timeout 260 IGMP Snooping Leave Timeout ed 802 1p Priority No Change x IGMP Filtering Active O Unknown Multicast Frame Flooding C Drop Reserved Multicast Group e Flooding C Drop Port immed Leave Group Limited Max Group Num IGMP Filtering Profile IGMP Querier Mode i b nd Default Auto 1 r r fo Deteut Auto 2 z D Defaut z Auto 3 D r b Defauit Auto 4 r b Detaut Auto 5 r m fo Defaut Auto 6 r P Detaut Auto 7 z Oo fo Defaut Auto 8 m r b Detaut Auto Rin lias agli die ui hig ie th gle a Sw Ss Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 57 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt
212. en as shown Figure 122 IP Application gt DiffServ D Diffserv J 2 rate 3 Color Marker DSCP Setting Active Port Active r7 1 r1 2 O 3 7 4 rj 5 O 6 a 7 C 8 O Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 85 IP Application gt DiffServ LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable DiffServ on the Switch Port This field displays the index number of a port on the Switch Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select Active to enable DiffServ on the port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 27 3 1 Configuring 2 Rate 3 Color Marker Settings Use this screen to configure TRTCM settings Click the 2 rate 3 Color Marker link in the DiffServ screen to display the screen as shown next ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 27 Differentiated Services
213. en modified misused tampered with damaged by an act of God or subjected to abnormal working conditions Note Repair or replacement as provided under this warranty is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties express or implied including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser To obtain the services of this warranty contact ZyXEL s Service Center for your Return Material Authorization number RMA Products must be returned Postage Prepaid It is recommended that the unit be insured when shipped Any returned products without proof of purchase or those with an out dated warranty will be repaired or replaced at the discretion of ZyXEL and the customer will be billed for parts and labor All repaired or replaced products will be shipped by ZyXEL to the corresponding return address Postage Paid This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights that vary from country to country Registration Register your product online to receive e mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www zyxel com for global products or at www us zyxel com for North American products ES 3148 User s Guide 347 Appendix F Legal Information ES 3148 User s Guide Customer Support Please have the following inf
214. epending on its VLAN tag sent to a group whether it has a VLAN tag or not blocked from a VLAN group regardless of its VLAN tag You can also tag all outgoing frames that were previously untagged from a port with the specified VID ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN 8 5 1 Static VLAN Status See Section 8 1 on page 85 for more information on Static VLAN Click Advanced Application gt VLAN from the navigation panel to display the VLAN Status screen as shown next Figure 32 Advanced Application gt VLAN VLAN Status Index 1 Change Pages D VLAN Status g VLAN Port Setting Static VLAN The Number of VLAN 1 Previous Next VID Elapsed Time Status 1 3 49 44 Static The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 15 Advanced Application gt VLAN VLAN Status LABEL DESCRIPTION The Number of VLAN This is the number of VLANs configured on the Switch Index This is the VLAN index number Click on an index number to view more VLAN details VID This is the VLAN identification number that was configured in the Static VLAN screen Elapsed Time This field shows how long it has been since a normal VLAN was registered or a static VLAN was set up Status This field shows how this VLAN was added to the Switch dynamic using GVRP static added as a permanent entry or other added in another way such as via Multicast VLAN Registration MVR Ch
215. er s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 73 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping LABEL DESCRIPTION Database Status This section displays the current settings for the DHCP snooping database You can configure them in the DHCP Snooping Configure screen See Section 24 5 on page 208 Agent URL This field displays the location of the DHCP snooping database Write delay timer This field displays how long in seconds the Switch tries to complete a specific update in the DHCP snooping database before it gives up Abort timer This field displays how long in seconds the Switch waits to update the DHCP snooping database after the current bindings change This section displays information about the current update and the next update of the DHCP snooping database Agent running This field displays the status of the current update or access of the DHCP snooping database none The Switch is not accessing the DHCP snooping database read The Switch is loading dynamic bindings from the DHCP snooping database write The Switch is updating the DHCP snooping database Delay timer expiry This field displays how much longer in seconds the Switch tries to complete the current update before it gives up It displays Not Running if the Switch is not updating the DHCP snooping database right now Abort ti
216. er 7 on page 73 You can specify the DHCP VLAN in the DHCP Snooping Configure screen See Section 24 5 on page 208 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values ES 3148 User s Guide 211 Chapter 24 IP Source Guard 24 6 ARP Inspection Status Use this screen to look at the current list of MAC address filters that were created because the Switch identified an unauthorized ARP packet When the Switch identifies an unauthorized ARP packet it automatically creates a MAC address filter to block traffic from the source MAC address and source VLAN ID of the unauthorized ARP packet To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection Figure 106 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection OFSTED VLAN Status Log Status Configure IPSG Total number of filters 0 Index MAC Address VID Port Expiry sec Reason Delete o The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 77 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection LABEL DESCRIPTION Total number of filters This field displays the current numbe
217. er for this bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds at which the root switch transmits a second configuration message Max Age second This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 32 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Forwarding Delay second This is the time in seconds the root switch will wait before changing states that is listening to learning to forwarding Cost to Bridge This is the path cost from the root port on this Switch to the root switch Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree Configuration Name This field displays the configuration name for this MST region Revision Number This field displays the revision number for this MST region Configuration A configuration digest is generated from the VLAN MSTI mapping information Digest This field displays the 16 octet signature that is included in an MSTP BPDU This field displays the digest when MSTP is activated on the system Topology This is the number
218. ermanently trust the Switch s server certificate by importing it into your operating system as a trusted certification authority Select Accept This Certificate Permanently in the following screen to do this Figure 213 Security Certificate Possible reasons For this error Your browser does not recognize the Certificate Authority that issued the site s certificate The site s certificate is incomplete due to a server misconfiguration You are connected to a site pretending to be ZyWALL 70 Factory Default Certificate possibly to obtain your confidential information Please notify the site s webmaster about this problem Before accepting this certificate you should examine this site s certificate carefully Are you willing to to accept this certificate for the purpose of identifying the Web ste ZyWALL 70 Factory Default Certificate Examine Certificate Accept this certificate permanently Accept this certificate temporarily For this session Do not accept this certificate and do not connect to this Web site Cox cence re Importing the Switch s Certificate into Internet Explorer For Internet Explorer to trust a self signed certificate from the Switch simply import the self signed certificate into your operating system as a trusted certification authority To have Internet Explorer trust a Switch certificate issued by a certificate authority import the certificate authority s certificate into your
219. ertificate 2 Netscape x You have attempted to establish a connection with 192 168 1 J However the security c9 administrator View Certificate 30 8 3 The Main Screen Your browser does not recognize the Certificate Authority that issued the site s certificate amp 00a0c5012345 possibly to obtain e m xl After you accept the certificate and enter the login username and password the Switch main screen appears The lock displayed in the bottom right of the browser status bar denotes a secure connection ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 30 Access Control Figure 149 Example Lock Denoting a Secure Connection Bie Edit View Favorites Tools Help e Qiao o9med s5 SAK Address https 172 23 37 240 E Save Status O Logout B Help Bas tting ED Por Statu S g Advanced Application Port Name Link State LACP TxPkts RxPkts Errors TxKBis RxKB s Up Time i 1 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 IP Application z QUEN 2 100M F FORWARDING Disabled 4729 3701 0 0 64 00 01921 Management 3 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 00 4 100M F FORWARDING Disablgf 3p4 4101 0 0 0 0 64 0 19 21 5 Down 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 B Down 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 1 Down 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 8 Down 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 8 Down 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 10 Down 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 u Down 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 12 Down Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 13 Down STOP Disab
220. erver need belong to VLAN 1 Ports can belong to other VLAN groups too ES 3148 User s Guide 35 Chapter 1 Introducing the Switch Figure 5 Shared Server Using VLAN Example 1 2 Ways to Manage the Switch Use any of the following methods to manage the Switch Web Configurator This is recommended for everyday management of the Switch using a supported web browser See Chapter 4 on page 51 Command Line Interface Line commands offer an alternative to the Web Configurator and may be necessary to configure advanced features See the CLI Reference Guide FTP Use File Transfer Protocol for firmware upgrades and configuration backup restore See Section 29 8 on page 243 SNMP The device can be monitored and or managed by an SNMP manager See Section 30 3 on page 246 1 3 Good Habits for Managing the Switch Do the following things regularly to make the Switch more secure and to manage the Switch more effectively Change the password Use a password that s not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters such as numbers and letters Wrte down the password and put it in a safe place Back up the configuration and make sure you know how to restore it Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes If you forget your password you will have to reset the Switch to its factory default settings If you backed up an earlier
221. es the root bridge which in turn determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 27 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt RSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units configuration message generations by the root switch The allowed range is 1 to 10 seconds Max Age This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure All switch ports except for designated ports should receive BPDUs at regular intervals Any port that ages out STP information provided in the last BPDU becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the switch ports attached to the network The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time in seconds a switch will wait before changing states This delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state otherwise temporary data loops might result The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds As a general rule Note 2 Forward Delay 1 gt Max Age gt 2 Hello Time 1 Port This field displ
222. esea kr toee ERR EEPINREEE RH PU Er EA RR 132 Table 38 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation Status 132 ES 3148 User s Guide List of Tables Table 39 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting 134 Table 40 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP 135 Table 41 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1X sssssssseseseeeeeeennn 142 Table 42 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt MAC Authentication eeeeseses 143 Table 43 Advanced Application gt Port Security nennen 146 Table 44 Advanced Applicaton Classer ricrea EEbb a dudP Siri Ra aei PR E abes Nias aE 150 Table 45 Classifier Summary Table A HH 152 Table 46 Common Ethernet Types and Protocol Number seessssseesssseesssssssseersreerrernssersnnneersnansserennneees 152 Table 47 Common IP Protocol Types and Protocol Numbers _ 2 cec eccecceceeeeeeseeeeeecenaneeeeeeeeeeess 153 Table 48 Common TOP and UDP Port Numbers iecit tea ata kara kn Ra a n Nu pa X RF aa d 2 X Ku 153 Table 49 Advanced Application Polly RUIE sssiceciceostn trt tta nete eoo ido EE o sso Feu pRr o cala Eaa pra bXriv p rS E E ERU sd 157 Table 50 Policy Summary Table iscasscdssadbte iat keep E ERROR HHCOLE RE Aba t SO KO P E RC d SA 158 Table 51 Advanced Application gt Queuing Method
223. ess entered in the previous field will be automatically forwarded Add Click Add to save your rule to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses this rule if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to begin configuring this screen afresh Index Click an index number to modify a static MAC address rule for a port Active This field displays whether this static MAC address forwarding rule is active Yes or not No You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it Name This field displays the descriptive name for identification purposes for this static MAC address forwarding rule MAC Address This field displays the MAC address that will be forwarded and the VLAN identification number to which the MAC address belongs VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group Port This field displays the port where the MAC address shown in the next field will be forwarded Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes ES 3148 User s Guide Filtering This chapter discusses MAC address port filtering 10 1 Configure a Filtering Rule Filtering means sifting traffic going through the Switch based on the source and or destination
224. etting Link Aggregation Control Protocol Port Authentication 802 1x MAC Authentication Port Security Classifier Policy Rule Queuing Method VLAN Stacking Multicast Status Multicast Setting IGMP Snooping VLAN IGMP Filtering Profile MVR Group Configuration ES 3148 User s Guide 55 Chapter 4 The Web Configurator Table 5 Web Configurator Screen Sub links Details continued BASIC SETTING ADVANCED APPLICATION MANAGEMENT IP APPLICATION Authentication and Accounting RADIUS Server Setup TACACS Server Setup Auth and Acct Setup IP Source Guard IP Source Guard Static Binding DHCP Snooping DHCP Snooping Configure DHCP Snooping Port Configure DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure ARP Inspection Status ARP Inspection VLAN Status ARP Inspection Log Status ARP Inspection Configure ARP Inspection Port Configure ARP Inspection VLAN Configure Loopguard The following table describes the links in the navigation panel Table 6 Navigation Panel Links LINK DESCRIPTION Basic Setting System Info This link takes you to a screen that displays general system and hardware monitoring information General Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure general identification information about the Switch Switch Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can set up global Switch parameters such as VLAN type MAC address learning GARP
225. ettings Click Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 94 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct OEUSSUDRSDEGDNEUDEUGTITLUDD EENN G RADIUS Server Setup Click Here TACACS Server Setup Click Here Auth and Acct Setup Click Here 23 2 1 RADIUS Server Setup Use this screen to configure your RADIUS server settings See Section 23 1 2 on page 186 for more information on RADIUS servers and Section 23 3 on page 194 for RADIUS attributes utilized by the authentication and accounting features on the Switch Click on the RADIUS Server Setup link in the Authentication and Accounting screen to view the screen as shown ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 23 Authentication amp Accounting Figure 95 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt RADIUS Server Setup D RADIUS Server Setup J Auth and Acct Authentication Server Mode index priority Timeout 30 seconds Index IP Address UDP Port Shared Secret Delete 1 0 0 0 0 1812 O 2 0 0 0 0 1612 O Apply Cancel Accounting Server Timeout 30 seconds Index IP Address UDP Port Shared Secret Delete 1 0 0 0 0 1813 C 2 0 0 0 0 1813 O Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 63 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt RADIUS Server Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Use this section to configure your RADIUS
226. etwork IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group it is not used to carry user data Refer to RFC 1112 RFC 2236 and RFC 3376 for information on IGMP versions 1 2 and 3 respectively 22 1 1 IP Multicast Addresses In IPv4 a multicast address allows a device to send packets to a specific group of hosts multicast group in a different subnetwork A multicast IP address represents a traffic receiving group not individual receiving devices IP addresses in the Class D range 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 are used for IP multicasting Certain IP multicast numbers are reserved by IANA for special purposes see the IANA web site for more information 22 1 2 IGMP Filtering With the IGMP filtering feature you can control which IGMP groups a subscriber on a port can join This allows you to control the distribution of multicast services such as content information distribution based on service plans and types of subscription You can set the Switch to filter the multicast group join reports on a per port basis by configuring an IGMP filtering profile and associating the profile to a port 22 1 3 IGMP Snooping The Switch can passively snoop on IGMP packets transferred between IP multicast routers switches and IP multicast hosts to learn the IP multicast group membership It checks IGMP packets passing through it picks out the group registration information and con
227. etwork A binding contains these key attributes MAC address VLAN ID IP address Port number When the Switch receives a DHCP or ARP packet it looks up the appropriate MAC address VLAN ID IP address and port number in the binding table If there is a binding the Switch forwards the packet If there is not a binding the Switch discards the packet The Switch builds the binding table by snooping DHCP packets dynamic bindings and from information provided manually by administrators static bindings IP source guard consists of the following features Static bindings Use this to create static bindings in the binding table DHCP snooping Use this to filter unauthorized DHCP packets on the network and to build the binding table dynamically ARP inspection Use this to filter unauthorized ARP packets on the network If you want to use dynamic bindings to filter unauthorized ARP packets typical implementation you have to enable DHCP snooping before you enable ARP inspection 24 1 1 DHCP Snooping Overview Use DHCP snooping to filter unauthorized DHCP packets on the network and to build the binding table dynamically This can prevent clients from getting IP addresses from unauthorized DHCP servers 24 1 1 1 Trusted vs Untrusted Ports Every port is either a trusted port or an untrusted port for DHCP snooping This setting is independent of the trusted untrusted setting for ARP inspection You can also specify th
228. eua rianan ie niiair En hod da Eb Ed ERE Ropa 199 24 1 2 ARP InepecHon OVOIVIGW uuucicveisvs c c to vid d ionni PUE teeta sax dev VE TOU ree 201 ed IP SOUS ERU Send eren Hen a og Fer tu ren Luigi Fito pu Eoo A aue 203 24 3 NITE DsEr s poe 203 pom DHCP Ecos e 205 24 5 DHCP SBBOpe T ONIEGBER ausauccnu tiaccete pn ost adn pb eda lb kcal cx nn bn d ae Rat 208 215 1 DHCP Snooping PON GODUES uu eiiis cir erRPNSE Od FER qa FCR HORE PRINS Or FE qd ce Eq a bkeRs 209 245 2 DHCP Snooping VLAN Coigule edt pi o d ti en des e Dd or ds cds 211 zB ARP UST SEIS uia iso eed Ue PR EIE pe bia vail itn HERR ERR DG ausi ga dk ai oada 212 245 1 ARP Inspection VLAN Status cccssicsccsquienesecansecctatacaucsianscounccances nag a aea i 212 ES 3148 User s Guide Table of Contents 245 2 ARP Iniapecton Log SIUS 5 siscccatexissaeceslinwinaserviuanndenanuuuseeslsasmaaserisuuedernnsonaeeiiieed 213 24 1 ARP Ipspection CIAO e Tm 215 24 7 1 ARP Inspection Port Configure 2 oct recti erro korr dt ke vc dir bct pep ide pete 216 24 7 2 ARP Inspection VLAN ORS 4iuxxasetxedcentiax ec end dakedes Dod Lec a guid pe nate 217 Chapter 25 Bra FURIE MR 219 2o HLOGD Guard CUOI caicsuspeudem Madrid m RO S AR E DM ME 219 292 LOOD CMT SOWN aiio onte A PE aeu e OR ce be du Rr add d S 221 Chapter 26 ere kee Te eI TE ETT EI TETTE RN US 223 Zo mw easnspymsectidrern a m T 223 Chapter 27 Differentiated ServieBB
229. eues with smaller weights FE Port SPQ Enable This field is applicable only when you select WFQ or WRR Select a queue Q0 to Q7 to have the Switch use Strictly Priority to service the subsequent queue s after and including the specified queue for the 10 100 Mbps Ethernet ports For example if you select Q5 the Switch services traffic on Q5 Q6 and Q7 using Strictly Priority Select None to always use WFQ or WRR for the 10 100 Mbps Ethernet ports Port This label shows the port you are configuring Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Weight When you select WFQ or WRR enter the queue weight here Bandwidth is divided across the different traffic queues according to their weights GE Port SPQ Enable This field is applicable only when you select WFQ or WRR Select a queue Q0 to Q7 to have the Switch use Strictly Priority to service the subsequent queue s after and including the specified queue for the gigabit ports For example if you select Q5 the Switch services traffic on Q5 Q6 and Q7 using Strictly Priority Select None to always use WFQ or WRR for the gigabit ports Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memor
230. ex Active IP Address Log Level Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 111 Management Syslog Server Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to have the device send logs to this syslog server Clear the check box if you want to create a syslog server entry but not have the device send logs to it you can edit the entry later Server Address Enter the IP address of the syslog server Log Level Select the severity level s of the logs that you want the device to send to this Syslog server The lower the number the more critical the logs are Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to return the fields to the factory defaults Index This is the index number of a syslog server entry Click this number to edit the entry Active This field displays Yes if the device is to send logs to the syslog server No displays if the device is not to send logs to the syslog server IP Address This field displays the IP address of the syslog server Log Level This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this S
231. examine the traffic from the first port without interference Link Aggregation This link takes you to a screen where you can logically aggregate physical links to form one logical higher bandwidth link Port This link takes you to a screen where you can configure IEEE 802 1x port Authentication authentication as well as MAC authentication for clients communicating via the Switch Port Security This link takes you to a screen where you can activate MAC address learning and set the maximum number of MAC addresses to learn on a port Classifier This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the Switch to group packets based on the specified criteria Policy Rule This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the Switch to perform special treatment on the grouped packets Queuing Method This link takes you to a screen where you can configure queuing with associated queue weights for each port VLAN Stacking This link takes you to a screen where you can configure VLAN stacking Multicast This link takes you to a screen where you can configure various multicast features and create multicast VLANs Auth and Acct This link takes you to a screen where you can configure authentication and accounting services via external servers The external servers can be either RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service or TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus IP Source Guard
232. f the SNMP messages When the contents of the SNMP messages are encrypted only the intended recipients can read them 30 3 2 Supported MIBs MIBs let administrators collect statistics and monitor status and performance The Switch supports the following MIBs SNMP MIB II RFC 1213 RFC 1157 SNMP v1 RFC 1493 Bridge MIBs RFC 1643 Ethernet MIBs RFC 1155 SMI RFC 2674 SNMPv2 SNMPv2c RFC 1757 RMON SNMPv2 SNMPv2c or later version compliant with RFC 2011 SNMPv2 MIB for IP RFC 2012 SNMPv2 MIB for TCP RFC 2013 SNMPv2 MIB for UDP 30 3 3 SNMP Traps The Switch sends traps to an SNMP manager when an event occurs The following tables outline the SNMP traps by category An OID Object ID that begins with 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 is defined in private MIBs Otherwise it is a standard MIB OID Table 98 SNMP System Traps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION coldstart coldStart 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 1 This trap is sent when the Switch is turned on warmstart warmsStart 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 2 This trap is sent when the Switch restarts fanspeed FanSpeedEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 17 32 2 1 This trap is sent when the fan speed goes above or below the normal operating range FanSpeedEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 17 32 2 2 This trap is sent when the fan speed returns to the normal operating range temperature TemperatureEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 17 32 2 1 This trap is sent when the
233. fications 38 2 Cable Pin Assignments In a serial communications connection generally a computer is DTE Data Terminal Equipment and a modem is DCE Data Circuit terminating Equipment The Switch is DCE when you connect a computer to the console port The Switch is DTE when you connect a modem to the dial backup port Figure 164 Console Dial Backup Port Pin Layout Table 122 Console Dial Backup Port Pin Assignments CONSOLE Port RS 232 Female DB 9F DIAL BACKUP RS 232 Male DB 9M Not on all models Pin 1 NON Pin 2 DCE TXD Pin 3 DCE RXD Pin 4 DCE DSR Pin 5 GND Pin 6 DCE DTR Pin 7 DCE CTS Pin 8 DCE RTS PIN 9 NON Pin 1 NON Pin 2 DTE RXD Pin 3 DTE TXD Pin 4 DTE DTR Pin 5 GND Pin 6 DTE DSR Pin 7 DTE RTS Pin 8 DTE CTS PIN 9 NON The CON AUX port also has these pin assignments The CON AUX switch changes the setting in the firmware only and does not change the CON AUX port s pin assignments Switchs with a CON AUX port also have a 9 pin adaptor for the console cable with these pin assignments on the male end Table 123 Ethernet Cable Pin Assignments WAN LAN ETHERNET CABLE PIN LAYOUT Straight through Crossover Switch Adapter Switch Switch 3 Pins 2 3 and 5 are used ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 38 Product Specifications Table 123 Ethernet Cable Pin Assignments
234. figuration to activate one of the STP standards on the Switch 11 3 Spanning Tree Configuration Use the Spanning Tree Configuration screen to activate one of the STP modes on the Switch Click Configuration in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol Figure 51 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration Spanning Tree Configuration Status Rapid Spanning Tree Spanning Tree Mode C Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree C Multiple Spanning Tree Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 26 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Spanning Tree You can activate one of the STP modes on the Switch Mode Select Rapid Spanning Tree Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree or Multiple Spanning Tree See Section 11 1 on page 107 for background information on STP Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES 3148 User s Guide 113 Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol 11 4 Configure Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Use this screen to configure RSTP settings see Section 11 1 on page 107 for more informatio
235. figures multicasting accordingly IGMP snooping allows the Switch to learn multicast groups without you having to manually configure them ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 22 Multicast The Switch forwards multicast traffic destined for multicast groups that it has learned from IGMP snooping or that you have manually configured to ports that are members of that group IGMP snooping generates no additional network traffic allowing you to significantly reduce multicast traffic passing through your Switch 22 1 4 IGMP Snooping and VLANs The Switch can perform IGMP snooping on up to 16 VLANs You can configure the Switch to automatically learn multicast group membership of any VLANs The Switch then performs IGMP snooping on the first 16 VLANs that send IGMP packets This is referred to as auto mode Alternatively you can specify the VLANs that IGMP snooping should be performed on This is referred to as fixed mode In fixed mode the Switch does not learn multicast group membership of any VLANs other than those explicitly added as an IGMP snooping VLAN 22 2 Multicast Status Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast to display the screen as shown This screen shows the multicast group information See Section 22 1 on page 171 for more information on multicasting Figure 81 Advanced Application gt Multicast OMSK Multicast Setting Index VID Port Multicast Group The following table describes the labels in this scre
236. following table describes the labels in this screen Table 81 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure gt Port LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays the port number If you configure the port the settings are applied to all of the ports Trusted State Select whether this port is a trusted port Trusted or an untrusted port Untrusted The Switch does not discard ARP packets on trusted ports for any reason The Switch discards ARP packets on untrusted ports in the following situations The sender s information in the ARP packet does not match any of the current bindings The rate at which ARP packets arrive is too high You can specify the maximum rate at which ARP packets can arrive on untrusted ports Limit These settings have no effect on trusted ports Rate pps Specify the maximum rate 0 2048 packets per second at which the switch receives ARP packets from each port The switch discards any additional ARP packets Enter 0 to disable this limit Burst interval The burst interval is the length of time over which the rate of ARP packets seconds is monitored for each port For example if the Rate is 15 pps and the burst interval is 1 second then the switch accepts a maximum of 15 ARP packets in every one second interval If the burst interval is 5 seconds then the switch accepts a maximum of 75 ARP packets in every five second interval Enter the length
237. ft its outgoing port CPU refers to the Switch management port By default it forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports If it does not form a VLAN with a particular port then the Switch cannot be managed from that port Outgoing These are the egress ports an egress port is an outgoing port that is a port through which a data packet leaves If you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other you must define the egress port for both ports CPU refers to the Switch management port By default it forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports If it does not form a VLAN with a particular port then the Switch cannot be managed from that port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN ES 3148 User s Guide Static MAC Forward Setup Use these screens to configure static MAC address forwarding 9 1 Overview This chapter discusses how to configure forwarding rules based on MAC addresses of devices on your network 9 2 Configuring Static MAC Forwarding A static MAC address is an address that has been manually entered in the MAC address table Static MAC addresses do not a
238. g Time in the Switch Setup screen is set to a lower value then it supersedes this setting See Section 7 5 on page 81 Port This field displays a port number ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 16 Port Authentication Table 42 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt MAC Authentication continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this to permit MAC authentication on this port You must first allow MAC authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES 3148 User s Guide Port Security This chapter shows you how to set up port security 17 1 About Port Security Port security allows only packets with dynamically learned MAC addresses and or configured static MAC addresses to pass through a port on the Switch The Switch can learn up to 16K MAC addresses in total with no limit on individual ports other tha
239. g table describes the labels in this screen Table 64 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt TACACS Server Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Server Use this section to configure your TACACS authentication settings Mode This field is only valid if you configure multiple TACACS servers Select index priority and the Switch tries to authenticate with the first configured TACACS server if the TACACS server does not respond then the Switch tries to authenticate with the second TACACS server Select round robin to alternate between the TACACS servers that it sends authentication requests to Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an authentication request response from the TACACS server If you are using index priority for your authentication and you are using two TACACS servers then the timeout value is divided between the two TACACS servers For example if you set the timeout value to 30 seconds then the Switch waits for a response from the first TACACS server for 15 seconds and then tries the second TACACS server Index This is a read only number representing a TACACS server entry IP Address Enter the IP address of an external TACACS server in dotted decimal notation TCP Port The default port of a TACACS server for authentication is 49 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so
240. ge out When you set up static MAC address rules you are setting static MAC addresses for a port This may reduce the need for broadcasting Static MAC address forwarding together with port security allow only computers in the MAC address table on a port to access the Switch See Chapter 17 on page 145 for more information on port security Click Advanced Applications gt Static MAC Forwarding in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 43 Advanced Application gt Static MAC Forwarding Static MAC Forwarding d Active O Name MAC Address VID Port Add Cancel Clear Index Active Name MAC Address Delete Cancel VID Port Delete ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 9 Static MAC Forward Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 22 Advanced Application gt Static MAC Forwarding LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to activate your rule You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it by clearing this check box Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes for this static MAC address forwarding rule MAC Address Enter the MAC address in valid MAC address format that is six hexadecimal character pairs Note Static MAC addresses do not age out VID Enter the VLAN identification number Port Enter the port where the MAC addr
241. ges every 2 seconds Log interval Enter how often 0 86400 seconds the Switch sends a batch of syslog messages to the syslog server Enter 0 if you want the Switch to send syslog messages immediately See Syslog rate for an example of the relationship between Syslog rate and Log interval Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values 24 7 1 ARP Inspection Port Configure Use this screen to specify whether ports are trusted or untrusted ports for ARP inspection To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure gt Port Port N co m c Cn gt co Trusted State Untrusted Untrusted gt Untrusted Untrusted Untrusted Untrusted 15 CSS ISP SIS S In S DISSE Fo pu am P La a RP R PM gg POG a PP a Figure 110 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure gt Port Configure Limit Rate pps Burst interval seconds 1 1 1 1 ELE 1 1 1 1 ee pe TITEL Apply Cancel ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard The
242. gs to open the Pop up Blocker Settings screen ES 3148 User s Guide Appendix B Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions Figure 199 Internet Options Privacy Internet Options PR Settings Move the slider to select a privacy setting for the Internet MER zone Medium privacy policy Blocks third party cookies that use personally identifiable tj information without your implicit consent Restricts first party cookies that use personally identifiable information without implicit consent Blocks third party cookies that do not have a compact Pop up Blocker Prevent most pop up windows from appearing v Block pop ups 3 Type the IP address of your device the web page that you do not want to have blocked with the prefix http For example http 192 168 167 1 4 Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites Figure 200 Pop up Blocker Settings Pop up Blocker Settings Exceptions Pop ups are currently blocked You can allow pop ups from specific Web sites by adding the site to the list below Address of Web site to allow http 4 192 168 1 1 Add Allowed sites Notifications and Filter Level Play a sound when a pop up is blocked Show Information Bar when a pop up is blocked Filter Level Medium Block most automatic pop ups Pop up Blocker FAQ Close ES 3148 User s Guide Appendix B Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Jav
243. gt Multicast Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Reserved Multicast Group Multicast addresses 224 0 0 0 to 224 0 0 255 are reserved for the local scope For examples 224 0 0 1 is for all hosts in this subnet 224 0 0 2 is for all multicast routers in this subnet etc A router will not forward a packet with the destination IP address within this range See the IANA web site for more information Specify the action to perform when the Switch receives a frame with a reserved multicast address Select Drop to discard the frame s Select Flooding to send the frame s to all ports Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Immed Leave Select this option to set the Switch to remove this port from the multicast tree when an IGMP version 2 leave message is received on this port Select this option if there is only one host connected to this port Group Limited Select this option to limit the number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join Max Group Num Enter the number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join Once a port is registered in the specified number of multicast groups any new
244. guration 7 Turnon your Switch and restart your computer if prompted Verifying Settings Check your TCP IP properties in the TCP IP Control Panel window Macintosh OS X 1 Click the Apple menu and click System Preferences to open the System Preferences window Figure 186 Macintosh OS X Apple Menu r1 Grab File Edit Capt About This Mac Get Mac OS X Software a System Preferences Location 2 Click Network in the icon bar Select Automatic from the Location list Select Built in Ethernet from the Show list Click the TCP IP tab 3 For dynamically assigned settings select Using DHCP from the Configure list ES 3148 User s Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 187 Macintosh OS X Network 6 0 Network m o g Show All Displays Network Startup Disk Location Automatic m Show Built in Ethernet E AppleTalk Proxies Configure Using DHCP Domain Name Servers Optional IP Address 192 168 11 12 168 95 1 1 Provided by DHCP Server Subnet Mask 255 255 254 0 Router 192 168 10 11 Search Domains Optional DHCP Client ID Optional Example apple com earthlink net Ethernet Address 00 05 02 43 93 ff a Click the lock to prevent further changes 4 For statically assigned settings do the following From the Configure box select Manually Type your IP address in the IP Address box Type your subnet mask in the Subnet
245. h ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 17 Port Security ES 3148 User s Guide Classifier This chapter introduces and shows you how to configure the packet classifier on the Switch 18 1 About the Classifier and QoS Quality of Service QoS refers to both a network s ability to deliver data with minimum delay and the networking methods used to control the use of bandwidth Without QoS all traffic data is equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested This can cause a reduction in network performance and make the network inadequate for time critical application such as video on demand A classifier groups traffic into data flows according to specific criteria such as the source address destination address source port number destination port number or incoming port number For example you can configure a classifier to select traffic from the same protocol port such as Telnet to form a flow Configure QoS on the Switch to group and prioritize application traffic and fine tune network performance Setting up QoS involves two separate steps 1 Configure classifiers to sort traffic into different flows 2 Configure policy rules to define actions to be performed for a classified traffic flow refer to Chapter 19 on page 155 to configure policy rules 18 2 Configuring the Classifier Use the Classifier screen to define the classifiers After you define the classifier you can specify actions or policy to
246. hapter introduces ARP Table 35 1 ARP Table Overview Address Resolution Protocol ARP is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address IP address to a physical machine address also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address on the local area network An IP version 4 address is 32 bits long In an Ethernet LAN MAC addresses are 48 bits long The ARP Table maintains an association between each MAC address and its corresponding IP address 35 1 1 How ARP Works When an incoming packet destined for a host device on a local area network arrives at the Switch the Switch s ARP program looks in the ARP Table and if it finds the address sends it to the device If no entry is found for the IP address ARP broadcasts the request to all the devices on the LAN The Switch fills in its own MAC and IP address in the sender address fields and puts the known IP address of the target in the target IP address field In addition the Switch puts all ones in the target MAC field FF FF FF FF FF FF is the Ethernet broadcast address The replying device which is either the IP address of the device being sought or the router that knows the way replaces the broadcast address with the target s MAC address swaps the sender and target pairs and unicasts the answer directly back to the requesting machine ARP updates the ARP Table for future reference and then sends the packet to the MAC address that replied 35 2 Viewing the ARP Table Click
247. has more traffic than it can handle Queues with larger weights get more service than queues with smaller weights This queuing mechanism is highly efficient in that it divides any available bandwidth across the different traffic queues and returns to queues that have not yet emptied 20 2 Configuring Queuing Click Advanced Application gt Queuing Method in the navigation panel Figure 78 Advanced Application gt Queuing Method TG es Enable Q3 e E CICIO fe Apply Cancel ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 20 Queuing Method The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 51 Advanced Application gt Queuing Method LABEL DESCRIPTION Method Select SPQ Strictly Priority Queuing WFQ Weighted Fair Queuing or WRR Weighted Round Robin Strictly Priority services queues based on priority only When the highest priority queue empties traffic on the next highest priority queue begins Q7 has the highest priority and QO the lowest Weighted Fair Queuing is used to guarantee each queue s minimum bandwidth based on their bandwidth portion weight the number you configure in the Weight field Queues with larger weights get more guaranteed bandwidth than queues with smaller weights Weighted Round Robin Scheduling services queues on a rotating basis based on their queue weight the number you configure in the queue Weight field Queues with larger weights get more service than qu
248. he Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 22 5 IGMP Filtering Profile An IGMP filtering profile specifies a range of multicast groups that clients connected to the Switch are able to join A profile contains a range of multicast IP addresses which you want clients to be able to join Profiles are assigned to ports in the Multicast Setting screen Clients connected to those ports are then able to join the multicast groups specified in the profile Each port can be assigned a single profile A profile can be assigned to multiple ports Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile link to display the screen as shown Figure 84 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile IGMP Filtering Profile Multicast Setting Profile Setup Profile Name Start Address End Address 224 0 0 0 224 0 0 0 Profile Name Default Add Clear Start Address End Address Delete Profile Delete Rule O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 59 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile LABEL DESCRIPTION Profile Name Enter a descriptive name for the profile for identification purposes To configure additional rule s for a profile that you have already added enter the profile name and specify
249. he DHCP snooping database the Switch can reload the dynamic bindings from the DHCP snooping database after the Switch restarts You can configure the name and location of the file on the external TFTP server The file has the following format Figure 98 DHCP Snooping Database File Format lt initial checksum gt TYPE DHCP SNOOPING VERSION 1 BEGIN lt binding 1 gt lt checksum 1 gt lt binding 2 gt lt checksum 1 2 gt lt binding n gt lt checksum 1 2 n gt END The lt initial checksum gt helps distinguish between the bindings in the latest update and the bindings from previous updates Each binding consists of 72 bytes a space and another checksum that is used to validate the binding when it is read If the calculated checksum is not equal to the checksum in the file that binding and all others after it are ignored ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard 24 1 1 3 DHCP Relay Option 82 Information The Switch can add information to DHCP requests that it does not discard This provides the DHCP server more information about the source of the requests The Switch can add the following information Slot ID 1 byte port ID 1 byte and source VLAN ID 2 bytes System name up to 32 bytes This information is stored in an Agent Information field in the option 82 field of the DHCP headers of client DHCP request frames See Chapter 28 on page 233 for more information about DHC
250. he address bar to access the web configurator See Section 4 2 on page 51 for more information ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example 3 Click Basic Setting gt IP Setup 4 Configure the related fields in the IP Setup screen For the VLAN2 network enter 192 168 2 1 as the IP address and 255 255 255 0 as the subnet mask 5 Inthe VID field enter the ID of the VLAN group to which you want this management IP address to belong This is the same as the VLAN ID you configure in the Static VLAN screen 6 Selectthe Manageable check box to allow the Switch to be managed from the ports ut of band Management IF IP Address 192 168 0 1 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Apply Cancel Index IP Adare IP Subnet Mask VID Default Gateway Manageable Delet belonging to VLAN2 using this specified IP address 7 Repeat this process for VLANI if necessary Click Add to save your changes back to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off ES 3148 User s Guide This chapter describes the system status web configurator home page and port details screens 6 1 Overview System Status and Port Statistics The home screen of the web configurator displays a port statistical summary with links to each port showing statistical details 6 2 Port Status Summary To view the port statistics click St
251. he current bindings change after an update Once the next update is scheduled additional changes in current bindings are automatically included in the next update Renew DHCP Snooping URL Enter the location of a DHCP snooping database and click Renew if you want the Switch to load it You can use this to load dynamic bindings from a different DHCP snooping database than the one specified in Agent URL When the Switch loads dynamic bindings from a DHCP snooping database it does not discard the current dynamic bindings first If there is a conflict the Switch keeps the dynamic binding in volatile memory and updates the Binding collisions counter in the DHCP Snooping screen Section 24 4 on page 205 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values 24 5 1 DHCP Snooping Port Configure Use this screen to specify whether ports are trusted or untrusted ports for DHCP snooping BES The Switch will drop all DHCP requests if you enable DHCP snooping and there are no trusted ports You can also specify the maximum number for DHCP packets that each port trusted or untrusted can receive each second To open this screen cli
252. he navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 26 Basic Setting gt General Setup IOTA System Name ES 3148 Location house Contact Person s Name tom Use Time Server when Bootup None v Time Server IP Address 0 00 0 Current Time 08 10 25 UTC New Time hh mm ss 08 10 25 Current Date 1970 01 107 New Date yyyy mm dd 1970 01 07 Time Zone UTC v Daylight Saving Time LJ Start Date of at End Date of at It will take 60 seconds if time server is unreachable Apply Cancel ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 7 Basic Setting The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 10 Basic Setting gt General Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION System Name Choose a descriptive name for identification purposes This name consists of up to 64 printable characters spaces are allowed Location Enter the geographic location of your Switch You can use up to 32 printable ASCII characters spaces are allowed Contact Person s Name Enter the name of the person in charge of this Switch You can use up to 32 printable ASCII characters spaces are allowed Use Time Server when Bootup Enter the time service protocol that your timeserver uses Not all time servers support all protocols so you may have to use trial and error to find a protocol that works The main differences between them are the time format When you select the Daytime RFC 867 format the Switch d
253. her conforming exceeding or violating the criteria Two Rate Three Color Marker TRTCM defined in RFC 2698 is a type of traffic policing that identifies packets by comparing them to two user defined rates the Committed Information Rate CIR and the Peak Information Rate PIR The CIR specifies the average rate at which packets are admitted to the network The PIR is greater than or equal to the CIR CIR and PIR values are based on the guaranteed and maximum bandwidth respectively as negotiated between a service provider and client Two Rate Three Color Marker evaluates incoming packets and marks them with one of three colors which refer to packet loss priority levels High packet loss priority level is referred to as red medium is referred to as yellow and low is referred to as green After TRTCM is configured and DiffServ is enabled the following actions are performed on the colored packets Red high loss priority level packets are dropped Yellow medium loss priority level packets are dropped if there is congestion on the network ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 27 Differentiated Services Green low loss priority level packets are forwarded TRTCM operates in one of two modes color blind or color aware In color blind mode packets are marked based on evaluating against the PIR and CIR regardless of if they have previously been marked or not In the color aware mode packets are marked based on both existing color a
254. hree encryption methods DES 3DES and Blowfish The SSH server is implemented on the Switch for remote management and file transfer on port 22 Only one SSH connection is allowed at a time 30 6 1 Requirements for Using SSH You must install an SSH client program on a client computer Windows or Linux operating system that is used to connect to the Switch over SSH 30 7 Introduction to HTTPS HTTPS HyperText Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer or HTTP over SSL is a web protocol that encrypts and decrypts web pages Secure Socket Layer SSL is an application level protocol that enables secure transactions of data by ensuring confidentiality an unauthorized party cannot read the transferred data authentication one party can identify the other party and data integrity you know if data has been changed It relies upon certificates public keys and private keys HTTPS on the Switch is used so that you may securely access the Switch using the web configurator The SSL protocol specifies that the SSL server the Switch must always authenticate itself to the SSL client the computer which requests the HTTPS connection with the Switch whereas the SSL client only should authenticate itself when the SSL server requires it to do so Authenticating client certificates is optional and if selected means the SSL client must send the Switch a certificate You must apply for a certificate for the browser from a CA that is a trusted CA on
255. i Instance VLAN Active Port Delete i 1 4093 Delete Cancel ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 31 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Status Click Status to display the MSTP Status screen see Figure 57 on page 123 Active Select this to activate MSTP on the Switch Clear this to disable MSTP on the Switch Note You must also activate Multiple Spanning Tree in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration screen to enable MSTP on the Switch Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units configuration message generations by the root switch The allowed range is 1 to 10 seconds MaxAge This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure All switch ports except for designated ports should receive BPDUs at regular intervals Any port that ages out STP information provided in the last BPDU becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the Switch ports attached to the network The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time in seconds a switch will wait before changing states This delay is required because every switch must receive information abou
256. ication authorization and accounting servers Figure 93 AAA Server bo T CR T Client AAA Server 23 1 1 Local User Accounts By storing user profiles locally on the Switch your Switch is able to authenticate and authorize users without interacting with a network AAA server However there is a limit on the number of users you may authenticate in this way See Chapter 30 on page 245 ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 23 Authentication amp Accounting 23 1 2 RADIUS and TACACS RADIUS and TACACS are security protocols used to authenticate users by means of an external server instead of or in addition to an internal device user database that is limited to the memory capacity of the device In essence RADIUS and TACACS authentication both allow you to validate an unlimited number of users from a central location The following table describes some key differences between RADIUS and TACACS Table 62 RADIUS vs TACACS RADIUS TACACS Transport UDP User Datagram Protocol TCP Transmission Control Protocol Protocol Encryption Encrypts the password sent for All communication between the client the authentication Switch and the TACACS server is encrypted 23 2 Authentication and Accounting Screens To enable authentication accounting or both on the Switch First configure your authentication server settings RADIUS TACACS or both and then set up the authentication priority and accounting s
257. ication gt Link Aggregation Status Link Aggregation Status g Link Aggregation Setting Index Enabled Ports Synchronized Ports Aggregator ID Status 1 z 2 3 4 5 B 3 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 38 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the trunk ID to identify a trunk group that is one logical link containing multiple ports Enabled Port These are the ports you have configured in the Link Aggregation screen to be in the trunk group Synchronized These are the ports that are currently transmitting data as one logical link in this trunk Ports group 1 Port Priority and Port Number are 0 as it is the aggregator ID for the trunk group not the individual port 132 ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 15 Link Aggregation Table 38 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Aggregator ID Link Aggregator ID consists of the following system priority MAC address key port priority and port number Refer to Section 15 2 1 on page 132 for more information on this field Status This field displays how these ports were added to the trunk group It displays Static if the ports are configured as static members of a trunk group LACP if the ports are configured to join a trunk group via LACP 15 4 Link Aggregation
258. ieiccccascniasschaaneosnndnenedaiecteceiectes sanceaenssienedaieadsceuevaeaneons 194 Table 68 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Console sse 196 Table 69 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Telnet SSH sssssseeeeemememennnns 196 Table 70 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Console ou cccccccsececcceeeecceeceeeseecesaeeeeeaeaseseeeeeseeeees 196 Table 71 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard riter ba FRE re tt hore A R 203 Table 72 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt Static Binding sssessssssss 204 Table 73 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping sss 206 Table 74 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping gt Configure 208 Table 75 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping gt Configure gt Port 210 Table 76 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping gt Configure gt VLAN 211 Table 77 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection eeessssseees 212 Table 78 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt VLAN Status 213 Table 79 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Log Status 214 Table 80 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure
259. ifier 149 151 and QoS 149 editing 152 example 153 overview 149 setup 149 151 152 viewing 152 cloning a port See port cloning 280 cluster management 269 and switch passwords 274 cluster manager 269 273 cluster member 269 274 cluster member firmware upgrade 272 network example 269 setup 272 specification 269 status 270 Switch models 269 VID 273 web configurator 271 cluster manager 269 cluster member 269 command interface 36 Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST 110 Common and Internal Spanning Tree See CIST 112 configuration 224 change running config 241 file names 243 configuration file 59 ES 3148 User s Guide Ed Index backup 242 restore 59 242 saving 240 configuration saving 58 connections hardware 43 console port 43 settings 46 contact information 349 copying port settings See port cloning 280 copyright 345 CPU management port 98 current date 76 current time 76 customer support 349 D daylight saving time 76 DHCP 233 configuration options 233 modes 233 relay agent 233 relay example 238 setup 236 DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 233 DHCP relay option 82 201 DHCP snooping 199 configuring 201 DHCP relay option 82 201 trusted ports 200 untrusted ports 200 DHCP snooping database 200 diagnostics 263 Ethernet port test 263 ping 263 system log 263 Differentiated Service DiffServ 225 DiffServ 225 activate 228 and TRTCM 229 DS field 225 DSCP 225 DSCP to IEEE802 1p mapp
260. igh performance Switched Example L5 cinerea trei ket Ern ntn cae 34 1 14 EEE 802 10 VLAN Application Examples iui bt ori ti ora tek na 35 Ta Wars to Manage Ue OUI dida p tir ac ena a ci ate pe Lead a a o es 36 1 3 Good Habits tor Managing Dig SWIC 1ussccca nikon ana prex YR ERR PNN ABEREH FEDERER DE NAME EHE A ERR DERdEA 36 Parn I Marw 37 Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection 22 2 sseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeneeeeeeneeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeeeenes 39 21 Freestanding Installation c 39 2A Mounting Hie SMC HON a ROCK ana seni asl aa ends 40 2 2 1 Rack mounted Installation Requirements cccccccecceeceeeeeccnecaceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeenseenaeess 40 2 2 2 Attaching the Mounting Brackets to the Switch esie 40 2 2 9 Mounting the Switch on a Rack eM 41 Chapter 3 abi i0 A 43 ES 3148 User s Guide LE Table of Contents Ti Pael COnmEchonS genan EE Aa R 43 SEIEN FONS saciado TO T 43 cm Rer crie c LE 44 ee PE PVE mee 45 JAI Coomsole POUL is obedit o lote itu lustus ie arie 46 3 2 2 External Backup Power Supply Connector 2 sctei seis devs eerie aio rna i ca uma ener se Reps ade 46 Qo PONI CODE dandas spax uin tergo torte brc el vta FUR aU CER pe pA RU iiae AREA H LEEREN 47 CEOS ape M 47 Part Ill Web Configurator dS 49 Chapter 4 ILLE Regie P 51
261. imal notation for protocols 93 96 isolate traffic 94 priority 93 96 PVID 85 91 PVID Priority Frame 85 Q QoS 288 and classifier 149 queue weight 162 queuing 161 SPQ 162 WFQ 162 WRR 162 queuing method 161 163 R rack mounting 40 RADIUS 186 advantages 186 and authentication 186 Network example 185 server 186 settings 186 setup 186 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol See RSTP 107 reboot load configuration 241 reboot system 241 registration product 347 related documentation 3 remote management 260 service 261 trusted computers 260 resetting 59 240 to factory default settings 240 restoring configuration 59 242 RFC 3164 265 Round Robin Scheduling 162 routing protocols 288 RSTP 107 rubber feet installation 39 S safety warnings 6 ES 3148 User s Guide Index save configuration 58 240 screen summary 54 Secure Shell See SSH 255 security 288 service access control 259 service port 260 Simple Network Management Protocol see SNMP 246 SNMP 36 246 agent 246 and MIB 246 authentication 252 communities 251 management model 246 manager 246 MIB 247 network components 246 object variables 246 protocol operations 246 security 252 setup 250 traps 252 version 3 and security 247 versions supported 246 SNMP traps 247 supported 247 248 250 Spanning Tree Protocol See STP 107 SPQ Strict Priority Queuing 162 SSH encryption methods 256 how it works 255 implementation 25
262. in Enter Network Password 2 xl D Please type your user name and password Site 192 168 1 1 Realm ES 3148 at Thu Jan 1 03 46 14 1970 User Name Password Save this password in your password list Cancel 4 Click OK to view the first web configurator screen 4 3 The Status Screen The Status screen is the first screen that displays when you access the web configurator The following figure shows the navigating components of a web configurator screen Figure 16 Web Configurator Home Screen Status E Save Status E Logout E Help Pe Posts B D E Port Name Link State LACP TxPkts RxPkts Error is Up 1 Down STOP Disabled o 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 2 100M F FORWARDING Disabled 176 o 0 0 0 0 00155 Management 3 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 00 00 M 4 Down STOP Disabled D 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 5 Down STOP Disabled o 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 B Down STOP Disabled D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 1 Down STOP Disabled D 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 8 Down STOP Disabled D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 g Down STOP Disabled D o 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 10 Down STOP Disabled D 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 fa Down STOP Disabled D 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 12 Down STOP Disabled D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 13 Down STOP Disabled D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 14 Down STOP Disabled D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 15 Down STOP Disabled D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 18 Down STOP Disabled D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 1 Down STOP Disabled D o o 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 18 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
263. ing 230 network example 226 PHB 225 disclaimer 345 double tagged frames 165 DS Differentiated Services 225 DSCP DSCP to IEEE802 1p mapping 230 service level 225 what it does 225 DSCP DiffServ Code Point 225 dual personality interfaces 43 dynamic link aggregation 131 E egress port 101 Ethernet broadcast address 277 Ethernet port test 263 Ethernet ports 43 default settings 44 external authentication server 186 F fan speed 74 FCC interference statement 345 feature summary 54 file transfer using FTP command example 243 filename convention configuration 243 filtering 105 rules 105 filtering database MAC table 275 firmware 74 upgrade 241 272 flow control 83 back pressure 83 IEEE802 3x 83 forwarding delay 121 frames tagged 91 untagged 91 front panel 43 FTP 36 243 file transfer procedure 243 restrictions over WAN 244 G GARP 86 GARP Generic Attribute Registration Protocol 86 GARP terminology 86 GARP timer 78 86 ES 3148 User s Guide Index GBIC ports 34 44 general features 288 general setup 75 getting help 61 GMT Greenwich Mean Time 76 GVRP 86 91 and port assignment 91 GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol 86 H hardware connections 43 front panel 43 installation 39 installation precautions 40 mounting brackets 40 overview 43 rack mounting 40 rubber feet 39 transceivers 44 45 hardware monitor 74 hello time 121 hops 121 HTTPS 256 certificates 256 impl
264. ing Tree Protocol is enabled this field displays the STP state of the port see Section 11 1 3 on page 109 for more information If STP is disabled this field displays FORWARDING if the link is up otherwise it displays STOP LACP This fields displays whether LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol has been enabled on the port TxPkts This field shows the number of transmitted frames on this port RxPkts This field shows the number of received frames on this port Errors This field shows the number of received errors on this port Tx KB s This field shows the number of kilobytes per second transmitted on this port Rx KB s This field shows the number of kilobytes per second received on this port Up Time This field shows the total amount of time in hours minutes and seconds the port has been up Clear Counter Enter a port number and then click Clear Counter to erase the recorded statistical information for that port or select Any to clear statistics for all ports 6 2 1 Status Port Details Click a number in the Port column in the Status screen to display individual port statistics Use this screen to check status and detailed performance data about an individual port on the Switch ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics Figure 24 Status Port Details ED Port Details g Port Status Port Info Port NO 11 Name Link D
265. ing a declaration A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using GARP Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message A Leave All message terminates all registrations GARP timers set declaration timeout values GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is a registration protocol that defines a way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network Enable this function to permit VLAN groups beyond the local Switch Please refer to the following table for common IEEE 802 1Q VLAN terminology Table 14 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Terminology VLAN PARAMETER TERM DESCRIPTION VLAN Type Permanent VLAN This is a static VLAN created manually Dynamic VLAN This is a VLAN configured by a GVRP registration deregistration process Heb ene Registration Fixed Fixed registration ports are permanent VLAN members ontro Registration Forbidden Ports with registration forbidden are forbidden to join the specified VLAN Normal Registration Ports dynamically join a VLAN using GVRP VLAN Tag Control Tagged Ports belonging to the specified VLAN tag all outgoing frames transmitted Untagged Ports belonging to the specified VLAN don t tag all outgoing frames transmitted VLAN Port Port VID This is the VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames that this port received Acceptable Frame Type You may choose to accept both tagged and untagged incoming frames just tagged incoming frames or just unt
266. ional default gateways in the IP Settings tab by clicking Add in Default gateways In TCP IP Gateway Address type the IP address of the default gateway in Gateway To manually configure a default metric the number of transmission hops clear the Automatic metric check box and type a metric in Metric Click Add Repeat the previous three steps for each default gateway you want to add Click OK when finished ES 3148 User s Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 173 Windows XP Advanced TCP IP Properties Advanced TCP IP Settings IP Settings DNS WINS Options IP addresses IP address Subnet mask DHCP Enabled Default gateways Gateway Metric Automatic metric 7 Inthe Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window the General tab in Windows XP Click Obtain DNS server address automatically if you do not know your DNS server IP address es Ifyou know your DNS server IP address es click Use the following DNS server addresses and type them in the Preferred DNS server and Alternate DNS server fields If you have previously configured DNS servers click Advanced and then the DNS tab to order them ES 3148 User s Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 174 Windows XP Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties A General Alternate Configuration You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your
267. is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click this to clear the fields above VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group to which this DHCP settings apply Type This field displays Relay for the DHCP mode DHCP Status For DHCP relay configuration this field displays the first remote DHCP server IP address ES 3148 User s Guide 237 Chapter 28 DHCP Table 92 IP Application gt DHCP gt VLAN continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Delete Select the configuration entries you want to remove and click Delete to remove them Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 28 4 1 Example DHCP Relay for Two VLANs The following example displays two VLANs VIDs 1 and 2 for a campus network Two DHCP servers are installed to serve each VLAN The system is set up to forward DHCP requests from the dormitory rooms VLAN 1 to the DHCP server with an IP address of 192 168 1 100 Requests from the academic buildings VLAN 2 are sent to the other DHCP server with an IP address of 172 23 10 100 Figure 130 DHCP Relay for Two VLANs bi DHCP 192 168 1 100 DHCP 172 23 10 100 For the example network configure the VLAN Setting screen as shown Figure 131 DHCP Relay for Two VLANs Configuration
268. isplays the day month year and time with no time zone adjustment When you use this format it is recommended that you use a Daytime timeserver within your geographical time zone Time RFC 868 format displays a 4 byte integer giving the total number of seconds since 1970 1 1 at 0 0 0 NTP RFC 1305 is similar to Time RFC 868 None is the default value Enter the time manually Each time you turn on the Switch the time and date will be reset to 1970 1 1 0 0 Time Server IP Address Enter the IP address of your timeserver The Switch searches for the timeserver for up to 60 seconds If you select a timeserver that is unreachable then this screen will appear locked for 60 seconds Please wait Current Time This field displays the time you open this menu or refresh the menu New Time hh min ss Enter the new time in hour minute and second format The new time then appears in the Current Time field after you click Apply Current Date This field displays the date you open this menu New Date yyyy mm dd Enter the new date in year month and day format The new date then appears in the Current Date field after you click Apply Time Zone Select the time difference between UTC Universal Time Coordinated formerly known as GMT Greenwich Mean Time and your time zone from the drop down list box Daylight Saving Time Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many coun
269. itch ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 23 Authentication amp Accounting Table 63 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt RADIUS Server Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing RADIUS server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Accounting Use this section to configure your RADIUS accounting server settings Server Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an accounting request response from the RADIUS accounting server Index This is a read only number representing a RADIUS accounting server entry IP Address Enter the IP address of an external RADIUS accounting server in dotted decimal notation UDP Port The default port of a RADIUS accounting server for accounting is 1813 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external RADIUS accounting server and the Switch This key is not sent over the net
270. k Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 22 8 MVR Group Configuration All source ports and receiver ports belonging to a multicast group can receive multicast data sent to this multicast group Configure MVR IP multicast group address es in the Group Configuration screen Click Group Configuration in the MVR screen A port can belong to more than one multicast VLAN However IP multicast group addresses in different multicast VLANs cannot overlap ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 22 Multicast Figure 88 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR Group Configuration MVLAN OFM cn D MVR Multicast VLAN ID Name Start Address End Address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Name Add Cancel Start Address End Address Delete All Delete Group Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 61 Advanced Application Multicast Multicast Setting MVR Group Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Multicast Select a multicast VLAN ID that you configured in the MVR screen from the drop VLAN ID down list box Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes Start Address Enter the starting IP multicast address of the multicast group in dotted decimal notation Refer to Section 22 1 1 on page 171 for more information on IP multicast addresses End Address Enter the ending IP multicast address of th
271. ke them Active Select this check box to activate STP on this port Priority Configure the priority for each port here Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in the Switch Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first The allowed range is between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128 Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port It is recommended to assign this value according to the speed of the bridge The slower the media the higher the cost see Table 24 on page 108 for more information Tree Select which STP tree configuration this port should participate in Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 11 7 Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status Click Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the status screen as shown next See Section 11 1 on page 107 for more information on MRSTP ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol This screen is only available after you activate MRSTP on the Switch Figure 55 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status
272. l support zyxel co uk Sales E mail sales zyxel co uk Telephone 44 1344 303044 08707 555779 UK only Fax 44 1344 303034 Web www zyxel co uk FTP ftp zyxel co uk Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications UK Ltd 11 The Courtyard Eastern Road Bracknell Berkshire RG12 2XB United Kingdom UK ES 3148 User s Guide Appendix G Customer Support ES 3148 User s Guide Index Numerics 802 1P priority 83 A access control limitations 245 login account 253 remote management 260 service port 259 SNMP 246 accounting setup 190 address learning MAC 93 95 Address Resolution Protocol ARP 277 279 280 administrator password 254 age 121 aggregator ID 133 134 aging time 78 alternative subnet mask notation 327 ARP how it works 277 viewing 277 ARP Address Resolution Protocol 277 ARP inspection 199 201 and MAC filter 202 configuring 202 syslog messages 202 trusted ports 202 authentication and RADIUS 186 setup 190 authorization privilege levels 192 automatic VLAN registration 86 B back up configuration file 242 bandwidth control 288 basic settings 73 Index binding 199 binding table 199 building 199 BPDUS Bridge Protocol Data Units 108 Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs 108 bridging 288 C certifications 345 notices 346 viewing 346 CFI Canonical Format Indicator 85 changing the password 58 CIST 112 CIST Common and Internal Spanning Tree 110 Class of Service CoS 225 class
273. l based VLAN applies to un tagged packets and is applicable only when you use IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN Figure 39 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Protocol Based VLAN OLE Vlan Port Setting Active O Port Name lt Ethernet type C Others Hex VID Priority o Add Cancel Index Active Port Name Ethernet type VID Priority Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 20 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Protocol Based VLAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Check this box to activate this protocol based VLAN Port Type a port to be included in this protocol based VLAN This port must belong to a static VLAN in order to participate in a protocol based VLAN See Chapter 8 on page 85 for more details on setting up VLANs Name Enter up to 32 alpha numeric characters to identify this protocol based VLAN Ethernet type Use the drop down list box to select a predefined protocol to be included in this protocol based VLAN or select Others and type the protocol number in hexadecimal notation For example the IP protocol in hexadecimal notation is 0800 and Novell IPX protocol is 8137 Note Protocols in the hexadecimal number range of 0x0000 to OxO5ff are not allowed to be used for protocol based VLANs VID Enter the ID of a VLAN
274. larms and events Login authorization and security levels read only and read write Network CLI through console port and telnet Management Web based management SNMP RMON groups history statistics alarms and events Clustering up to 24 switches can be managed by one IP MIB RFC1213 MIB II RFC1493 Bridge MIB RFC1643 Ethernet MIB RFC1757 Four groups of RMON RFC2011 IP MIB RFC2012 TCP MIB RFC2013 UDP MIB RFC2674 Bridge MIB extension for IEEE 802 1Q The following list which is not exhaustive illustrates the standards supported in the Switch Table 121 Standards Supported STANDARD DESCRIPTION RFC 826 Address Resolution Protocol ARP RFC 867 Daytime Protocol RFC 868 Time Protocol RFC 894 Ethernet I encapsulation RFC 1112 IGMP v1 RFC 1155 SMI RFC 1157 SNMPv1 Simple Network Management Protocol version 1 RFC 1213 SNMP MIB II RFC 1305 Network Time Protocol NTP version 3 RFC 1441 SNMPv2 Simple Network Management Protocol version 2 RFC 1493 Bridge MIBs RFC 1643 Ethernet MIBs ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 38 Product Specifications Table 121 Standards Supported continued STANDARD DESCRIPTION RFC 1757 Four groups of RMON RFC 1901 SNMPv2c Simple Network Management Protocol version 2c RFC 2011 SNMPv2 MIB for IP
275. lation Port Isolation allows each port to communicate only with the CPU management port and the Gigabit uplink ports but not communicate with each other This option is the most limiting but also the most secure Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Ingress Check If this check box is selected for a port the Switch discards incoming frames for VLANs that do not include this port in its member set Clear this check box to disable ingress filtering PVID Enter a number between 1and 4094 as the port VLAN ID GVRP Select this check box to allow GVRP on this port Acceptable Specify the type of frames allowed on a port Choices are All and Tag Only Frame Type Select All from the drop down list box to accept all untagged or tagged frames on this port This is the default setting Select Tag Only to accept only tagged frames on this port All untagged frames will be dropped Select Untag Only to accept only untagged frames on this port All tagged frames will be dropped VLAN Trunking Enable VLAN Trunking on ports connected to other switches or routers but not ports directly connected to end users to all
276. lays the IP address assigned to the MAC address in the binding Lease This field displays how many days hours minutes and seconds the binding is valid for example 2d3h4m5s means the binding is still valid for 2 days 3 hours 4 minutes and 5 seconds This field displays infinity if the binding is always valid for example a static binding Type This field displays how the Switch learned the binding static This binding was learned from information provided manually by an administrator dhcp snooping This binding was learned by snooping DHCP packets VID This field displays the source VLAN ID in the binding Port This field displays the port number in the binding If this field is blank the binding applies to all ports 24 3 IP Source Guard Static Binding Use this screen to manage static bindings for DHCP snooping and ARP inspection Static bindings are uniquely identified by the MAC address and VLAN ID Each MAC address and VLAN ID can only be in one static binding If you try to create a static binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID as an existing static binding the new static binding replaces the original one To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt Static Binding ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard Figure 101 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt Static Binding ONES EEE NEN IPSG MAC Address IP Address V
277. le 11 oerte ertt utens ttn rh tx Ebv aequ Robo ca 112 Figure 50 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol sss 113 Figure 51 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration sss 113 Figure 52 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt RSTP sse 114 Figure 53 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status RSTP ssssssssss 116 Figure 54 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MRSTP sss 117 Figure 55 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MRSTP 1 119 Figure 56 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP sess 120 Figure 57 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MSTP 123 Figure 58 Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control esses 126 Figure 59 Advanced Application gt Broadcast Storm Control 127 Figure 60 Advanced Application gt MIFFOKIDE iiic rr tree ptr tte EE ertt Ebert qeEEpbbRa dina naii 129 Figure 61 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation Status sssseeeene 132 Figure 62 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting 193 Figure 63 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP 135 Figure 64 T
278. le 9 Basic Setting gt System Info LABEL DESCRIPTION System Name This field displays the descriptive name of the Switch for identification purposes ZyNOS F W This field displays the version number of the Switch s current firmware including the Version date created Ethernet This field refers to the Ethernet MAC Media Access Control address of the Switch Address Hardware Monitor Temperature The Switch has temperature sensors that are capable of detecting and reporting if the Unit temperature rises above the threshold You may choose the temperature unit Centigrade or Fahrenheit in this field Temperature MAC CPU and PHY refer to the location of the temperature sensors on the Switch s printed circuit board Current This shows the current temperature at this sensor MAX This field displays the maximum temperature measured at this sensor MIN This field displays the minimum temperature measured at this sensor Threshold This field displays the upper temperature limit at this sensor Status This field displays Normal for temperatures below the threshold and Error for those above FAN Speed A properly functioning fan is an essential component along with a sufficiently RPM ventilated cool operating environment in order for the device to stay within the temperature threshold Each fan has a sensor that is capable of detecting and reporting if the fan speed falls below the threshol
279. le 90 Relay Agent Information FIELD LABELS DESCRIPTION Slot ID 1 byte This value is always 0 for stand alone switches Port ID 1 byte This is the port that the DHCP client is connected to VLAN ID 2 bytes This is the VLAN that the port belongs to Information up to 64 bytes This optional read only field is set according to system name set in Basic Settings gt General Setup 28 3 2 Configuring DHCP Global Relay Configure global DHCP relay in the DHCP Relay screen Click IP Application gt DHCP in the navigation panel and click the Global link to display the screen as shown Figure 126 IP Application gt DHCP gt Global DHCP Relay Status Active O Remote DHCP Server 1 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 2 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 3 0 0 0 0 Relay Agent Information I Option 82 Information O Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 91 IP Application gt DHCP gt Global LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable DHCP relay Remote Enter the IP address of a DHCP server in dotted decimal notation DHCP Server 1 3 Relay Agent Select the Option 82 check box to have the Switch add information slot number port Information number and VLAN ID to client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Information This read only field displays the system name you configure in the General Setup screen Select the check box for
280. led 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 14 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 15 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 18 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 47 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 18 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 19 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 20 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 z G Any Clear Counter C Port E Done E Internet 30 9 Service Port Access Control Service Access Control allows you to decide what services you may use to access the Switch You may also change the default service port and configure trusted computer s for each service in the Remote Management screen discussed later Click Access Control to go back to the main Access Control screen Figure 150 Management gt Access Control gt Service Access Control aq ervice Access Contro Access Control Services Active Service Port Timeout Telnet iv 3 SSH iv 2 FTP e ei HTTP Iv po 3 Minutes HTTPS iv 443 ICMP v SNMP Iv Apply Cancel ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 30 Access Control The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 106 Management gt Access Control gt Service Access Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Services Services you may use to access the Switch are listed here Active Select this option for the corresponding services that you want to allow to access the Switch Service Port For Telnet SSH FTP HTTP
281. lients Click IP Application gt DHCP in the navigation panel then click the VLAN link In the DHCP Status screen that displays ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 28 DHCP BS You must set up a management IP address for each VLAN that you want to configure DHCP settings for on the Switch See Section 7 6 on page 79 for information on how to do this Figure 129 IP Application gt DHCP gt VLAN EDR 2 AN Settin Status VID Remote DHCP Server 1 0000 Remote DHCP Server 2 0000 Remote DHCP Server 3 0000 Relay Agent Information Option 82 Information Add Cancel Clear Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 92 IP Application gt DHCP gt VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION VID Enter the ID number of the VLAN to which these DHCP settings apply Remote DHCP Enter the IP address of a DHCP server in dotted decimal notation Server 1 3 Relay Agent Select the Option 82 check box to have the Switch add information slot number Information port number and VLAN ID to client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Information This read only field displays the system name you configure in the General Setup Screen Select the check box for the Switch to add the system name to the client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it
282. link to which a port is attached The slower the media the higher the cost Table 24 STP Path Costs LINK RECOMMENDED RECOMMENDED ALLOWED SPEED VALUE RANGE RANGE Path 4Mbps 250 100 to 1000 1 to 65535 Cost Path 10Mbps 100 50 to 600 1 to 65535 Cost Path 16Mbps 62 40 to 400 1 to 65535 Cost Path 100Mbps 19 10 to 60 1 to 65535 Cost Path 1Gbps 4 3to 10 1 to 65535 Cost Path 10Gbps 2 1to5 1 to 65535 Cost On each bridge the root port is the port through which this bridge communicates with the root It is the port on this Switch with the lowest path cost to the root the root path cost If there is no root port then this Switch has been accepted as the root bridge of the spanning tree network For each LAN segment a designated bridge is selected This bridge has the lowest cost to the root among the bridges connected to the LAN 11 1 2 How STP Works After a bridge determines the lowest cost spanning tree with STP it enables the root port and the ports that are the designated ports for connected LANs and disables all other ports that participate in STP Network packets are therefore only forwarded between enabled ports eliminating any possible network loops STP aware switches exchange Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs periodically When the bridged LAN topology changes a new spanning tree is constructed Once a stable network topology has been established all bridges listen for Hello BPDUs
283. lliseconds Each port has a single Leave Period timer Leave Time must be two times larger than Join Timer the default is 600 milliseconds Leave All Timer Leave All Timer sets the duration of the Leave All Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a single Leave All Period timer Leave All Timer must be larger than Leave Timer ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 7 Basic Setting Table 11 Basic Setting gt Switch Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Priority Queue Assignment IEEE 802 1p defines up to eight separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC layer frame that contains bits to define class of service Frames without an explicit priority tag are given the default priority of the ingress port Use the next two fields to configure the priority level to physical queue mapping The Switch has eight physical queues that you can map to the 8 priority levels On the Switch traffic assigned to higher index queues gets through faster while traffic in lower index queues is dropped if the network is congested Priority Level The following descriptions are based on the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802 1d standard which incorporates the 802 1p Level 7 Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages Level 6 Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter jitter is the variations in delay Level 5
284. load the configuration file cannot use FTP to upload new firmware See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator Ignore the suggestions about your browser In addition consider the following suggestions before you reset the Switch to its factory defaults 1 You may have exceeded the maximum number of concurrent FTP sessions Close other FTP sessions or try connecting again later 2 Try to access the Switch using another service such as HTTP If you can access the Switch check the remote management and secure client settings to find out why the Switch does not respond to FTP ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 37 Troubleshooting ES 3148 User s Guide Product Specifications This chapter gives details about your Switch s hardware and firmware features 38 1 General Switch Specifications The following tables summarize the Switch s hardware and firmware features Table 119 Hardware and Environmental Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION Ethernet Interface 48 10 100 Base Tx interfaces Auto negotiation Auto MDI MDIX Compliant with IEEE 802 3 3u Back pressure flow control for half duplex Flow control for full duplex IEEE 802 3x RJ 45 Ethernet cable connector Gigabit Interface 2 Gigabit Ethernet Mini GBIC dual personality interfaces LEDs Per Switch BPS PWR SYS ALM Per 10 100 Mbps RJ 45 port Green for 10 Mbp
285. loop guard feature Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 222 ES 3148 User s Guide Static Routing This chapter shows you how to configure static routes 26 1 Configuring Static Routing The Switch uses IP for communication with management computers for example using HTTP telnet SSH or SNMP Use IP static routes to have the Switch respond to remote management stations that are not reachable through the default gateway The Switch can also use static routes to send data to a server or device that is not reachable through the default gateway for example when sending SNMP traps or using ping to test IP connectivity Click IP Application gt Static Routing in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 117 IP Application gt Static Routing EtG a Active 1 Name Destination IP Address 0 0 0 0 IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Gateway IP Address 0 0 0 0 Metric Add Cancel Clear Index Active Name Destination Address Subnet Mask d Yes Example 172 21 1 1 255 255 0 0 Delete Cancel Gateway Address 192 168 1 2 2 C Metric Delete The following table describes the related labels you use to c
286. lows All packets in the flow are given the same priority You can use CoS class of service to give different priorities to different packet types DiffServ is a class of service CoS model that marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points DSCPs indicating the level of service desired This allows the intermediary DiffServ compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow In addition applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going 27 1 1 DSCP and Per Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new DS Differentiated Services field to replace the Type of Service ToS field in the IP header The DS field contains a 6 bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels and the remaining 2 bits are defined as currently unused CU The following figure illustrates the DS field Figure 118 DiffServ Differentiated Service Field DSCP 6 bits CU 2 bits DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non DiffServ compliant ToS enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping The DSCP value determines the PHB Per Hop Behavior that each
287. mber of bindings the Switch has ignored because the lease time had already expired Unsupported vlans This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the VLAN ID does not exist anymore ES 3148 User s Guide 207 Chapter 24 IP Source Guard 24 5 DHCP Snooping Configure Use this screen to enable DHCP snooping on the Switch not on specific VLAN specify the VLAN where the default DHCP server is located and configure the DHCP snooping database The DHCP snooping database stores the current bindings on a secure external TFTP server so that they are still available after a restart To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping gt Configure Figure 103 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping gt Configure Database Agent URL Timeout interval Write delay interval Renew DHCP Snooping DHCP snooping Configure Pot VLAN DHCP Snooping Active L Disable DHCP Vian BO seconds 300 seconds URL Renew Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 74 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping gt Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to enable DHCP snooping on the Switch You still have to enable DHCP snooping on specific VLAN and specify trusted ports Note The Switch will drop all DHCP requests if you
288. mer expiry This field displays when in seconds the Switch is going to update the DHCP snooping database again It displays Not Running if the current bindings have not changed since the last update This section displays information about the last time the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database Last succeeded time This field displays the last time the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database successfully Last failed time This field displays the last time the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database unsuccessfully Last failed reason This field displays the reason the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database unsuccessfully This section displays historical information about the number of times the Switch successfully or unsuccessfully read or updated the DHCP snooping database Total attempts This field displays the number of times the Switch has tried to access the DHCP snooping database for any reason Startup failures This field displays the number of times the Switch could not create or read the DHCP snooping database when the Switch started up or a new URL is configured for the DHCP snooping database Successful transfers This field displays the number of times the Switch read bindings from or updated the bindings in the DHCP snooping database successfully Failed transfers This field displays the number of times the Switch was unable to read bindings from or update the bi
289. merica or 230V AC in Europe Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution If the power adaptor or cord is damaged remove it from the device and the power source Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord Contact your local vendor to order a new one Do not use the device outside and make sure all the connections are indoors There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Caution Risk of explosion if battery on the motherboard is replaced by an incorrect type Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions Dispose them at the applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic equipment For detailed information about recycling of this product please contact your local city office your household waste disposal service or the store where you purchased the product Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device This product is recyclable Dispose of it properly ES 3148 User s Guide Safety Warnings ES 3148 User s Guide Safety Warnings ES 3148 User s Guide Contents Overview Contents Overview Introductio eet aaa 31 DUI e SWEN ssaa ER 33 Hardware ciistcsscsscicrtdaieritvosinnccidiennceceienconadi Sanat GU M SEN ee ER VE
290. mitting data Gigabit Port LNK ACT Green Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from a 10 Mbps or a 1000 Mbps Ethernet network On The link to a 10 Mbps or a 1000 Mbps Ethernet network is up Amber Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from a 100 Mbps Ethernet network On The link to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is up Off The link to an Ethernet network is down FDX Amber On The port is negotiating in full duplex mode Off The port is negotiating in half duplex mode and no collisions are occurring MGMT 10 Green Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from an Ethernet device On The port is connected at 10 Mbps Off The port is not connected at 10 Mbps or to an Ethernet device 100 Amber Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from an Ethernet device On The port is connected at 100 Mbps Off The port is not connected at 100 Mbps or to an Ethernet device ES 3148 User s Guide PART III Web Configurator The Web Configurator 51 Initial Setup Example 63 System Status and Port Statistics 67 Basic Setting 73 VLAN 85 Static MAC Forward Setup 103 Filtering 105 Spanning Tree Protocol 107 Bandwidth Control 125 Broadcast Storm Control 127 Mirroring 129 Link Aggregation 131 Port Authentication 139 Port Security 145 Classifier 149 Policy Rule 155 Queuing Method 161 VLAN Stacking 165 Multicast 171 Authentication amp Acco
291. mum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure Forwarding Delay This is the time in seconds the root switch will wait before changing states that second is listening to learning to forwarding Note The listening state does not exist in RSTP Cost to Bridge This is the path cost from the root port on this Switch to the root switch Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree Topology This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured Changed Times Time Since Last This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured Change ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol 11 6 Configure Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol To configure MRSTP click MRSTP in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol screen See Section 11 1 on page 107 for more information on MRSTP Figure 54 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MRSTP Multiple Rapid Spanning Iree Protocol NN Status Tree Active Bridge Priority Hello Time MAX Age Forwarding Delay 1 o 32768 2 seconds 20 seconds 15 2 32768 2 seconds 20 seconds 15 Port Active Priority Path Cost Tree T 1 g 128 19 1 L 128 19 1 3 o 128 19 1x 4 C 128 19 1x 5 E 128 19
292. n on RSTP Click RSTP in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol screen Figure 52 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt RSTP Active r3 Bridge Priority 32768 Hello Time 2 Seconds MAX Age 20 Seconds Forwarding Delay 15 Seconds Port Active Priority Path Cost r E A h28 5 2 128 4 3 F 128 3 4 v 128 12 5 a 128 9 b C 128 fig 7 z 128 s A NN PRU RAN Lum PP B tes OOO di OE ome A hi AO AE Ig FG Ee OE ORE in ES Status Apply Cancel i The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 27 Advanced Application Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Status Click Status to display the RSTP Status screen see Figure 53 on page 116 Active Select this to activate RSTP Clear this to disable RSTP Note You must also activate Rapid Spanning Tree in the Advanced Application Spanning Tree Protocol Configuration screen to enable RSTP on the Switch Bridge Priority Bridge priority is used in determining the root switch root port and designated port The switch with the highest priority lowest numeric value becomes the STP root Switch If all switches have the same priority the switch with the lowest MAC address will then become the root switch Select a value from the drop down list box The lower the numeric value you assign the higher the priority for this bridge Bridge Priority determin
293. n next See Section 11 1 5 on page 110 for more information on MSTP ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol This screen is only available after you activate MSTP on the Switch Figure 57 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MSTP Spanning Tree Protocol Status Configuration RSTP MRSTP MSTP Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP CST Bridge Root Our Bridge Bridge ID 0000 000000000000 8000 000000000000 Hello Time second D 2 Max Age second 0 20 Forwarding Delay second 0 15 Cost to Bridge 0 0 Port ID 0x0000 0x0000 Configuration Name 001349000002 Revision Number 0 Configuration Digest A317523DB32DA2D62 Topology Changed Times 0 Time Since Last Change 0 Instance Instance VLAN 0 1 4093 msti i 7 Bridge Regional Root Our Bridge Bridge ID 0000 000000000000 8001 000000000000 Internal Cost 0 0 Port ID 0x0000 0x0000 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 32 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Configuration Click Configuration to specify which STP mode you want to activate Click MSTP to edit MSTP settings on the Switch CST This section describes the Common Spanning Tree settings Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tree the root bridge Our Bridge is this Switch This Switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifi
294. n page 107 for more information on RSTP ES 3148 User s Guide 115 Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol LES This screen is only available after you activate RSTP on the Switch Figure 53 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status RSTP Spanning Tree Protocol Status Configuration RSTP MRSTP MSTP Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Bridge Root Our Bridge Bridge ID 0000 000000000000 0000 000000000000 Hello Time second 0 0 Max Age second 0 0 Forwarding Delay second uU 0 Cost to Bridge 0 Port ID 0x0000 Topology Changed Times 0 Time Since Last Change 0 00 00 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 28 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status RSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Configuration Click Configuration to specify which STP mode you want to activate Click RSTP to edit RSTP settings on the Switch Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tree the root bridge Our Bridge is this Switch This Switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds at which the root switch transmits a second configuration message The root bridge determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Max Age second This is the maxi
295. n the sum cannot exceed 16K For maximum port security enable this feature disable MAC address learning and configure static MAC address es for a port It is not recommended you disable port security together with MAC address learning as this will result in many broadcasts By default MAC address learning is still enabled even though the port security is not activated 17 2 Port Security Setup Click Advanced Application gt Port Security in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 17 Port Security Figure 71 Advanced Application gt Port Security Port 4 0 ON 4 60 IND OLED Active Address Learning Limited Number of Learned MAC Address Active 1 v S Xl s u Hu HuHu HuHu HuHu S x Xx 4 I Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 43 Advanced Application gt Port Security LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable port security on the Switch Port This field displays a port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to enable the port security featur
296. ncel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 45 Classifier Summary Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the index number of the rule Click an index number to edit the rule Active This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when it is deactivated Name This field displays the descriptive name for this rule This is for identification purpose only Rule This field displays a summary of the classifier rule s settings Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes The following table shows some other common Ethernet types and the corresponding protocol number Table 46 Common Ethernet Types and Protocol Number ETHERNET TYPE PROTOCOL NUMBER IP ETHII 0800 X 75 Internet 0801 NBS Internet 0802 ECMA Internet 0803 152 ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 18 Classifier Table 46 Common Ethernet Types and Protocol Number continued ETHERNET TYPE PROTOCOL NUMBER Chaosnet 0804 X 25 Level 3 0805 XNS Compat 0807 Banyan Systems OBAD BBN Simnet 5208 IBM SNA 80D5 AppleTalk AARP 80F3 In the Internet Protocol there is a field called Protocol to identify the IP protocol type The following table shows some common protocol types and the corresponding protocol number Refer to http www iana org assignme
297. nd evaluation against the PIR and CIR If the packets do not match any of colors then the packets proceed unchanged 27 2 1 TRTCM Color blind Mode All packets are evaluated against the PIR If a packet exceeds the PIR it is marked red Otherwise it 1s evaluated against the CIR If it exceeds the CIR then it is marked yellow Finally if it is below the CIR then it is marked green Figure 120 TRTCM Color blind Mode Exceed NO 27 2 2 TRTCM Color aware Mode In color aware mode the evaluation of the packets uses the existing packet loss priority TRTCM can increase a packet loss priority of a packet but it cannot decrease it Packets that have been previously marked red or yellow can only be marked with an equal or higher packet loss priority Packets marked red high packet loss priority continue to be red without evaluation against the PIR or CIR Packets marked yellow can only be marked red or remain yellow so they are only evaluated against the PIR Only the packets marked green are first evaluated against the PIR and then if they don t exceed the PIR level are they evaluated against the CIR Figure 121 TRTCM Color aware Mode YES ES 3148 User s Guide 227 Chapter 27 Differentiated Services 27 3 Activating DiffServ Activate DiffServ to apply marking rules or IEEE 802 1p priority mapping on the selected port s Click IP Application gt DiffServ in the navigation panel to display the scre
298. nd then enter its web configurator password If that switch administrator changes the web configurator password afterwards then it cannot be managed from the Cluster Manager Its Status is displayed as Error in the Cluster Management Status screen and a warning icon amp appears in the member summary list below If multiple devices have the same password then hold SHIFT and click those switches to select them Then enter their common web configurator password Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Refresh Click Refresh to perform auto discovery again to list potential cluster members The next summary ta ble shows the information for the clustering members configured Index This is the index number of a cluster member switch MacAdar This is the cluster member switch s hardware MAC address Name This is the cluster member switch s System Name Model This is the cluster member switch s model name Remove Select this checkbox and then click the Remove button to remove a cluster member switch from the cluster Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES 3148 User s Guide
299. ndings in the DHCP snooping database Successful reads This field displays the number of times the Switch read bindings from the DHCP snooping database successfully Failed reads This field displays the number of times the Switch was unable to read bindings from the DHCP snooping database ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard Table 73 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Successful writes This field displays the number of times the Switch updated the bindings in the DHCP snooping database successfully Failed writes This field displays the number of times the Switch was unable to update the bindings in the DHCP snooping database Database detail First successful access This field displays the first time the Switch accessed the DHCP snooping database for any reason Last ignored bindings counters This section displays the number of times and the reasons the Switch ignored bindings the last time it read bindings from the DHCP binding database You can clear these counters by restarting the Switch or using CLI commands See the CLI Reference Guide Binding collisions This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the Switch already had a binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID Invalid interfaces This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored becau
300. nee renes eterni Reb 3R n ia aun NAE anin ERAS 64 Figure 22 Initial Setup Example Management IP Address ecce ee eene ntn nnn nne 65 FIGUEG T DIIS quoiqasmescomniHsdeUA od cate ved oto cvi Es e biis co ol Moret Ld eret e ufi Ln CUR Lo Decet paa 67 Fowo 24 Satus Fon eT 69 Figure 25 Basic Saling gt Systm INO sascsacccsassensssiacsssnsireaysivsstssesanesiasingadoissssnsanensdxesaunpeassasndsenstesasaonieas 74 Figure 26 Basic Setting gt General Setup iussa ere cha tav bI corp REP XE ESAE DEI REPE II at PG d Ki 75 Figure 27 Basic Setting gt Switch SQUID usessiieeive den pci dicke pc rdi dest Ai ci up t I EE Lev ieu E UV E pe Vd 78 Figure 26 Basic setting IF SEND Lio exin cde n a c Rb vesc o eR r RR e d o rd dS 80 Figure 29 Basic Stag Pon SOUP seuiternttsitemrien cretus eo nlacsahodvu cto Su or ERO ROB TUE FHRE TR ROPA URB EE ARIE UA 82 Figure 30 Part VLAN ND na n 87 Figure 31 Switch Setup Select VLAN Type cccsivesstecuskcesaiacussensidonnadeanedwaisssaaiimuasensidonuandnednsissaniantasenenes 87 Figure 32 Advanced Application gt VLAN VLAN Status sss 88 Figure 33 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Detail cccececececcceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesanaeeeeeeeeeeeeess 88 Figure 34 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN sssssssssssseeeeeeem Iren 89 Figure 35 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting 91 Figure 36 Subnet Based VLAN Application Example cccccce
301. network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address Obtain DNS server address automatically C Use the following DNS server addresses 8 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window 9 Click Close OK in Windows 2000 NT to close the Local Area Connection Properties window 10 Close the Network Connections window Network and Dial up Connections in Windows 2000 NT 11 Turn on your Switch and restart your computer if prompted Verifying Settings 1 Click Start All Programs Accessories and then Command Prompt 2 Inthe Command Prompt window type ipconfig and then press ENTER You can also open Network Connections right click a network connection click Status and then click the Support tab Windows Vista This section shows screens from Windows Vista Enterprise Version 6 0 1 Click the Start icon Control Panel ES 3148 User s Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 175 Windows Vista Start Menu Dr eye 7 0 Professional Connect To g Media Player Classic Control Panel ECHTE o ECT Customize the appearance and functionality of your computer add or remove programs and set up network connections and user accounts gt All Programs Help and Support Bion seorch 5 2M
302. nformation after Import 2x General Details Certification Path Certificate Information This certificate is intended to Ensures the identity of a remote computer Issued to 0040C559652B Issued by 0040C559B52B Valid from 12 31 1999 to 12 24 2029 ES 3148 User s Guide Appendix E Importing Certificates ES 3148 User s Guide Legal Information Copyright Copyright 2007 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole transcribed stored in a retrieval system translated into any language or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical photocopying manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation All rights reserved Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products or software described herein Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice This publication is subject to change without notice Trademarks ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications Inc Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be
303. nges if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES 3148 User s Guide Link Aggregation This chapter shows you how to logically aggregate physical links to form one logical higher bandwidth link 15 1 Link Aggregation Overview Link aggregation trunking is the grouping of physical ports into one logical higher capacity link You may want to trunk ports if for example it is cheaper to use multiple lower speed links than to under utilize a high speed but more costly single port link However the more ports you aggregate then the fewer available ports you have A trunk group is one logical link containing multiple ports The beginning port of each trunk group must be physically connected to form a trunk group The Switch supports both static and dynamic link aggregation In a properly planned network it is recommended to implement static link aggregation only This ensures increased network stability and control over the trunk groups on your Switch See Section 15 6 on page 136 for a static port trunking example 15 2 Dynamic Link Aggregation The IEEE 802 3ad standard describes the Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP for dynamically creating and managing trunk groups The Switch adheres to the IEEE 802 3ad standard for s
304. ning Tree Protocol STP to prevent loops in the core of your network STP cannot prevent loops that occur on the edge of your network Figure 112 Loop Guard vs STP Loop Guard mmm mmm mu Rm um I NN S p n m p m p m m D n mmmmmmmummmme Loop guard is designed to handle loop problems on the edge of your network This can occur when a port is connected to a switch that is in a loop state Loop state occurs as a result of human error It happens when two ports on a switch are connected with the same cable When a switch in loop state sends out broadcast messages the messages loop back to the switch and are re broadcast again and again causing a broadcast storm If a switch not in loop state connects to a switch in loop state then it will be affected by the switch in loop state in the following way t will receive broadcast messages sent out from the switch in loop state t will receive its own broadcast messages that it sends out as they loop back It will then re broadcast those messages again ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 25 Loop Guard The following figure shows port N on switch A connected to switch B Switch B is in loop state When broadcast or multicast packets leave port N and reach switch B they are sent back to port N on A as they are rebroadcast from B Figure 113 Switch in Loop State The loop guard feature checks to see if a loop guard enabled
305. nnot access the device To access the Switch make sure the port that you are connected to is a member of Management VLAN Out of band Management IP Address IP Address Enter the IP address of your Switch in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 0 1 If you change this IP address make sure the computer connected to this management port is in the same subnet before accessing the Switch IP Subnet Enter the IP subnet mask of your Switch in dotted decimal notation for example Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation for Gateway example 192 168 0 254 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields In band IP You can create up to 64 IP addresses which are used to access and manage the Switch Addresses from the ports belonging to the pre defined VLAN s You must configure a VLAN first IP Address Enter the IP address for managing the Switch by the members of the VLAN specified in the VID field below IP Subnet Enter the IP subnet mask in dotted decimal notation Mask VID Type the VLAN group identification number Default Enter the IP address of the d
306. nooping gt Configure gt VLAN 211 Figure 106 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection sssssssssssss 212 Figure 107 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt VLAN Status 213 Figure 108 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Log Status 214 Figure 109 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure 215 Figure 110 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure gt Port 216 Figure 111 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure gt VLAN 217 Figure T12 Loop Guard VS SS IE scd ce 8 te apt dra ca a a Se nd nh R 219 si ml Boot e in Loop OIE MT 220 Figure 174 Loop Guard Probe Pakot La a dete np IN VERGI AE RHRLAEEAVEREELA PSY RO BR DL ED A RLL SR Suo 220 Figure 119 Loop Guard Network LOGI 2usconaesaectest terrd aiia aa tab E eias uR p RE Fa EE Eaa TIDE AM BERE tes 220 Figure 116 Advanced Application gt LOOP Guard iuuciicccsseseve e osds ouo vend aa Pp anii anai i 221 Figure TIZ IP Application Statie RUNING casi snes aan ene a 223 Figure 118 DiffServ Differentiated Service Field ice tete tete rnt op benc iub eo tr prp EP EHE EXER HUE 225 Figure TIO Dittsery NEIWOIK A e 226 Figure 120 TRTCM Eolor DId Mode iuuenes stances kk di a Qr ERR Et
307. ntrol Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 105 Management gt Access Control gt Logins LABEL DESCRIPTION Administrator This is the default administrator account with the admin user name You cannot change the default administrator user name Only the administrator has read write access Old Password Type the existing system password 1234 is the default password when shipped New Password Enter your new system password Retype to confirm Retype your new system password for confirmation Edit Logins You may configure passwords for up to four users These users have read only access You can give users higher privileges via the CLI For more information on assigning privileges see the CLI Reference Guide User Name Set a user name up to 32 ASCII characters long Password Enter your new system password Retype to confirm Retype your new system password for confirmation Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 30 Access Control 30 4 SSH Overview Unlike Telnet or FTP which
308. ntrol is typically used in half duplex mode to send a collision signal to the sending port mimicking a state of packet collision causing the sending port to temporarily stop sending signals and resend later Select Flow Control to enable it 802 1p Priority This priority value is added to incoming frames without a 802 1p priority queue tag See Priority Queue Assignment in Table 11 on page 78 for more information BPDU Control Configure the way to treat BPDUs received on this port You must activate bridging control protocol transparency in the Switch Setup screen first Select Peer to process any BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units received on this port Select Tunnel to forward BPDUs received on this port Select Discard to drop any BPDU received on this port Select Network to process a BPDU with no VLAN tag and forward a tagged BPDU Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 7 Basic Setting ES 3148 User s Guide VLAN The type of screen you see here depends on the VLAN Type you selected in the Switch Setup screen This chapter shows you how to configure 802 1Q tagged and po
309. nts protocol numbers for a complete list Table 47 Common IP Protocol Types and Protocol Numbers PROTOCOL TYPE PROTOCOL NUMBER ICMP 1 TCP 6 UDP 17 EGP 8 L2TP 115 Some of the most common IP ports are Table 48 Common TCP and UDP Port Numbers PORT NUMBER PORT NAME 21 FTP 23 Telnet 25 SMTP 53 DNS 80 HTTP 110 POP3 18 4 Classifier Example The following screen shows an example where you configure a classifier that identifies all traffic from MAC address 00 50 ba ad 4f 81 on port 2 After you have configured a classifier you can configure a policy in the Policy screen to define action s on the classified traffic flow ES 3148 User s Guide E Chapter 18 Classifier Figure 74 Classifier Example Active Name Packet Format Layer 2 Layer 3 Vv Example All VLAN Priority Ethernet Type Destination DSCP IP Protocol Source Destination bd Any c Any cio All Cc Others Hex G Any macho o ife ife ar er MAC Address Port MAC Address Any c AI Establish Only C others Dec IP Address ooo 0 0 0 0 Address Prefix G Any Socket Number IP Address paso Address Prefix 250p G Any Socket Number Add Cancel Cleer ES 3148 User s Guide Policy Rule This chapter sh
310. number 0 1024 of log messages that were generated by ARP packets and have not been sent to the syslog server yet Make sure this number is appropriate for the specified Syslog rate and Log interval If the number of log messages in the Switch exceeds this number the Switch stops recording log messages and simply starts counting the number of entries that were dropped due to unavailable buffer Click Clearing log status table in the ARP Inspection Log Status screen to clear the log and reset this counter See Section 24 6 2 on page 213 ES 3148 User s Guide 215 Chapter 24 IP Source Guard Table 80 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Syslog rate Enter the maximum number of syslog messages the Switch can send to the syslog server in one batch This number is expressed as a rate because the batch frequency is determined by the Log Interval You must configure the syslog server Chapter 32 on page 265 to use this Enter 0 if you do not want the Switch to send log messages generated by ARP packets to the syslog server The relationship between Syslog rate and Log interval is illustrated in the following examples 4invalid ARP packets per second Syslog rate is 5 Log interval is 1 the Switch sends 4 syslog messages every second 6 invalid ARP packets per second Syslog rate is 5 Log interval is 2 the Switch sends 10 syslog messa
311. o IEEE 802 1p Priority Settings You can configure the DSCP to IEEE 802 1p mapping to allow the Switch to prioritize all traffic based on the incoming DSCP value according to the DiffServ to IEEE 802 1p mapping table The following table shows the default DSCP to IEEE802 1p mapping Table 87 Default DSCP IEEE 802 1p Mapping DSCP VALUE 0 7 8 15 16 23 24 31 32 39 40 47 48 55 56 63 IEEE 802 1p O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 27 4 1 Configuring DSCP Settings To change the DSCP IEEE 802 1p mapping click the DSCP Setting link in the DiffServ screen to display the screen as shown next Figure 124 IP Application gt DiffServ gt DSCP Setting ojo v e 1 16 2 v 24 3 7 32 4 7 40 5 48 6 56 7 T DSCP to 802 1p Mapping Diffserv 1 0 gt o a o gt a o gt 5 0 gt e 0 7 0 afi oft nha t2ft aha aha hie 17 2 19 2 gt t9 2 gt 20f2 aA kA 23 2 gt 25 3 gt A 27 3 28 3 23 3 bA abk aav sam cam 36f4 37 4 ce 4z afar niza eba o axo zT ssia c5 viz afez sofe v sem s ez sem safer sse sj z sez sez sez e v ez sr Apply Cancel ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 27 Differentiated Services The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 88 IP Application gt DiffServ gt DSCP Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION 0 63 This is the DSCP classification identification number To set
312. o remove a mini GBIC transceiver SFP module 1 Open the transceiver s latch latch styles vary Figure 12 Opening the Transceiver s Latch Example 2 Pull the transceiver out of the slot Figure 13 Transceiver Removal Example LES 3 2 Rear Panel The following figure shows the rear panel of the Switch ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview Figure 14 Rear Panel Console Port External BPS Management Port RJ 45 Gigabit Ports for Stacking Power Receptacle The following table describes the ports on the panels Table 2 Rear Panel CONNECTOR DESCRIPTION 2 100 1000 Connect these ports to high bandwidth backbone network Ethernet switches or use Mbps RJ 45 them to daisy chain other switches Ports Console Port Only connect this port if you want to configure the Switch using the command line interface CLI via the console port See Section 3 2 1 on page 46 Management Connect to a computer using an RJ 45 Ethernet cable for local configuration of the Port Switch External Connect this to an external BPS See Section 3 2 2 on page 46 Backup Power Supply BPS Power Connect this to an appropriate power supply See Section 3 2 3 on page 47 Receptacle 3 2 1 Console Port For local management you can use a computer with terminal emulation software configured to the following parameters VT100 terminal emulation
313. ocument Conventions Icons Used in Figures Figures in this User s Guide may use the following generic icons The Switch icon is not an exact representation of your device Switch Computer Notebook computer N Server w Telephone Switch Router se E wI ua f ES 3148 User s Guide a Safety Warnings Safety Warnings O For your safety be sure to read and follow all warning notices and instructions e e e e e Do NOT use this product near water for example in a wet basement or near a swimming pool Do NOT expose your device to dampness dust or corrosive liquids Do NOT store things on the device Do NOT install use or service this device during a thunderstorm There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device Do NOT open the device or unit Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device Please contact your vendor for further information Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device Connect it to the right supply voltage for example 110V AC in North A
314. okyo 141 0022 Japan Kazakhstan Support http zyxel kz support Sales E mail sales zyxel kz Telephone 7 3272 590 698 Fax 7 3272 590 689 Web www zyxel kz Regular Mail ZyXEL Kazakhstan 43 Dostyk Ave Office 414 Dostyk Business Centre 050010 Almaty Republic of Kazakhstan Malaysia Support E mail support zyxel com my Sales E mail sales zyxel com my Telephone 603 8076 9933 Fax 603 8076 9833 Web http www zyxel com my Regular Mail ZyXEL Malaysia Sdn Bhd 1 02 amp 1 03 Jalan Kenari 17F Bandar Puchong Jaya 47100 Puchong Selangor Darul Ehsan Malaysia North America Support E mail support zyxel com Sales E mail sales zyxel com Telephone 1 800 255 4101 1 714 632 0882 Fax 1 714 632 0858 Web www us zyxel com FTP ftp us zyxel com ES 3148 User s Guide 351 Appendix G Customer Support Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Inc 1130 N Miller St Anaheim CA 92806 2001 U S A Norway Support E mail support zyxel no Sales E mail sales zyxel no Telephone 47 22 80 61 80 Fax 47 22 80 61 81 Web www zyxel no Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications A S Nils Hansens vei 13 0667 Oslo Norway Poland E mail info pl zyxel com Telephone 48 22 333 8250 Fax 48 22 333 8251 Web www pl zyxel com Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications ul Okrzei 1A 03 715 Warszawa Poland Russia Support http zyxel ru support Sales E mail sales zyxel
315. omain Name servers are used to look up other hosts on the network Hostname Primary DNS Secondary DNS Tertiary DNS DNS Search Path Active Profile Common modified 5 Click the Devices tab 6 Click the Activate button to apply the changes The following screen displays Click Yes to save the changes in all screens Figure 191 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Network work Configuration Activate redhat config network You have made some changes in your configuration To activate the network device ethO the changes have to be saved Do you want to continue 7 After the network card restart process is complete make sure the Status is Active in the Network Configuration screen Using Configuration Files Follow the steps below to edit the network configuration files and set your computer IP address 1 Assuming that you have only one network card on the computer locate the ifconfig eth0 configuration file where eth0 is the name of the Ethernet card Open the configuration file with any plain text editor f you have a dynamic IP address enter dhcp in the BOOTPROTO field The following figure shows an example ES 3148 User s Guide 313 Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 192 Red Hat 9 0 Dynamic IP Address Setting in ifconfig ethO EVICE eth0 BOOT yes OOT PROTO dhcp SERCTL no ERDNS yes TYPE Ethernet ucGUOog
316. ommands DL C stop only tacacs fo Auth and Acct Method 2 Method 3 F x FL 3 Method 1 local local Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 65 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt Auth and Acct Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Use this section to specify the methods used to authenticate users accessing the Switch Privilege Enable These fields specify which database the Switch should use first second and third to authenticate access privilege level for administrator accounts users for Switch management Configure the access privilege of accounts via commands See the CLI Reference Guide for local authentication The TACACS and RADIUS are external servers Before you specify the priority make sure you have set up the corresponding database correctly first You can specify up to three methods for the Switch to authenticate the access privilege level of administrators The Switch checks the methods in the order you configure them first Method 1 then Method 2 and finally Method 3 You must configure the settings in the Method 1 field If you want the Switch to check other sources for access privilege level specify them in Method 2 and Method 3 fields Select local to have the Switch check the access privilege configured for local authentication Select radius or tacacs to have the Switch check the access privilege
317. onfirmation 1 sena certet nua n tha d ua nita a xa Enea AXE coa 44 241 Figure 135 Management gt Maintenance gt Firmware Upgrade see 241 Figure 136 Management gt Maintenance gt Restore Configuration sss 242 Figure 137 Management gt Maintenance gt Backup Configuration ssssse 242 Figure 138 Management gt Access Control Lauscscebecsesbeideke ko vede ko epa due pet da du a o vod dur eb een e Li Ada ga 245 Figure 139 SNMP Management Model sisse esr nra ki enda x e rd na X ta ak Ex d 246 Figure 140 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP 245 arrreteena ber rano Ekr o taa RREKE npa RAE kn EAR EERT MANNA RERRnUR 251 Figure 141 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP gt Trap Group 253 Figure 142 Management gt Access Control gt Logins eeeeeeeeeeeeeennnnr ent nnnnahttn annua rnt th nana Enna 254 Figure 143 SSH Communication Exemple 125 55 trot tr ber tt pibe td kh ertt kk b LI e Fe vo LIE aaia 255 Fiuue T4 Bow SSH VOUS ode oa ain a Gen btt voti i us ecu ti tn dad 255 asd E SINI SU e UL DP RE DO DO VOD E S ODE 257 Figure 146 Security Alert Dialog Box Internet Explorer eeceeeeee escena eee tbta ennt nnne 257 Figure 147 Security Certificate T Netscape iiiiuuuicussu nannten Rath E Ro n Rea anaiak EE Etna 258 Figure 149 Security Canilicate mde m E 258 Figure 149 Example Lock Denoting a Secure Connection ccccessscccees
318. ons The configuration file also known as the romfile or ROM contains the factory default settings in the screens such as password Switch setup IP Setup and so on Once you have customized the Switch s settings they can be saved back to your computer under a filename of your choosing ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System sometimes referred to as the ras file is the system firmware and has a bin filename extension Table 94 Filename Conventions INTERNAL EXTERNAL FILE TYPE NAME NAME DESCRIPTION Configuration File config This is the configuration filename on the Switch Uploading the config file replaces the specified configuration file system including your Switch configurations system related data including the default password the error log and the trace log Firmware ras bin This is the generic name for the ZyNOS firmware on the Switch 29 8 1 1 Example FTP Commands ftp gt put firmware bin ras This is a sample FTP session showing the transfer of the computer file firmware bin to the Switch ftp gt get config config cfg This is a sample FTP session saving the current configuration to a file called config cfg on your computer If your T FTP client does not allow you to have a destination filename different than the source you will need to rename them as the Switch only recognizes config and ras Be sure you keep unaltered copies of both files for later us
319. oot switch will wait before changing states that is listening to learning to forwarding Note The listening state does not exist in RSTP Cost to Bridge This is the path cost from the root port on this Switch to the root switch Changed Times Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree Topology This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured Time Since Last Change This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol 11 8 Configure Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol To configure MSTP click MSTP in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol screen See Section 11 1 5 on page 110 for more information on MSTP Figure 56 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP C Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Status Bridge Active n Hello Time b seconds MAX Age o seconds Forwarding Delay hs seconds Maximum hops os Configuration Name 001343000002 Revision Number p rool Cone Instance Instance Bridge Priority 0 VLAN Range Start End Add Remove Clear Enabled VLAN s zj Port Active Prority Path Cost r 1 5 hos fig 2 r 128 hs 3 n 128 fis 4 a 128 n9 5 r 128 fig 6 r 128 fig 7 n 128 fig AB AAAATAAK AP a AAAS lE
320. or Specific Attributes VSAs to expand the functionality of a RADIUS server The Switch supports VSAs that allow you to perform the following actions based on user authentication Limit bandwidth on incoming or outgoing traffic for the port the user connects to Assign account privilege levels See the CLI Reference Guide for more information on account privilege levels for the authenticated user The VSAs are composed of the following Vendor ID An identification number assigned to the company by the IANA Internet Assigned Numbers Authority ZyXEU vendor ID is 890 Vendor Type A vendor specified attribute identifying the setting you want to modify Vendor data A value you want to assign to the setting BES Refer to the documentation that comes with your RADIUS server on how to configure VSAs for users authenticating via the RADIUS server The following table describes the VSAs supported on the Switch Table 66 Supported VSAs FUNCTION ATTRIBUTE Ingress Bandwidth Vendor Id 890 Assignment Vendor Type 1 Vendor data ingress rate Kbps in decimal format ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 23 Authentication amp Accounting Table 66 Supported VSAs FUNCTION ATTRIBUTE Egress Bandwidth Vendor Id 890 Assignment Vendor Type 2 Vendor data egress rate Kbps in decimal format Privilege Assignment Vendor ID 890 Vendor Type 3 Vendor Data shell priv lvlzN or Vendo
321. ork only if your ISP or service administrator has enabled this option Normal The server requires a unique User ID and Password to login Transfer Type Transfer files in either ASCII plain text format or in binary mode Configuration and firmware files should be transferred in binary mode Initial Remote Directory Specify the default remote directory path Initial Local Directory Specify the default local directory path 29 8 4 FTP Restrictions FTP will not work when FTP service is disabled in the Service Access Control screen The IP address es in the Remote Management screen does not match the client IP address If it does not match the Switch will disallow the FTP session ES 3148 User s Guide Access Control This chapter describes how to control access to the Switch 30 1 Access Control Overview A console port and FTP are allowed one session each Telnet and SSH share four sessions up to five Web sessions five different user names and passwords and or limitless SNMP access control sessions are allowed Table 96 Access Control Overview Console Port SSH Telnet FTP Web SNMP One session Share up to four One session Up to five accounts No limit sessions A console port access control session and Telnet access control session cannot coexist when multi login is disabled See the CLI Reference Guide for more information on disabling multi login
322. ormation ready when you contact customer support Required Information 66499 Product model and serial number Warranty Information Date that you received your device Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it is the prefix number you dial to make an international telephone call Corporate Headquarters Worldwide Support E mail support zyxel com tw Sales E mail sales zyxel com tw Telephone 886 3 578 3942 Fax 886 3 578 2439 Web www zyxel com www europe zyxel com FTP ftp zyxel com ftp europe zyxel com Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Corp 6 Innovation Road II Science Park Hsinchu 300 Taiwan Costa Rica Support E mail soporte zyxel co cr Sales E mail sales zyxel co cr Telephone 506 2017878 Fax 506 2015098 Web www zyxel co cr FTP ftp zyxel co cr Regular Mail ZyXEL Costa Rica Plaza Roble Escaz Etapa El Patio Tercer Piso San Jos Costa Rica Czech Republic E mail info cz zyxel com Telephone 420 241 091 350 Fax 420 241 091 359 Web www zyxel cz ES 3148 User s Guide Appendix G Customer Support Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Czech s r o Modransk 621 143 01 Praha 4 Modrany Cesk Republika Denmark Support E mail support zyxel dk Sales E mail sales zyxel dk Telephone 45 39 55 07 00 Fax 45 39 55 07 07 Web www zyxel dk Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications A S Columbusvej 2860 Soeborg Denmark Finland
323. ot bridge within the spanning tree instance Enter priority values between 0 and 61440 in increments of 4096 thus valid values are 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 and 61440 ES 3148 User s Guide MO Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 31 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Range Enter the start of the VLAN ID range that you want to add or remove from the VLAN range edit area in the Start field Enter the end of the VLAN ID range that you want to add or remove from the VLAN range edit area in the End field Next click Add to add this range of VLAN s to be mapped to the MST instance Remove to remove this range of VLAN s from being mapped to the MST instance Clear to remove all VLAN s from being mapped to this MST instance Enabled VLAN s This field displays which VLAN s are mapped to this MST instance Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to add this port to the MST instance Priority Configure the
324. ow apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this to permit 802 1x authentication on this port You must first allow 802 1x authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port Reauthentication Specify if a subscriber has to periodically re enter his or her username and password to stay connected to the port Reauthentication Specify how often a client has to re enter his or her username and password to stay Timer connected to the port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 16 2 2 Activate MAC Authentication Use this screen to activate MAC authentication In the Port Authentication screen click MAC Authentication to display the configuration screen as shown ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 16 Port Authentication Figure 70 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt MAC Authentication OMELET Port Authentication Active O Name Prefix Password zyxel Timeout o
325. ow frames belonging to unknown VLAN ES 3148 User s Guide groups to pass through the Switch Chapter 8 VLAN Table 18 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 8 6 Subnet Based VLANs Subnet based VLANs allow you to group traffic into logical VLANs based on the source IP subnet you specify When a frame is received on a port the Switch checks if a tag is added already and the IP subnet it came from The untagged packets from the same IP subnet are then placed in the same subnet based VLAN One advantage of using subnet based VLANs is that priority can be assigned to traffic from the same IP subnet For example an ISP Internet Services Provider may divide different types of services it provides to customers into different IP subnets Traffic for voice services is designated for IP subnet 172 16 1 0 24 video for 192 168 1 0 24 and data for 10 1 1 0 24 The Switch can then be configured to group incoming traffic based on the source IP subnet of incoming frames You configure a subnet based VLAN with priority 6 and VID of 100 for traffi
326. own Status FORWARDING LACP Disabled TxPkts 684 RxPkts 477 Errors 0 Tx KBs s 0 0 Rx KBs s 0 0 Up Time 0 07 42 TX Packet TX Packets 684 Multicast 1 Broadcast 0 Pause 523 Tagged 0 RX Packet RX Packets 518 Multicast 18 Broadcast 0 Pause 0 Control 0 TX Collision Single 0 Multiple 827847 Excessive 0 Late 0 Error Packet RX CRC 0 Length 0 Runt 0 Distribution 64 519 65 to 127 38 128 to 255 59 256 to 511 135 512to 1023 30 1024 to 1518 522 Giant 0 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 8 Status gt Port Details LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Info Port NO This field displays the port number you are viewing Name This field displays the name of the port Link This field displays the speed either 10M for 10Mbps 100M for 100Mbps or 1000M for 1000Mbps and the duplex F for full duplex or H for half duplex It also shows the cable type Copper or Fiber Status If STP Spanning Tree Protocol is enabled this field displays the STP state of the port see Section 11 1 3 on page 109 for more information If STP is disabled this field displays FORWARDING if the link is up otherwise it displays STOP LACP This field shows if LACP is enabled on this port or not TxPkts This field shows the number of transmitted frames on this port RxPkts This field shows the number of received frames on this port Errors This field shows the number of received errors on this port
327. ows the network example using MSTP ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol Figure 47 MSTP Network Example 11 1 5 2 MST Region An MST region is a logical grouping of multiple network devices that appears as a single device to the rest of the network Each MSTP enabled device can only belong to one MST region When BPDUs enter an MST region external path cost of paths outside this region is increased by one Internal path cost of paths within this region is increased by one when BPDUs traverse the region Devices that belong to the same MST region are configured to have the same MSTP configuration identification settings These include the following parameters Name of the MST region Revision level as the unique number for the MST region VLAN to MST Instance mapping 11 1 5 3 MST Instance An MST Instance MSTI is a spanning tree instance VLANs can be configured to run on a specific MSTI Each created MSTI is identified by a unique number known as an MST ID known internally to a region Thus an MSTI does not span across MST regions The following figure shows an example where there are two MST regions Regions 1 and 2 have 2 spanning tree instances ES 3148 User s Guide 111 Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol Figure 48 MSTIs in Different Regions Physical Connection Region 1 Region 2 11 1 5 4 Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST A CIST represents the conne
328. ows you how to configure policy rules 19 1 Policy Rules Overview A classifier distinguishes traffic into flows based on the configured criteria refer to Chapter 18 on page 149 for more information A policy rule ensures that a traffic flow gets the requested treatment in the network 19 1 1 DiffServ DiffServ Differentiated Services is a class of service CoS model that marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points DSCPs indicating the level of service desired This allows the intermediary DiffServ compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow In addition applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going 19 1 2 DSCP and Per Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new DS Differentiated Services field to replace the Type of Service TOS field in the IP header The DS field contains a 2 bit unused field and a 6 bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels The following figure illustrates the DS field DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non DiffServ compliant ToS enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping
329. path and file name of the configuration file you wish to restore in the File Path text box or click Browse to locate it After you have specified the file click Restore config is the name of the configuration file on the Switch so your backup configuration file is automatically renamed when you restore using this screen 29 7 Backup a Configuration File Backing up your Switch configurations allows you to create various snap shots of your device from which you may restore at a later date Back up your current Switch configuration to a computer using the Backup Configuration screen Figure 137 Management gt Maintenance gt Backup Configuration OLATI Maintenance This page allows you to back up the device s current configuration to your workstation Now click the Backup button Backup Follow the steps below to back up the current Switch configuration to your computer in this screen 1 Click Backup 2 Click Save to display the Save As screen 3 Choose a location to save the file on your computer from the Save in drop down list box and type a descriptive name for it in the File name list box Click Save to save the configuration file to your computer ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 29 Maintenance 29 8 FTP Command Line This section shows some examples of uploading to or downloading files from the Switch using FTP commands First understand the filename conventions 29 8 1 Filename Conventi
330. pecified range of VLANs in the section below VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above If you configure the VLAN the settings are applied to all VLANs Enabled Select Yes to enable ARP inspection on the VLAN Select No to disable ARP inspection on the VLAN Log Specify when the Switch generates log messages for receiving ARP packets from the VLAN None The Switch does not generate any log messages when it receives an ARP packet from the VLAN Deny The Switch generates log messages when it discards an ARP packet from the VLAN Permit The Switch generates log messages when it forwards an ARP packet from the VLAN All The Switch generates log messages every time it receives an ARP packet from the VLAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values ES 3148 User s Guide Loop Guard This chapter shows you how to configure the Switch to guard against loops on the edge of your network 25 1 Loop Guard Overview Loop guard allows you to configure the Switch to shut down a port if it detects that packets sent out on that port loop back to the Switch While you can use Span
331. previously marked for dropping to queue the frames that are marked to be dropped Add Click Add to inset the entry to the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults 19 3 Viewing and Editing Policy Configuration To view a summary of the classifier configuration scroll down to the summary table at the bottom of the Policy screen To change the settings of a rule click a number in the Index field Figure 76 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule Summary Table Index Active 1 Yes Name Delete Test Classifier s Example rH Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 50 Policy Summary Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the policy index number Click an index number to edit the policy Active This field displays Yes when policy is activated and No when is it deactivated Name This field displays the name you have assigned to this policy Classifier s This field displays the name s of the classifier to which this policy applies Delete Click Delete to remove the select
332. priority for each port here Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in the Switch Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first The allowed range is between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128 Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port It is recommended to assign this value according to the speed of the bridge The slower the media the higher the cost see Table 24 on page 108 for more information Add Click Add to save this MST instance to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses this change if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Instance This field displays the ID of an MST instance VLAN This field displays the VID or VID ranges to which the MST instance is mapped Active Port This field display the ports configured to participate in the MST instance Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 11 9 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Status Click Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the status screen as show
333. properties of their respective owners Certifications Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Statement This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operations ES 3148 User s Guide Appendix F Legal Information FCC Warning This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital switch pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a commercial environment This device generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this device in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense CE Mark Warning This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Taiwanese BSMI Bureau of Standards Metrology and Inspection A Warning See iB AE FE allem TERHEBUIRSEDERINS ARERR Sila T ABS eA SH STR Notices Changes or modifications not expressly approv
334. r Fonts amp Colors Default Font Times New Roman Size 16 v Colors r File Types Configure how Firefox handles certain types of Files Manage rp Cancel Help ES 3148 User s Guide Appendix B Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions ES 3148 User s Guide IP Addresses and Subnetting This appendix introduces IP addresses and subnet masks IP addresses identify individual devices on a network Every networking device including computers servers routers printers etc needs an IP address to communicate across the network These networking devices are also known as hosts Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub networks Introduction to IP Addresses One part of the IP address is the network number and the other part is the host ID In the same way that houses on a street share a common street name the hosts on a network share a common network number Similarly as each house has its own house number each host on the network has its own unique identifying number the host ID Routers use the network number to send packets to the correct network while the host ID determines to which host on the network the packets are delivered Structure An IP address is made up of four parts written in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 Each of these fo
335. r ID 9 CISCO Vendor Type 1 CISCO AVPAIR Vendor Data shell priv lvlzN where N is a privilege level from O to 14 Note If you set the privilege level of a login account differently on the RADIUS server s and the Switch the user is assigned a privilege level from the database RADIUS or local the Switch uses first for user authentication 23 2 4 1 Tunnel Protocol Attribute You can configure tunnel protocol attributes on the RADIUS server refer to your RADIUS server documentation to assign a port on the Switch to a VLAN based on IEEE 802 1x authentication The port VLAN settings are fixed and untagged This will also set the port s VID The following table describes the values you need to configure Note that the bolded values in the table are fixed values as defined in RFC 3580 Table 67 Supported Tunnel Protocol Attribute FUNCTION ATTRIBUTE VLAN Assignment Tunnel Type VLAN 13 Tunnel Medium Type 802 6 Tunnel Private Group ID VLAN ID Note You must also create a VLAN with the specified VID on the Switch 23 3 Supported RADIUS Attributes Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS attributes are data used to define specific authentication and accounting elements in a user profile which is stored on the RADIUS server This appendix lists the RADIUS attributes supported by the Switch Refer to RFC 2865 for more information about RADIUS attributes used for authentication
336. r IEEE 802 1Q tag in the Port Setup screen 0 is the lowest priority level and 7 is the highest VID is the VLAN ID SP VID is the VID for the second service provider s VLAN tag 21 3 1 Frame Format The frame format for an untagged Ethernet frame a single tagged 802 1Q frame customer and a double tagged 802 1Q frame service provider is shown next Configure the fields as highlighted in the Switch VLAN Stacking screen Table 53 Single and Double Tagged 802 11Q Frame Format DA SA Len Data FCS Untagged Etype Ethernet frame DA SA TPID Priority VID Len Data FCS IEEE 802 1Q Etype customer tagged frame DA SA SPTPID Priority VID TPID Priority VID Len Data FCS Double tagged Etype frame Table 54 802 1Q Frame DA Destination Address Priority 802 1p Priority SA Source Address Len Length and type of Ethernet frame Etype ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking Table 54 802 1Q Frame SP TPID Service Provider Tag Protocol IDentifier Data Frame data VID VLAN ID FCS Frame Check Sequence 21 4 Configuring VLAN Stacking Click Advanced Applications gt VLAN Stacking to display the screen as shown Figure 80 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking oRuENEIEBUGn aD Active 1 o oxe100 j SP TPID Others Hex Port Role Priority Normal z TTL Seer rene
337. r Switch C gt ftp 192 168 1 1 Connected to 192 168 1 1 220 Switch FTP version 1 0 ready at Thu Jan 1 00 58 46 1970 User 192 168 0 1 none admin 331 Enter PASS command Password 230 Logged in ftp 1s 200 Port command okay 150 Opening data connection for LIST W Ww wW 1 owner group 3042210 Jul 01 12 00 ras rw rw rw 1 owner group 393216 Jul 01 12 00 config w w wWw 1 owner group O Jul 01 12 00 fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 rw rw rw 1 owner group 0 Jul 01 12 00 config 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 226 File sent OK ftp 297 bytes received in 0 00Seconds 297000 00Kbytes sec ftp bin 200 Type I OK ftp put 3701t0 bin fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 200 Port command okay 150 Opening data connection for STOR fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 226 File received OK ftp 262144 bytes sent in 0 63Seconds 415 44Kbytes sec ftp The following table explains some of the FTP parameters Table 114 FTP Upload to Cluster Member Example FTP PARAMETER DESCRIPTION User Enter admin Password The web configurator password default is 1234 ls Enter this command to list the name of cluster member switch s firmware and configuration file 3601t0 bin This is the name of the firmware file you want to upload to the cluster member switch fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 This is the cluster member switch s firmware name as seen in the cluster manager switch config 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 This is the cluster member switch s configu
338. r instructs you to do so Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external TACACS accounting server and the Switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external TACACS accounting server and the Switch Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing TACACS accounting server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 23 2 3 Authentication and Accounting Setup Use this screen to configure authentication and accounting settings on the Switch Click on the Auth and Acct Setup link in the Authentication and Accounting screen to view the screen as shown ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 23 Authentication amp Accounting Figure 97 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt Auth and Acct Setup Authentication Type Privilege Enable Login Accounting Update Period OENE o minutes Type Active Broadcast Mode Method Privilege System O E radius gt Exec O 0 start stop v radius gt Dol B B nel recius Mi C
339. r of MAC address filters that were created because the Switch identified unauthorized ARP packets Index This field displays a sequential number for each MAC address filter MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address in the MAC address filter VID This field displays the source VLAN ID in the MAC address filter Port This field displays the source port of the discarded ARP packet Expiry sec This field displays how long in seconds the MAC address filter remains in the Switch You can also delete the record manually Delete Reason This field displays the reason the ARP packet was discarded MAC VLAN The MAC address and VLAN ID were not in the binding table IP The MAC address and VLAN ID were in the binding table but the IP address was not valid Port The MAC address VLAN ID and IP address were in the binding table but the port number was not valid Delete Select this and click Delete to remove the specified entry Delete Click this to remove the selected entries Cancel Click this to clear the Delete check boxes above 24 6 1 ARP Inspection VLAN Status Use this screen to look at various statistics about ARP packets in each VLAN To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt VLAN Status 212 ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 24 IP Source Guard Figure 107 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt VLAN Status C
340. r when a user begins a session during a user s session if it lasts past the Update Period and when a user ends a session stop only to have the Switch send information to the accounting server only when a user ends a session Method Select whether you want to use RADIUS or TACACS for accounting of specific types of events TACACS is the only method for recording Commands type of event Privilege This field is only configurable for Commands type of event Select the threshold command privilege level for which the Switch should send accounting information The Switch will send accounting information when commands at the level you specify and higher are executed on the Switch ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 23 Authentication amp Accounting Table 65 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt Auth and Acct Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 23 2 4 Vendor Specific Attribute RFC 2865 standard specifies a method for sending vendor specific information between a RADIUS server and a network access device for example the Switch A company can create Vend
341. ration file name as seen in the cluster manager switch 33 3 Clustering Management Configuration Use this screen to configure clustering management Click Configuration from the Cluster Management screen to display the next screen 272 ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 33 Cluster Management Figure 159 Management gt Clustering Management gt Configuration Clusterin anagement Configuration Status Clustering Manager Active Iv Name Master VID fi Apply Cancel Clustering Candidate 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 GS 2024 List Password Add Cancel Refresh Index MacAddr Name Model Remove Remove Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 115 Management gt Clustering Management gt Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Clustering Manager Active Select Active to have this Switch become the cluster manager switch A cluster can only have one manager Other directly connected switches that are set to be cluster managers will not be visible in the Clustering Candidates list If a switch that was previously a cluster member is later set to become a cluster manager then its Status is displayed as Error in the Cluster Management Status screen and a warning icon A appears in the member summary list below Name Type a name to identify the Clustering Manager You may use up to 32 printable characters spaces are allowed VID Thi
342. reate a static route Table 84 IP Application gt Static Routing LABEL DESCRIPTION Active This field allows you to activate deactivate this static route Name Enter a descriptive name up to 10 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Destination IP This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination Routing is Address always based on network number If you need to specify a route to a single host use a subnet mask of 255 255 255 255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID IP Subnet Enter the subnet mask for this destination Mask ES 3148 User s Guide 223 Chapter 26 Static Routing Table 84 IP Application gt Static Routing continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Gateway IP Enter the IP address of the gateway The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your Address Switch that will forward the packet to the destination The gateway must be a router on the same segment as your Switch Metric The metric represents the cost of transmission for routing purposes IP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks Enter a number that approximates the cost for this link The number need not be precise but it must be between 1 and 15 In practice 2 or 3 is usually a good number Add Click Add to insert a new static route to the Switch
343. rian 236 28 4 1 Example DHCP Relay for Two VLANS 1 enia irata had taba tak or na ko 238 Chapter 29 Mamtonanto mem 239 29 1 The Maintenance Aen a 239 ES 3148 User s Guide Table of Contents Era ns epa sosia 240 Pao Soe irae TTL o o m ESSE 240 204 Reboot Syse M 241 2 o FNIS c 241 29 0 Restore a C niguralon FIS serisi nannan N 242 290 7 Backup a Configuration Fie ccisicstesssissstendascatosoiaaessioncbastiscesitascetcniagesdinach aeastosbdascrtece 242 CUN MIETEN 243 20 8 1 Filetigne Convenios 21nssiediu d zm vc iren penu Pri itbse vin a ERR e aaa 243 2988 2 FTP Command Line Procedure 2 ctii ird tere dide pd do d ane 243 POS SUI hssed FIP CEMS iiie erepti a teta adh ERES pata uu Heind das e 244 20 0 FTP RESIOIONS e M 244 Chapter 30 Access Pal ll MEMM 245 30 1 Access Control Overview usieeesedittoaad adiu epu angu RA ARR REA M EENAA EEEREN KA apa EM anda 245 30 2 The Actess Control Main Stroh serrare ana 245 CU APWANN E siana A daGeudadingtes 246 ULT SNMP v3 and SOOHBB iesus circi anode tu piter LatveuleutidGapinaaends ENEAS EERENS ESEE EENE 247 20 3 7 Supported MIBE iiuiinteisiselie bic ovid e ann Volkes ianiai ei eL PV ELN ARN ES V EM RUE aufs 247 21003 2 SIME Nc gt gies ee ee bdo tube Erb ich ttti elita d ae 247 Ca
344. rnet connection on this port Choices are Auto 10M Half Duplex 10M Full Duplex 100M Half Duplex 100M Full Duplex and 1000M Full Duplex for Gigabit ports only Selecting Auto auto negotiation allows one port to negotiate with a peer port automatically to obtain the connection speed and duplex mode that both ends support When auto negotiation is turned on a port on the Switch negotiates with the peer automatically to determine the connection speed and duplex mode If the peer port does not support auto negotiation or turns off this feature the Switch determines the connection speed by detecting the signal on the cable and using half duplex mode When the Switch s auto negotiation is turned off a port uses the pre configured speed and duplex mode when making a connection thus requiring you to make sure that the settings of the peer port are the same in order to connect Flow Control A concentration of traffic on a port decreases port bandwidth and overflows buffer memory causing packet discards and frame losses Flow Control is used to regulate transmission of signals to match the bandwidth of the receiving port The Switch uses IEEE 802 3x flow control in full duplex mode and backpressure flow control in half duplex mode IEEE 802 3x flow control is used in full duplex mode to send a pause signal to the sending port causing it to temporarily stop sending signals when the receiving port memory buffers fill Back Pressure flow co
345. rt based VLANs 8 1 Introduction to IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLANs A tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag VLAN ID in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges they are not confined to the switch on which they were created The VLANs can be created statically by hand or dynamically through GVRP The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that switches need to process the frame across the network A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an untagged frame and contains two bytes of TPID Tag Protocol Identifier residing within the type length field of the Ethernet frame and two bytes of TCI Tag Control Information starts after the source address field of the Ethernet frame The CFI Canonical Format Indicator is a single bit flag always set to zero for Ethernet switches If a frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1 then that frame should not be forwarded as it is to an untagged port The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID giving a possible maximum number of 4 096 VLANs Note that user priority and VLAN ID are independent of each other A frame with VID VLAN Identifier of null 0 is called a priority frame meaning that only the priority level is significant and the default VID of the ingress port is given as the VID of the frame Of the 4096 possible VIDs a VID of 0 is used to identify priority frames and value 4095 FFF is reserved so the maximum possible VLA
346. runking Example Physical Connections ssssssseee eene enne 136 Figure 65 Trunking Example Configuration Sereen iiec serre ttr tte Eth rr pna tuneaswuuiveneaswenvternacauavvenee 137 Figure 66 IEEE 802 1x Authentication FETOGOBS i2 idet rate Rodi Rada t adt i add Hace d edt 140 Figure 67 MAC Aulheniication PEROGIBS 1 dee cir ER ee MREbpraqI RE brH IN ERE bp N pub EUD QE MAEbPU HM a 140 Figure 68 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication cccccccceeeceeceeeceeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeenesnneneaeess 141 Figure 69 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1x sssssssssssssseeeeee 141 Figure 70 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt MAC Authentication sssssssss 143 Figure 71 Advanced Application gt Port SeCurihy saiccsssscssserssssscnserss pntat x Y bove th X e FI 33S Read dS he an sue 146 Figure 72 Advanced Application gt Classifier 1 iuiuios esce berto ERN P FR eH LEE Fia exa EE PEE WEE eoe Saaana ndai kadai 150 Figure 73 Advanced Application gt Classifier Summary Table eee 152 zc NL Ee cessi e P 154 Figure 75 Advanced Application gt Policy RUIG ususckerpeses2e Epp eH aar Eve d ee Fu PPIH Ye EERE PATE c Ex Led ee He pH Ye AR RING 156 Figure 76 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule Summary Table sse 158 s DX Poley i ean EENES EDSS AEE 159 Figure 78 Advanced Application gt Queuing Method sesssssss
347. rver validates whether this client is allowed access to the port 2 Atthe time of writing IEEE 802 1x is not supported by all operating systems See your operating system documentation If your operating system does not support 802 1x then you may need to install 802 1x client software ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 16 Port Authentication Figure 66 IEEE 802 1x Authentication Process N New Connection Login Info Request Login Credentials 4 Authentication Request EO E A Authentication Reply Session Granted Denied 16 1 2 MAC Authentication MAC authentication works in a very similar way to IEEE 802 1x authentication The main difference is that the Switch does not prompt the client for login credentials The login credentials are based on the source MAC address of the client connecting to a port on the Switch along with a password configured specifically for MAC authentication on the Switch Figure 67 MAC Authentication Process New Connection Authentication Request E M ETO T T E A Authentication Reply Session Granted Denied ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 16 Port Authentication 16 2 Port Authentication Configuration To enable port authentication first activate the port authentication method s you want to use both on the Switch and the port s then configure the RADIUS server settings in the Auth and Acct gt Radius Server Setup screen
348. s 95 98 Me Click Start Settings Control Panel and double click the Network icon to open the Network window ES 3148 User s Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 165 WIndows 95 98 Me Network Configuration LPR for TCP IP Printing 3Com EtherLink 10 100 PCI TX NIC 3C905B TX Dial Up Adapter USB Fast Ethernet Adapter Y TCP IP gt 3Com EtherLink 10 100 PCI TX NIC 3C905B T Ij Ff Client for Microsoft Networks sl Installing Components The Network window Configuration tab displays a list of installed components You need a network adapter the TCP IP protocol and Client for Microsoft Networks If you need the adapter 1 Inthe Network window click Add 2 Select Adapter and then click Add 3 Select the manufacturer and model of your network adapter and then click OK If you need TCP IP 1 Inthe Network window click Add 2 Select Protocol and then click Add 3 Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers 4 Select TCP IP from the list of network protocols and then click OK If you need Client for Microsoft Networks 1 Click Add 2 Select Client and then click Add 3 Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers 4 Select Client for Microsoft Networks from the list of network clients and then click OK 5 Restart your computer so the changes you made take effect ES 3148 User s Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Configuring 1 Inth
349. s and Notes These are how warnings and notes are shown in this User s Guide lt gt Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device BS Notes tell you other important information for example other things you may need to configure or helpful tips or recommendations Syntax Conventions The ES 3148 may be referred to as the Switch the device the system or the product in this User s Guide Product labels screen names field labels and field choices are all in bold font A key stroke 1s denoted by square brackets and uppercase text for example ENTER means the enter or return key on your keyboard Enter means for you to type one or more characters and then press the ENTER key Select or choose means for you to use one of the predefined choices A right angle bracket gt within a screen name denotes a mouse click For example Maintenance gt Log gt Log Setting means you first click Maintenance in the navigation panel then the Log sub menu and finally the Log Setting tab to get to that screen Units of measurement may denote the metric value or the scientific value For example k for kilo may denote 1000 or 1024 M for mega may denote 1000000 or 1048576 and so on e g is a Shorthand for for instance and i e means that is or in other words ES 3148 User s Guide D
350. s connection Amber for 100 Mbps connection Per Gigabit Ethernet RJ 45 port LNK ACT FDX Per Dual Personality Interface Gigabit Ethernet RJ 45 port 100 1000 Mini GBIC slot LNK ACT Per management port 10 100 Dimension 438 mm W x 270 mm D x 44 45 mm H Standard 19 rack mountable Device Weight 4 2 Kg Temperature Operating 0 C 45 C Storage 25 C 70 C Humidity 10 90 non condensing Power Supply Overload protection 100 240 VAC 60 W 1 5 A max Safety ANS UL 60950 1 CSA 60950 1 EN 60950 1 IEC 60950 1 EMC FCC Part 15 Class A CE EMC Class A ES 3148 User s Guide 287 Chapter 38 Product Specifications 288 Table 120 Feature Specifications FEATURE DESCRIPTION Layer 2 Bridging 16K MAC addresses Static MAC address filtering port lock Broadcast storm control Limited maximum number of MAC addresses per port Switching Switching fabric 13 6Gbps non blocking Max Frame size 1522 bytes Forwarding frame IEEE 802 3 IEEE 802 1q Ethernet Il PPPoE Prevent the forwarding of corrupted packets STP IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Up to 6 STP configurations QoS IEEE 802 1p Eight priority queues Supports RFC 2475 DiffServ DSCP to IEEE 802 1p priority mapping VLAN Port based VLAN setting T
351. s is the VLAN ID and is only applicable if the Switch is set to 802 1Q VLAN All switches must be directly connected and in the same VLAN group to belong to the same cluster Switches that are not in the same VLAN group are not visible in the Clustering Candidates list This field is ignored if the Clustering Manager is using Port based VLAN ES 3148 User s Guide 273 Chapter 33 Cluster Management 274 Table 115 Management gt Clustering Management gt Configuration continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clustering Candidate The following fields relate to the switches that are potential cluster members List A list of suitable candidates found by auto discovery is shown here The switches must be directly connected Directly connected switches that are set to be cluster managers will not be visible in the Clustering Candidate list Switches that are not in the same management VLAN group will not be visible in the Clustering Candidate list Password Each cluster member s password is its web configurator password Select a member in the Clustering Candidate list a
352. s kept separate 21 1 1 VLAN Stacking Example In the following example figure both A and B are Service Provider s Network SPN customers with VPN tunnels between their head offices and branch offices respectively Both have an identical VLAN tag for their VLAN group The service provider can separate these two VLANSs within its network by adding tag 37 to distinguish customer A and tag 48 to distinguish customer B at edge device 1 and then stripping those tags at edge device 2 as the data frames leave the network ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking Figure 79 VLAN Stacking Example A A VLAN 24 VLAN 24 21 2 VLAN Stacking Port Roles Each port can have three VLAN stacking roles Normal Access Port and Tunnel the latter is for Gigabit ports only Select Normal for regular non VLAN stacking IEEE 802 1Q frame switching Select Access Port for ingress ports on the service provider s edge devices 1 and 2 in the VLAN stacking example figure The incoming frame is treated as untagged so a second VLAN tag outer VLAN tag can be added BS Static VLAN Tx Tagging MUST be disabled on a port where you choose Normal or Access Port Select Tunnel Port available for Gigabit ports only for egress ports at the edge of the service provider s network All VLANs belonging to a customer can be aggregated into a single service provider s VLAN using the outer VLAN tag defined by SP VID
353. s screen afresh ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 30 Access Control ES 3148 User s Guide Diagnostic This chapter explains the Diagnostic screen 31 1 Diagnostic Click Management gt Diagnostic in the navigation panel to open this screen Use this screen to check system logs ping IP addresses or perform port tests Figure 152 Management gt Diagnostic E Diagnostic g Resolving 192 168 1 23 192 168 1 23 Reply from 192 168 1 23 Reply from 192 168 1 23 Reply from 192 168 1 23 Ping Host Successful Ei System Log Display Clear IP Ping IP Address Ping Ethernet Port Test Port 1 Port Test The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 108 Management gt Diagnostic LABEL DESCRIPTION System Log Click Display to display a log of events in the multi line text box Click Clear to empty the text box and reset the syslog entry IP Ping Type the IP address of a device that you want to ping in order to test a connection Click Ping to have the Switch ping the IP address in the field to the left Ethernet Port Test Enter a port number and click Port Test to perform an internal loopback test ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 31 Diagnostic ES 3148 User s Guide Syslog This chapter explains the syslog screens 32 1 Syslog Overview The syslog protocol allows devices to send event notification messages across an IP network
354. s stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would select First Sunday November and 2 00 Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would select Last Sunday October and the last field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would select 2 00 because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 7 4 Introduction to VLANs A VLAN Virtual Local Area Network allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Devices on a logical network belong to one group A device can belong to more than one group With VLAN a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group s the traffic must first go through a router In MTU Multi Tenant Unit applications VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the subscribers When properly configured VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the net
355. se the port number was a trusted interface or does not exist anymore Parse failures This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the Switch was unable to understand the binding in the DHCP binding database Expired leases This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the lease time had already expired Unsupported vians This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the VLAN ID does not exist anymore Last ignored time This field displays the last time the Switch ignored any bindings for any reason from the DHCP binding database Total ignored bindings counters This section displays the reasons the Switch has ignored bindings any time it read bindings from the DHCP binding database You can clear these counters by restarting the Switch or using CLI commands See the CLI Reference Guide Binding collisions This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the Switch already had a binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID Invalid interfaces This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the port number was a trusted interface or does not exist anymore Parse failures This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the Switch was unable to understand the binding in the DHCP binding database Expired leases This field displays the nu
356. sends an update to the accounting server This is only valid if you select the start stop option for the Exec or Dot1x entries Type The Switch supports the following types of events to be sent to the accounting server s System Configure the Switch to send information when the following system events occur system boots up system shuts down system accounting is enabled system accounting is disabled Exec Configure the Switch to send information when an administrator logs in and logs out via the console port telnet or SSH Dot1x Configure the Switch to send information when an IEEE 802 1x client begins a session authenticates via the Switch ends a session as well as interim updates of a session Commands Configure the Switch to send information when commands of specified privilege level and higher are executed on the Switch Active Select this to activate accounting for a specified event types Broadcast Select this to have the Switch send accounting information to all configured accounting servers at the same time If you don t select this and you have two accounting servers set up then the Switch sends information to the first accounting server and if it doesn t get a response from the accounting server then it tries the second accounting server Mode The Switch supports two modes of recording login events Select e start stop to have the Switch send information to the accounting serve
357. side of the rack Figure 8 Mounting the Switch on a Rack L I D DL U l D D S L A D e o D of Bn D O Un 3 DB Bn dB o E D D D N E qmi m 2 Using a 2 Phillips screwdriver install the MS flat head screws through the mounting bracket holes into the rack 3 Repeat steps and 2 to attach the second mounting bracket on the other side of the rack ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection ES 3148 User s Guide Hardware Overview This chapter describes the front panel and rear panel of the Switch and shows you how to make the hardware connections 3 1 Panel Connections The figure below shows the front panel of the Switch Figure 9 Front Panel 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Ports RJ 45 Gigabit Mini GBIC Dual Personality Interfaces The following table describes the ports on the panels Table 1 Front Panel CONNECTOR DESCRIPTION 48 10 100 Connect these ports to a computer a hub an Ethernet switch or router Mbps RJ 45 Ethernet Ports Two Dual Each interface has one 1000 Base T RJ 45 port and one Small Form Factor Personality Pluggable SFP slot also called a mini GBIC slot with one port or transceiver Interfaces active at a time 2 100 1000 Connect these ports to high bandwidth backbone network Ethernet switches
358. t Priority system priority and lowest port number if system priority is the same becomes the LACP server The LACP server controls the operation of LACP setup Enter a number to set the priority of an active port using Link Aggregate Control Protocol LACP The smaller the number the higher the priority level Group ID The field identifies the link aggregation group that is one logical link containing multiple ports LACP Active Select this option to enable LACP for a trunk Port This field displays the port number ES 3148 User s Guide 135 Chapter 15 Link Aggregation Table 40 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP LABEL DESCRIPTION Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them LACP Timeout Timeout is the time interval between the individual port exchanges of LACP packets in order to check that the peer port in the trunk group is still up If a port does not respond after three tries then it is deemed to be down and is removed from the trunk Set a short timeout one second for busy trunked links to ensure that disabled ports are removed from the trunk group as soon as possible
359. t topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state otherwise temporary data loops might result The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds As a general rule Note 2 Forward Delay 1 gt Max Age gt 2 Hello Time 1 Maximum hops Enter the number of hops between 1 and 255 in an MSTP region before the BPDU is discarded and the port information is aged Configuration Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 characters of an MST region Revision Number Enter a number to identify a region s configuration Devices must have the same revision number to belong to the same region Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Instance Use this section to configure MSTI Multiple Spanning Tree Instance settings Instance Enter the number you want to use to identify this MST instance on the Switch The Switch supports instance numbers 0 16 Bridge Priority Set the priority of the Switch for the specific spanning tree instance The lower the number the more likely the Switch will be chosen as the ro
360. t network numbers For example if a router is set between a LAN and the Internet WAN the router s LAN and WAN addresses must be on different subnets In the following example the LAN and WAN are on the same subnet The LAN computers cannot access the Internet because the router cannot route between networks Figure 211 Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example LAN scien par WAN f B NG E A 192 168 1 88 Z mm d Tl L L L LI ES 3148 User s Guide 333 Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting Conflicting Computer and Router IP Addresses Example More than one device can not use the same IP address In the following example the computer and the router s LAN port both use 192 168 1 1 as the IP address The computer cannot access the Internet This problem can be solved by assigning a different IP address to the computer or the router s LAN port Figure 212 Conflicting Computer and Router IP Addresses Example m um um um um um EEE T 1 192 168 1 1 1 OUR i NW i gt 1 192 168 1 1 Internet Ramee eee ES 3148 User s Guide Common Services The following table lists some commonly used services and their associated protocols and port numbers For a comprehensive list of port numbers ICMP type code numbers and services visit the IANA Internet Assigned Number Authority web site Name This is a short descriptive name for the ser
361. t the configuration to the factory default settings Default ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 29 Maintenance Table 93 Management gt Maintenance continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Save Click Config 1 to save the current configuration settings to Configuration 1 on the Configuration Switch Click Config 2 to save the current configuration settings to Configuration 2 on the Switch Reboot Click Config 1 to reboot the system and load Configuration 1 on the Switch System Click Config 2 to reboot the system and load Configuration 2 on the Switch Note Make sure to click the Save button in any screen to save your settings to the current configuration on the Switch 29 2 Load Factory Default Follow the steps below to reset the Switch back to the factory defaults 1 Inthe Maintenance screen click the Click Here button next to Load Factory Default to clear all Switch configuration information you configured and return to the factory defaults 2 Click OK to reset all Switch configurations to the factory defaults Figure 133 Load Factory Default Start Microsoft Internet Explorer j x 2 Are you sure you want to load Factory default 3 Inthe web configurator click the Save button to make the changes take effect If you want to access the Switch web configurator again you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default Switch IP address 192
362. tatic and dynamic LACP port trunking When you enable LACP Iink aggregation on a port the port can automatically negotiate with the ports at the remote end of a link to establish trunk groups LACP also allows port redundancy that is if an operational port fails then one of the standby ports become operational without user intervention Please note that You must connect all ports point to point to the same Ethernet switch and configure the ES 3148 User s Guide ports for LACP trunking Chapter 15 Link Aggregation LACP only works on full duplex links All ports in the same trunk group must have the same media type speed duplex mode and flow control settings Configure trunk groups or LACP before you connect the Ethernet switch to avoid causing network topology loops 15 2 1 Link Aggregation ID LACP aggregation ID consists of the following information Table 36 Link Aggregation ID Local Switch SYSTEM PRIORITY MAC ADDRESS KEY PORT PRIORITY PORT NUMBER 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 Table 37 Link Aggregation ID Peer Switch SYSTEM PRIORITY MAC ADDRESS KEY PORT PRIORITY PORT NUMBER 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 15 3 Link Aggregation Status Click Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation in the navigation panel The Link Aggregation Status screen displays by default See Section 15 1 on page 131 for more information Figure 61 Advanced Appl
363. tch helps to relay network information such as the IP address and subnet mask between a DHCP client and a DHCP server Once the DHCP client obtains an IP address and can connect to the network network information renewal is done between the DHCP client and the DHCP server without the help of the Switch The Switch can be configured as a global DHCP relay This means that the Switch forwards all DHCP requests from all domains to the same DHCP server You can also configure the Switch to relay DHCP information based on the VLAN membership of the DHCP clients 28 3 1 DHCP Relay Agent Information The Switch can add information about the source of client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server by adding Relay Agent Information This helps provide authentication about the source of the requests The DHCP server can then provide an IP address based on this information Please refer to RFC 3046 for more details The DHCP Relay Agent Information feature adds an Agent Information field to the Option 82 field The Option 82 field is in the DHCP headers of client DHCP request frames that the Switch relays to a DHCP server Relay Agent Information can include the System Name of the Switch if you select this option You can change the System Name in Basic Settings gt General Setup ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 28 DHCP The following describes the DHCP relay information that the Switch sends to the DHCP server Tab
364. ter the ID of a VLAN with which the untagged frames from the IP subnet specified in this subnet based VLAN are tagged This must be an existing VLAN which you defined in the Advanced Applications VLAN screens Priority Select the priority level that the Switch assigns to frames belonging to this VLAN Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Index This is the index number identifying this subnet based VLAN Click on any of these numbers to edit an existing subnet based VLAN Active This field shows whether the subnet based VLAN is active or not Name This field shows the name the subnet based VLAN IP This field shows the IP address of the subnet for this subnet based VLAN Mask Bits This field shows the subnet mask in bit number format for this subnet based VLAN Source Port This field shows the port to which this subnet based VLAN is bound VID This field shows the VLAN ID of the frames which belong to this subnet based VLAN Priority This field shows the priority which is assigned to frames belonging to this subnet based VLAN Delete Click this to delete the subnet based VLANs which you marked for deletion Cancel Click Canc
365. ters spaces are allowed VLAN Group ID Enter the VLAN ID for this static entry the valid range is between 1 and 4094 Port The port number identifies the port you are configuring Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Control Select Normal for the port to dynamically join this VLAN group using GVRP This is the default selection Select Fixed for the port to be a permanent member of this VLAN group Select Forbidden if you want to prohibit the port from joining this VLAN group Tagging Select TX Tagging if you want the port to tag all outgoing frames transmitted with this VLAN Group ID Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to start configuring the screen again VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group Click the number to edit the VLAN settings Active This field indicates whether the VLAN settings
366. that houses a transmitter and a receiver The Switch does not come with transceivers You must use transceivers that comply with the SFP Transceiver MultiSource Agreement MSA See the SFF committee s INF 80741 specification Rev 1 0 for details There are two pairs of Gigabit Ethernet mini GBIC ports The mini GBIC ports have priority over the Gigabit ports This means that if a mini GBIC port and the corresponding Gigabit port are connected at the same time the Gigabit port will be disabled You can change transceivers while the Switch is operating You can use different transceivers to connect to Ethernet switches with different types of fiber optic connectors Type SFP connection interface Connection speed 1 Gigabit per second Gbps To avoid possible eye injury do not look into an operating fiber optic module s connectors 3 1 2 1 Transceiver Installation Use the following steps to install a mini GBIC transceiver SFP module 1 Insert the transceiver into the slot with the exposed section of PCB board facing down ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview Figure 10 Transceiver Installation Example LES 2 Press the transceiver firmly until it clicks into place 3 The Switch automatically detects the installed transceiver Check the LEDs to verify that it is functioning properly Figure 11 Installed Transceiver 3 1 2 2 Transceiver Removal Use the following steps t
367. the IEEE 802 1p priority mapping select the priority level from the drop down list box Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES 3148 User s Guide 231 Chapter 27 Differentiated Services 232 ES 3148 User s Guide DHCP This chapter shows you how to configure the DHCP feature 28 1 DHCP Overview DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual computers to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a server You can configure the Switch as a DHCP relay agent If you configure the Switch as a relay agent then the Switch forwards DHCP requests to DHCP server on your network If you don t configure the Switch as a relay agent then you must have a DHCP server in the broadcast domain of the client computers or else the client computers must be configured manually 28 1 1 DHCP Modes If there is already a DHCP server on your network then you can configure the Switch as a DHCP relay agent When the Switch receives a request from a computer on your network it contacts the DHCP server for the necessary IP information and then relays the assigned information back to the computer
368. the Switch Please refer to the following figure 1 HTTPS connection requests from an SSL aware web browser go to port 443 by default on the Switch s WS web server 2 HTTP connection requests from a web browser go to port 80 by default on the Switch s WS web server ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 30 Access Control Figure 145 HTTPS Implementation WS 443 HTTPS HTTP BES If you disable HTTP in the Service Access Control screen then the Switch blocks all HTTP connection attempts 30 8 HTTPS Example If you haven t changed the default HTTPS port on the Switch then in your browser enter https Switch IP Address as the web site address where Switch IP Address is the IP address or domain name of the Switch you wish to access 30 8 1 Internet Explorer Warning Messages When you attempt to access the Switch HTTPS server a Windows dialog box pops up asking if you trust the server certificate Click View Certificate if you want to verify that the certificate is from the Switch You see the following Security Alert screen in Internet Explorer Select Yes to proceed to the web configurator login screen if you select No then web configurator access is blocked Figure 146 Security Alert Dialog Box Internet Explorer Security Alert x Information you exchange with this site cannot be viewed or Q changed by others However there is a problem with the site s security certificate A The
369. the frames are forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines In the example network configure 2 as the port VID on port 1 so that any untagged frames received on that port get sent to VLAN 2 Figure 21 Initial Setup Network Example Port VID E ee TM w ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example 1 Click Advanced Application gt E VLAN Fort Setting Subnet Based Vlan Protocol Based Vlan VLAN Status VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting ovre r Port isolation n 2 Enter 2 in the PVID field for port 1 and click Apply to save your fceptable Frame Type VLAN Trunking changes back to the run time ru I I 1 D All x r memory Settings in the run time ac memory are lost when the 3 r r AL z r itch 4 n m All 7 rH Switch s power is turned off z z i3 S 6 n 1 r All Y n 5 2 Configuring Switch Management IP Address The default management IP address of the Switch is 192 168 1 1 You can configure another IP address in a different subnet for management purposes The following figure shows an example Figure 22 Initial Setup Example Management IP Address Ci et Internet D i M 11 n n5 Sunnnmnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 1 Connect your computer to any Ethernet port on the Switch Make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the Switch 2 Open your web browser and enter 192 168 1 1 the default IP address in t
370. then displayed in the Switch logs The Switch Setup screen allows you to set up and configure global Switch features The IP Setup screen allows you to configure a Switch IP address subnet mask s and DNS domain name server for management purposes 7 2 System Information In the navigation panel click Basic Setting gt System Info to display the screen as shown You can check the firmware version number and monitor the Switch temperature fan speeds and voltage in this screen ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 7 Basic Setting Figure 25 Basic Setting gt System Info OETAN System Name ES 3148 ZyNOS FW Version V3 80 TZ 0 b1 7 31 2007 Ethernet Address 00 19 cb 00 adfb Hardware Monitor Temperature Unit C Temperature C Current MAX MIN Threshold Status MAC 45 5 46 0 40 0 85 0 Normal CPU 39 0 40 0 35 0 85 0 Normal PHY 38 5 39 0 33 5 85 0 Normal FAN Speed RPM Current MAX MIN Threshold Status FAN1 5763 5810 5625 2750 Normal FAN2 lt 41 0 0 2750 Error FAN3 5859 5958 5763 2750 Normal Voltage V Current MAX MIN Threshold Status 2 5 2 640 2 640 2 640 i 896 Normal 1 215 GPHY 1 280 1 280 1 280 i 1196 Normal 3 3 3 392 3 392 3 392 i 896 Normal 5 5 053 5 053 5 053 T6 Normal 12 12 220 12 220 12 220 i 1096 Normal 1 25 SWCoreA 1 280 1 280 1 280 i 896 Normal 1 8 1 840 1 840 1 840 i 996 Normal 1 3 1 328 1 328 1 328 i 1096 Normal BPS 12VIN Absent The following table describes the labels in this screen Tab
371. tile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 15 5 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Click in the Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP to display the screen shown next See Section 15 2 on page 131 for more information on dynamic link aggregation ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 15 Link Aggregation Figure 63 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol AA Link Aggregation Setting Active O System Priority 65535 Group ID LACP Active T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 OO Oooo Port LACP Timeout a 30 v seconds 1 0 seconds 30 seconds 0 seconds co wer co seconds v seconds 0 seconds 0 seconds awe NEN Ow SAE NANA Ww OE IE SS Ww WP WP OWS WS X O S US Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 40 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP wm OO 4 600 ND Wer co co co LABEL DESCRIPTION ru Note Do not configure this screen unless you want to enable Control dynamic link aggregation Protocol Active Select this checkbox to enable Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP System LACP system priority is a number between 1 and 65 535 The switch with the lowes
372. tive Name Mode Source Port Receiver Port 802 1p Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 60 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable MVR to allow one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Multicast VLAN Enter the VLAN ID 1 to 4094 of the multicast VLAN ID 802 1p Priority Select a priority level 0 7 with which the Switch replaces the priority in outgoing IGMP control packets belonging to this multicast VLAN Mode Specify the MVR mode on the Switch Choices are Dynamic and Compatible Select Dynamic to send IGMP reports to all MVR source ports in the multicast VLAN Select Compatible to set the Switch not to send IGMP reports Port This field displays the port number on the Switch ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 22 Multicast Table 60 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports
373. transmit data in clear text SSH Secure Shell is a secure communication protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide secure encrypted communication between two hosts over an unsecured network Figure 143 SSH Communication Example SSH Client 30 5 How SSH works The following table summarizes how a secure connection is established between two remote hosts Figure 144 How SSH Works Internet os 1 Host Identification The SSH client sends a connection request to the SSH server The server identifies itself with a host key The client encrypts a randomly generated session key with the host key and server key and sends the result back to the server The client automatically saves any new server public keys In subsequent connections the server public key is checked against the saved version on the client computer ES 3148 User s Guide 255 Chapter 30 Access Control 2 Encryption Method Once the identification 1s verified both the client and server must agree on the type of encryption method to use 3 Authentication and Data Transmission After the identification is verified and data encryption activated a secure tunnel is established between the client and the server The client then sends its authentication information user name and password to the server to log in to the server 30 6 SSH Implementation on the Switch Your Switch supports SSH version 2 using RSA authentication and t
374. tries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time Start Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Daylight Saving Time The time is displayed in the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of March Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would select Second Sunday March and 2 00 Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would select Last Sunday March and the last field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would select 2 00 because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 7 Basic Setting Table 10 Basic Setting gt General Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION End Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Daylight Saving Time The time field uses the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the first Sunday of November Each time zone in the United State
375. ttings Scripting amp Active scripting Disan Q Pramp 3 Allow paste operations via script Disable 9 Enable Prompt amp Scripting of Java applets Q Disable OQ Prompt Lienas AukhSenkie Sion E b custom settings Reset to Medium Reset ced Java Permissions From Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Security tab Click the Custom Level button Scroll down to Microsoft VM Under Java permissions make sure that a safety level is selected Click OK to close the window cO WN Figure 203 Security Settings Java Security Settings Settings Q Disable 9 Enable es Font download Q Disable 9 Enable a Prompt 3 Microsoft VM Java permissions Q Custom J Disable Jav 9 High safety Q Low safety Reset custom settings Reset to Medium Reset J ES 3148 User s Guide 321 Appendix B Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions JAVA Sun 1 From Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Advanced tab 2 Make sure that Use Java 2 for applet under Java Sun is selected 3 Click OK to close the window Figure 204 Java Sun General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings O Use inline AutoComplete O Use Passive FTP for firewall and DSL modem compatibility Use smooth scrolling E HTTP 1 1 settings Use HTTP 1 1 O Use HTTP
376. ty public Set Community public Trap Community public Trap Destination Version Port Username User Information Index Username Security Level Authentication Privacy 1 admin noauth MDs DES j Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 103 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP LABEL DESCRIPTION General Setting Use this section to specify the SNMP version and community password values Version Select the SNMP version for the Switch The SNMP version on the Switch must match the version on the SNMP manager Choose SNMP version 2c v2c SNMP version 3 v3 or both v3v2c Note SNMP version 2c is backwards compatible with SNMP version 1 Get Community Enter the Get Community string which is the password for the incoming Get and GetNext requests from the management station The Get Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower Set Community Enter the Set Community which is the password for incoming Set requests from the management station The Set Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower Trap Community Enter the Trap Community string which is the password sent with each trap to the SNMP manager The Trap Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower Trap Destination Use this section to configure where to send SNMP traps from the
377. unneling protocol uses this service FINGER TCP 79 Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on ES 3148 User s Guide 335 Appendix D Common Services Table 135 Commonly Used Services continued NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION FTP TCP 20 File Transfer Program a program to enable TCP 21 fast transfer of files including large files that may not be possible by e mail H 323 TCP 1720 NetMeeting uses this protocol HTTP TCP 80 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol a client server protocol for the world wide web HTTPS TCP 443 HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e commerce ICMP User Defined 1 Internet Control Message Protocol is often used for diagnostic or routing purposes ICQ UDP 4000 This is a popular Internet chat program IGMP User Defined 2 Internet Group Management Protocol is MULTICAST used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts IKE UDP 500 The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and management IRC TCP UDP 6667 This is another popular Internet chat program MSN Messenger TCP 1863 Microsoft Networks messenger service uses this protocol NEW ICQ TCP 5190 An Internet chat program NEWS TCP 144 A protocol for news groups NFS UDP 2049 Network File System NFS is a client server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing
378. unting 185 IP Source Guard 199 Loop Guard 219 Static Routing 223 Differentiated Services 225 DHCP 233 Maintenance 239 Access Control 245 Diagnostic 263 Syslog 265 Cluster Management 269 MAC Table 275 ARP Table 277 Configure Clone 279 The Web Configurator This section introduces the configuration and functions of the web configurator 4 1 Introduction The web configurator is an HTML based management interface that allows easy Switch setup and management via Internet browser Use Internet Explorer 6 0 and later or Netscape Navigator 7 0 and later versions The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels In order to use the web configurator you need to allow Web browser pop up windows from your device Web pop up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 JavaScript enabled by default Java permissions enabled by default 4 2 System Login 1 Start your web browser 2 Type http and the IP address of the Switch for example the default is 192 168 1 1 in the Location or Address field Press ENTER 3 The login screen appears The default username is admin and associated default password is 1234 The date and time display as shown if you have not configured a time server nor manually entered a time and date in the General Setup screen ES 3148 User s Guide 51 Chapter 4 The Web Configurator Figure 15 Web Configurator Log
379. unting up the number of ones in this case results in 24 ied Note You must select either UDP or TCP in the IP Protocol field before you configure the socket numbers Select Any to apply the rule to all TCP UDP protocol port numbers or select the second option and enter a TCP UDP protocol port number ES 3148 User s Guide 151 Chapter 18 Classifier Table 44 Advanced Application gt Classifier continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Click Add to insert the entry in the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults 18 3 Viewing and Editing Classifier Configuration To view a summary of the classifier configuration scroll down to the summary table at the bottom of the Classifier screen To change the settings of a rule click a number in the Index field BS When two rules conflict with each other a higher layer rule has priority over lower layer rule Figure 73 Advanced Application gt Classifier Summary Table Index Active Name Rule Delete 1 Yes Example EtherType IP SrcMac 00 50 ba ad 4f81 SrcPort port 2 Li Delete Ca
380. ur parts is known as an octet An octet is an eight digit binary number for example 11000000 which is 192 in decimal notation Therefore each octet has a possible range of 00000000 to 11111111 in binary or 0 to 255 in decimal The following figure shows an example IP address in which the first three octets 192 168 1 are the network number and the fourth octet 16 is the host ID ES 3148 User s Guide Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting Figure 207 Network Number and Host ID 192 168 1 16 r T ossa msi im SS 1 M I f po Ss See A P BEE am m m m m m m m m m How much of the IP address is the network number and how much is the host ID varies according to the subnet mask Subnet Masks A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number and which bits are part of the host ID using a logical AND operation The term subnet is short for sub network A subnet mask has 32 bits If a bit in the subnet mask is a 1 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network number If a bit in the subnet mask is 0 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the host ID The following example shows a subnet mask identifying the network number in bold text and host ID of an IP address 192 168 1 2 in decimal Table 124 IP Address Network Number and Host ID Example OCTET O
381. using Mbps RJ 1000Base T compatible Category 5 5e 6 copper cables 45 Ports 2 Mini Use mini GBIC transceivers in these slots for fiber optic connections to backbone GBIC Slots Ethernet switches 3 1 1 Ethernet Ports The Switch has 48 10 100Mbps auto negotiating auto crossover Ethernet ports In 10 100Mbps Fast Ethernet the speed can be 10Mbps or 100Mbps and the duplex mode can be half duplex or full duplex ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview There are two pairs of Gigabit Ethernet mini GBIC ports The mini GBIC ports have priority over the Gigabit ports This means that if a mini GBIC port and the corresponding Gigabit port are connected at the same time the Gigabit port will be disabled The speed of the Gigabit Ethernet mini GBIC ports can be 100Mbps or 1000Mbps and the duplex mode can be half duplex at 100 Mbps or full duplex An auto negotiating port can detect and adjust to the optimum Ethernet speed and duplex mode full duplex or half duplex of the connected device An auto crossover auto MDI MDI X port automatically works with a straight through or crossover Ethernet cable 3 1 1 1 Default Ethernet Settings The factory default negotiation settings for the Ethernet ports on the switch are Speed Auto Duplex Auto Flow control Off 3 1 2 Mini GBIC Slots BS These are slots for mini GBIC Gigabit Interface Converter transceivers A transceiver is a single unit
382. uter before uploading to the device O Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong model firmware may damage your device From the Maintenance screen display the Firmware Upgrade screen as shown next Figure 135 Management gt Maintenance gt Firmware Upgrade Firmware Upgrade d Maintenance To upgrade the internal switch firmware browse the location of the binary BIN file and click Upgrade button File Path Browse Rebooting Upgrade Type the path and file name of the firmware file you wish to upload to the Switch in the File Path text box or click Browse to locate it Select the Rebooting check box if you want to reboot the Switch and apply the new firmware immediately Firmware upgrades are only applied after a reboot Click Upgrade to load the new firmware After the firmware upgrade process is complete see the System Info screen to verify your current firmware version number ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 29 Maintenance 29 6 Restore a Configuration File Restore a previously saved configuration from your computer to the Switch using the Restore Configuration screen Figure 136 Management gt Maintenance gt Restore Configuration E Restore Configuration g Maintenance To restore the device s configuration form a file browse to the location ofthe configuration file and click Restore button File Path Browse Restore Type the
383. v DERE rv c o POCHE HR PORE FA EAE 178 22 Genaral vistgdsplcpnM T 178 22 6 MYR Group Configuration ET 180 22 0 1 MVR Configuration Example ies n Eden gd na naa and EEA 181 Chapter 23 Authentication amp Accounting uiiraone onu e tonio rena ime nn Un rtu Ip tak Vo FxPER eOs VR o eR OMS BUR EFE PR ESPERE IRURE EAEREFaKYAR 185 23 1 Authentication Authorization and Accounting sss 185 25 1 1 Local Heer ACCOUMES 2 ot ted eu RO ED RE RE RO od ni dec nd a ls ale earls aca 185 Poe RADIUS and TALES uouxetutaactentuvamtpivn pases eHebudee sik eiu deas aM ies feboica ib tiude 186 43 2 Authentication end Accounting SOGGENS iuc ee ertt ebat rbta nato isinsin MPa ebbe PERSE inns 186 ES RAIS Seer Deu aooaaeoa ana aa i ERO MU EN Ui VERSER AA BI CEP pu HE ER UPS 186 25 2 2 DNOACOTGBVer SSIUD xeneusmieni spine rris Ubi EM EM aussie 188 22 2 3 Authentication and Accounting Setup ouais adeat devenu rui ia dede 190 23 24 Vendor Sp cific Attribute 1e eet erp Ep b Tere Lun bu GS MR MU epe sa aloes 193 23 3 eeeu vBrtES Eus 194 23 3 1 Attributes Used for Authentication sss 195 23 3 2 Atiibutes Used TOF POCCOUETBEIG icisakk rrr DNE Er ROT drEFFH E da EEPE Io rer FER Deae RON SEREEERIN 195 Chapter 24 IP Source 2ti ee e 199 241 IP Source Guard QUEVIBW 21r i pet pa IESU etr EE EH tW EE e ER o P ute Eu 199 24 11 DHCP Snooping CO uGPHIQUE oisi reed e rapa auadale xawadi
384. via the external servers ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 23 Authentication amp Accounting Table 65 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt Auth and Acct Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Login These fields specify which database the Switch should use first second and third to authenticate administrator accounts users for Switch management Configure the local user accounts in the Access Control gt Logins screen The TACACS and RADIUS are external servers Before you specify the priority make sure you have set up the corresponding database correctly first You can specify up to three methods for the Switch to authenticate administrator accounts The Switch checks the methods in the order you configure them first Method 1 then Method 2 and finally Method 3 You must configure the settings in the Method 1 field If you want the Switch to check other sources for administrator accounts specify them in Method 2 and Method 3 fields Select local to have the Switch check the administrator accounts configured in the Access Control gt Logins screen Select radius to have the Switch authenticate the administrator accounts through a RADIUS server Select tacacs to have the Switch authenticate the administrator accounts through a TACACS server Accounting Use this section to configure accounting settings on the Switch Update Period This is the amount of time in minutes before the Switch
385. vice You can use this one or create a different one if you like Protocol This is the type of IP protocol used by the service If this is TCP UDP then the service uses the same port number with TCP and UDP If this is USER DEFINED the Port s is the IP protocol number not the port number Port s This value depends on the Protocol Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers Ifthe Protocol is TCP UDP or TCP UDP this is the IP port number Ifthe Protocol is USER this is the IP protocol number Description This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations in which this service is used Table 135 Commonly Used Services NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION AH User Defined 51 The IPSEC AH Authentication Header IPSEC TUNNEL tunneling protocol uses this service AIM New ICQ TCP 5190 AOL s Internet Messenger service It is also used as a listening port by ICQ AUTH TCP 113 Authentication protocol used by some servers BGP TCP 179 Border Gateway Protocol BOOTP CLIENT UDP 68 DHCP Client BOOTP SERVER UDP 67 DHCP Server CU SEEME TCP 7648 A popular videoconferencing solution from UDP 24032 White Pines Software DNS TCP UDP 53 Domain Name Server a service that matches web names for example www zyxel com to IP numbers ESP User Defined 50 The IPSEC ESP Encapsulation Security IPSEC TUNNEL Protocol t
386. width Control Cluster Management Broadcast Storm Control MAC Table Mirroring ARP Table Link Aggregation Configure Clone Port Authentication Port Security Classifier Policy Rule Queuing Method VLAN Stacking Multicast Auth and Acct IP Source Guard Loop Guard ES 3148 User s Guide 53 Chapter 4 The Web Configurator The following table lists the various web configurator screens within the sub links ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator Table 5 Web Configurator Screen Sub links Details ADVANCED BASIC SETTING APPLICATION IP APPLICATION MANAGEMENT System Info VLAN Status Static Routing Maintenance General Setup VLAN Detail DiffServ Firmware Upgrade Switch Setup VLAN Port Setting 2 rate 3 Color Restore _ IP Setup Subnet Based Marker Configuration VLAN DSCP Setting Backup ort Setup Protocol Based Configuration DHCP Status VLAN Access Control DHCP Relay Static VLAN VLAN Setti SNMP Static MAC Forwarding Nd Trap Group Filtering Logins Spanning Tree Protocol Service Access Status Control Spanning Tree Valse Configuration Di ti Rapid Spanning agnosie Tree Protocol Syslog Setup Multiple Rapid Syslog Server Spanning Tree Setup Protocol l Cluster Management Multiple Spanning Status Tree Protocol Clusteri Bandwidth Control Management Broadcast Storm Configuration Control MAC Table Mirroring ARP Table Link Aggregation Status Configure Clone Link Aggregation S
387. work This key must be the same on the external RADIUS accounting server and the Switch Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing RADIUS accounting server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 23 2 2 TACACS Server Setup Use this screen to configure your TACACS server settings See Section 23 1 2 on page 186 for more information on TACACS servers Click on the TACACS Server Setup link in the Authentication and Accounting screen to view the screen as shown ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 23 Authentication amp Accounting Figure 96 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt TACACS Server Setup ORAS NENNNNP Authentication Server Mode index priority Timeout 30 seconds TCP Port Shared Secret E ki Index IP Address 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 Apply Cancel Accounting Server 30 seconds Timeout TCP Port i Index IP Address Shared Secret 1 0 0 0 0 Auth and Acct Delete ee ee 1 H Delete D o 2 0 0 0 0 a NENNEN Apply Cancel The followin
388. work Number Subnet Planning NO T ERS ED SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS NO HOSTS PER 1 255 255 128 0 17 32766 2 255 255 192 0 18 16382 3 255 255 224 0 19 8190 4 255 255 240 0 20 16 4094 5 255 255 248 0 21 32 2046 6 255 255 252 0 22 64 1022 7 255 255 254 0 23 128 510 8 255 255 255 0 24 256 254 9 255 255 255 128 25 512 126 10 255 255 255 192 26 1024 62 11 255 255 255 224 27 2048 30 12 255 255 255 240 28 4096 14 13 255 255 255 248 29 8192 6 ES 3148 User s Guide 331 Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 134 16 bit Network Number Subnet Planning continued NO BORROWED NO HOSTS PER HOST BITS SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS SUBNET 14 255 255 255 252 30 16384 2 15 255 255 255 254 31 32768 1 Configuring IP Addresses Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established If this is the case it is recommended that you select a network number from 192 168 0 0 to 192 168 255 0 The Internet Assigned Number Authority LANA
389. work resources of another on the same LAN thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of another user in the same building VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable logical broadcast domain In traditional switched environments all broadcast packets go to each and every individual port With VLAN all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain BS VLAN is unidirectional it only governs outgoing traffic See Chapter 8 on page 85 for information on port based and 802 1Q tagged VLANs 7 5 Switch Setup Screen Click Basic Setting and then Switch Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown The VLAN setup screens change depending on whether you choose 802 1Q or Port Based in the VLAN Type field in this screen Refer to the chapter on VLAN ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 7 Basic Setting Figure 27 Basic Setting gt Switch Setup E Switch Setup io 1 VLAN Type eile Port Based Bridge Control Protocol Transparency Active O MAC Address Learning Aging Time 300 seconds Join Timer 200 milliseconds GARP Timer Leave Timer 600 milliseconds Leave All Timer 10000 milliseconds Priority Queue Assignment evel eve eve eve eve eve 6 5 4 evel3 2 1 0 eve Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 11 Basic Setting gt Switch Setup LABEL DESCRIPT
390. works B Network Monitor3 Driver Brie File and PRIX Shore for bah a Networks Es Install Uninstall Description Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks OK l Cancel ES 3148 User s Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 7 The Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties window opens the General tab Ifyou have a dynamic IP address click Obtain an IP address automatically Ifyou have a static IP address click Use the following IP address and fill in the IP address Subnet mask and Default gateway fields Click Advanced Figure 181 Windows Vista Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties nex You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Use the following IP address Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses Advanced cance 8 If you do not know your gateway s IP address remove any previously installed gateways in the IP Settings tab and click OK Do one or more of the following if you want to configure additional IP addresses nthe IP Settings tab in IP addresses click Add In TC
391. ws Pop up Blocker urn Off Pop up Blocker Manage Add ons Pop up Blocker Setting Synchronize f windows Update Windows Messenger Internet Options You can also check if pop up blocking is disabled in the Pop up Blocker section in the Privacy tab 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Internet Options Privacy ES 3148 User s Guide 317 Appendix B Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 2 Clear the Block pop ups check box in the Pop up Blocker section of the screen This disables any web pop up blockers you may have enabled Figure 198 Internet Options Privacy Internet Options General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings Move the slider to select a privacy setting for the Internet gt zone Medium Blocks third party cookies that do not have a compact privacy policy Blocks third party cookies that use personally identifiable LC information without your implicit consent Restricts first party cookies that use personally identifiable information without implicit consent Pop up Blocker Prevent most pop up windows from appearing Block pop ups 3 Click Apply to save this setting Enable Pop up Blockers with Exceptions Alternatively if you only want to allow pop up windows from your device see the following steps 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Internet Options and then the Privacy tab 2 Select Settin
392. ws Vista Nebwork and Sharing Center ousecee pter reset t t raa t AISAN 305 Figure 180 Windows Vista Local Area Connection Properties ssssssseeseee 305 Figure 181 Windows Vista Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties sssssesss 306 Figure 182 Windows Vista Advanced TCP IP Properties ssssssseeeeeenee 307 Figure 183 Windows Vista Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties esssssss 308 Figure 184 Macintosh OS 8 9 Apple MONU 125 5 ori pr HRS EEL S EE RU EEEEV RYE REF e FERE End di opted baa 309 Foue ea Macintosh OST TORP sc ote ata ua utu cha RM Ka RUE aa aas si to ace t EDU d Hb 309 Figure 186 Macintosh OS X Apple MOD isses eecisk ovde bis Sio Ebrei deae P Ne E Yap cdi USE eeni A Ven tei did Ei 310 Figure Te Nacidos OS X Meblwoatk coa pr ete RERO KE rd EB cina ete ea i epa ge d a ae eds 311 Figure 188 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Network Configuration DEVICES Locas cerca nta ke aea 312 Figure 189 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Ethernet Device General scscccccssissesscescseses cossesisacsseasnsis tonio ro coneenenes 312 Figure 190 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Network Configuration DNS esee nennen nnn 313 Figure 191 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Network Configuration Activate cisescisdsieieicqacssbaiaiegiadarniedaeekauenesied 313 Figure 192 Red Hat 9 0 Dynamic IP Address Setting in ifconfig ethO sssssesssss 314 Figure 193 Red Hat 9 0 Static IP
393. y The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 20 Queuing Method ES 3148 User s Guide VLAN Stacking This chapter shows you how to configure VLAN stacking on your Switch See the chapter on VLANs for more background information on Virtual LAN 21 1 VLAN Stacking Overview A service provider can use VLAN stacking to allow it to distinguish multiple customers VLANs even those with the same customer assigned VLAN ID within its network Use VLAN stacking to add an outer VLAN tag to the inner IEEE 802 1Q tagged frames that enter the network By tagging the tagged frames double tagged frames the service provider can manage up to 4 094 VLAN groups with each group containing up to 4 094 customer VLANs This allows a service provider to provide different service based on specific VLANs for many different customers A service provider s customers may require a range of VLANS to handle multiple applications A service provider s customers can assign their own inner VLAN tags on ports for these applications The service provider can assign an outer VLAN tag for each customer Therefore there is no VLAN tag overlap among customers so traffic from different customers i
394. y clears all of the category s trap check boxes the Switch only sends traps from selected categories Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 30 3 6 Setting Up Login Accounts Up to five people one administrator and four non administrators may access the Switch via web configurator at any one time An administrator is someone who can both view and configure Switch changes The username for the Administrator is always admin The default administrator password is 1234 BS It is highly recommended that you change the default administrator password 1234 ES 3148 User s Guide 253 Chapter 30 Access Control A non administrator username is something other than admin is someone who can view but not configure Switch settings Click Management gt Access Control gt Logins to view the screen as shown Figure 142 Management gt Access Control gt Logins ITD Administrator Edit Logins 1 2 2 3 4 confirm Please record your new password whenever you change it The system will lock you out if you have forgotten your password Login User Name Password Retype to confirm Access Co
395. ynamic using GVRP static added as a permanent entry or other added in another way such as via Multicast VLAN Registration MVR 8 5 3 Configure a Static VLAN Use this screen to configure and view 802 1Q VLAN parameters for the Switch See Section 8 1 on page 85 for more information on static VLAN To configure a static VLAN click Static VLAN in the VLAN Status screen to display the screen as shown next Figure 34 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN Static VLAN VLAN Status ACTIVE O Name VLAN Group ID Port Control Tagging Normal M Tx Tagging 1 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging 2 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging 3 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging 4 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Iv Tx Tagging 5 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging 6 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Iv Tx Tagging Tf Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Iv Tx Tagging 8 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging iin uS LON SONS fl ell fe fn fh Add Cancel Clear VID Active Name Delete 1 Yes 1 O Delete Cancel ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 17 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION ACTIVE Select this check box to activate the VLAN settings Name Enter a descriptive name for the VLAN group for identification purposes This name consists of up to 64 printable charac
396. ys the source port of the ARP packet VID This field displays the source VLAN ID of the ARP packet Sender MAC This field displays the source MAC address of the ARP packet Sender IP This field displays the source IP address of the ARP packet Num Pkts This field displays the number of ARP packets that were consolidated into this log message The Switch consolidates identical log messages generated by ARP packets in the log consolidation interval into one log message You can configure this interval in the ARP Inspection Configure screen See Section 24 7 on page 215 Reason This field displays the reason the log message was generated dhcp deny An ARP packet was discarded because it violated a dynamic binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID static deny An ARP packet was discarded because it violated a static binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID deny An ARP packet was discarded because there were no bindings with the same MAC address and VLAN ID dhcp permit An ARP packet was forwarded because it matched a dynamic binding static permit An ARP packet was forwarded because it matched a static binding In the ARP Inspection VLAN Configure screen you can configure the Switch to generate log messages when ARP packets are discarded or forwarded based on the VLAN ID of the ARP packet See Section 24 7 2 on page 217 Time This field displays when the log message was generated
397. yslog server Delete Select an entry s Delete check box and click Delete to remove the entry Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES 3148 User s Guide 267 Chapter 32 Syslog ES 3148 User s Guide Cluster Management This chapter introduces cluster management 33 1 Clustering Management Status Overview Cluster Management allows you to manage switches through one switch called the cluster manager The switches must be directly connected and be in the same VLAN group so as to be able to communicate with one another Table 112 ZyXEL Clustering Management Specifications Maximum number of cluster members 24 Cluster Member Models Must be compatible with ZyXEL cluster management implementation Cluster Manager The Switch through which you manage the cluster member switches Cluster Members The switches being managed by the cluster manager switch In the following example switch A in the basement is the cluster manager and the other switches on the upper floors of the building are cluster members ES 3148 User s Guide Chapter 33 Cluster Management Figure 155 Clustering Application Example SEN E 7 CS lt I VPumumuumuumumuv 33 2 Cluster Management Status Click Management gt Cluster Management in the navigation panel to display the following Screen BS A cluster can only have one manager

ZyXEL ES-3148 Series User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents